£ibrarjp  of  Che  theological  ^eminarip 

PRINCETON  •  NEW  JERSEY 


PRESENTED  BY 


David  B 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


https://archive.org/details/manualofchaldeel00rigg_1 


MANUAL 

OF  THE 

CIIALDEE  LANGUAGE; 

CONTAINING  A 

CHALDEE  GRAMMAR, 

CHIEFLY  FROM  THE  GERMAN  OF  PROFESSOR  G.  B.  WINER  ; 


CHRESTOMATHY, 

CONSISTING  OF  SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS,  AND  INCLUDING  NOTES  ON  THE 

BIBLICAL  CHALDEE  ;  AND 


A 

VOCABULARY, 

ADAPTED  TO  THE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


WITH 

AN  APPENDIX 

ON  THE  RABBINIC  AND  SAMARITAN  DIALECTS. 


BY  ELIAS  RIGGS,  D.D. 


FOURTH  EDITION,  REVISED. 


NEW  YORK: 

ANSON  D.  F.  RANDOLPH  &  CO., 

900  BROADWAY,  COR.  2Qth  STREET. 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  tne  year  1858,  by 
ELIAS  RICOS, 

.  In  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern  District  of 

New  York. 


CONTENTS, 


PREFACE  »•••«••••«••  5 

Introduction.  Chaldee  Language  and  Literature  ....  9 


GRAMMAR, 


PAGE 


PART  I. — Orthography  and  Orthoepy. 


Consonants  . 

Vowels 

Daghesh 

Mappiq 

Accents  .  .  . 

Tone-syllable 

Of  reading  unpointed  text  . 


17 

17 

19 

20 
20 
20 
21 


PAET  II. — Etymology. 

Derivation  and  inflection  of  words  gen¬ 


erally  .....  22 

Mutations  of  consonants  .  .  .23 

Vowel  changes  ....  25 

PRONOUNS  ;  personal  and  possessive  .  27 

Suffix  pronouns  ....  28 

Demonstrative  pronouns  .  .  .  •  29 

Relative  and  interrogative  •  .  29 

VEEBS  ;  derivation  and  inflection  .  30 

Conjugations  ....  30 

Moods  and  tenses  .  .  .  .82 

Inflection  of  the  Regular  V erb  .  33 

Notes  on  the  Par.  of  the  Regular  Verb  .  34 

Personal  inflection  of  the  participles  .  36 

Unfrequent  Conjugations  .  .  .37 

Quadrilateral  Verbs  ...  37 

Verbs  with  Gutturals  .  .  .37 

Regular  Verbs  with  Suffix-pronouns  .  39 

IRREGULAR  VERBS  .  .  .40 

Verbs  Pe  Nun  .  .  .  .  41 

- Ayin  doubled  .  .  .41 

- Pe  Yodh  .  ...  42 

- Pe  Aleph  .  .  •  .44 

- Ayin  Vav  and  Ayin  Yodh  .  44 

■ - Lamedh  Aleph  .  .  .45 

- doubly  anomalous  .  .  47 


Verbs  defective,  and  mixed  forms 

- irregular,  with  suffix  pronouns 

NOUNS;  derivation 

- gender  and  number 

- states ;  emphatic 

- -  Declension  . 

Dec.  I. 

Dec.  II.  III.  .... 
Dec.  IV.  V. 

Dec.  VI.  VII. 

Dec.  VIII.  IX.  . 

Irregular  nouns  ... 
ADJECTIVES  . 

Numerals  .... 
PARTICLES ;  adverbs 
Prepositions  .... 
Conjunctions  . 

Interjections  .... 


PAGE 


48 

49 

50 
.  51 

52 
.  54 

54 


55 

56 

57 

58 

59 
59 

59 

60 
61 
61 


.  62 


PART  III. — Syntax. 


PRONOUNS;  personal  . 

- relative  ... 

- interrogative 

- reflexive,  how  designated  . 

- indefinite - 

- demonstrative - - 

VEEBS  ;  use  of  the  tenses 

Peculiar  mode  of  designating  certain  tenses 

Use  of  the  Imperative  . 

- Infinitive  .... 

- Participles 

Optative  mood  .... 
Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject 
Impersonal  verbs ;  how  designated 
Regimen  of  verbs  .  .  . 

Verbs  used  for  adverbs  . 


63 

64 
64 
64 
64 
64 

64 

65 

66 
66 
66 
67 
67 
67 
63 
63 


4 


CONTENTS 


Constructio  praegnans  .  , 

PAGE 

68 

Ellipsis 

00 

SO 

• 

• 

NOUNS ;  designation  of  cases 

69 

Use  of  the  cases 

.  70 

- plural 

70 

Repetition  of  nouns . 

.  .  70 

ADJECTIVES  . 

.  70 

PASS 

Adjectives ;  comparison  of  .  .  .71 

NUMERALS  ....  71 

PARTICLES ;  adverbs  .  .  .72 

Negatives  ....  7° 

Interrogative  particles  .  '  . 

PARADIGMS  of  verbs,  nouns,  &c.  .  7 


CHRESTOMATHY. 


PART  I— Select  sentences  from  the 
Targum  op  Onkelos  .  .  92 

PART  II. — Extracts  from  the  Tar- 
gums. 

I.  History  of  the  fall,  Gen.  3.  Onkelos  .  97 

II.  The  same,  Gen.  3.  Pseudo-Jonathan  100 

III.  The  same,  Gen.  8.  Jerusalem  Targum  105 
IY.  Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and 

Abel,  Gen.  4:  8.  Jerusalem  Targum  .  108 
Y.  Marriage  of  Samson,  Judg.  14.  Jona¬ 
than  .....  109 

YI.  Prediction  of  Messiah’s  kingdom, 

Ps.  2.  Author  of  the  Targum  uncer¬ 
tain  .  .  .  .  .111 

VOCABULARY 

APPENDIX  A.  Rabbinical  D’alect 
“  B.  Samaritan  Dialect 


YII.  The  praises  of  Jehovah,  Ps.  8  .  112 

VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard,  Isa.  5 : 1 — 7. 

Jonathan  ....  112 

IX.  Extract  from  Isaiah’s  prediction  of 
the  Messiah,  Isa.  52 : 13 — 53 :  2.  Jona¬ 
than  .....  114 

X.  Aphorisms  of  Solomon,  Prov.  10 : 1 — 

12.  Targumist  unknown  .  .  115 


PART  III.— Notes  on  the  Biblical 
Chaldee. 


I.  Jeremiah  10:11  . 

• 

.  117 

II.  Daniel  2 :  4—7 : 28 

118 

III.  Ezra  4 :  8 — 6 : 18 

.  122 

IY.  Ezra  7 : 12—23 

122 

.  123 

146 

151 

4 


PREFACE. 


The  first  edition  of  this  work  was  published  in  1832.  The  preface  to 
that  edition,  kindly  furnished  by  my  respected  instructor,  the  Rev. 
Moses  Stuart,  then  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Theological 
Seminary  at  Andover,  so  well  sets  forth  the  advantages  of  studying  the 
Chaldee  dialect,  that  I  retain  the  principal  portion  of  it  here.  Prof. 
Stuart  says  : 

“  The  study  of  the  Chaldee  language  is  worthy  of  commendation,  on 
various  grounds. 

“  (1)  A  knowledge  of  it  is  highly  important,  in  aiding  the  student 
more  fully  to  understand  the  Hebrew.  The  basis  of  Hebrew,  Chaldee, 
Syriac,  Arabic,  and  Samaritan,  is  well  known,  by  every  good  oriental 
scholar,  to  be  one  and  the  same.  Hence  it  may  be  truly  said,  that  he 
who  has  a  solid  and  fundamental  knowledge  of  the  genius  of  one  of 
these  languages,  possesses  a  real  knowledge  of  them  all.  The  meaning 
is,  that  the  genius,  structure,  idiom,  peculiarities  of  syntax,  and  a  mul¬ 
titude  of  the  words,  are  substantially  the  same  in  all;  so  that  he  who 
has  acquired  a  radical  acquaintance  with  any  one  of  them,  is  prepared  to 
make  very  rapid  and  easy  progress  in  them  all.  The  student  who  un¬ 
derstands  the  Hebrew,  has  only  to  read  through  the  pages  of  the  Gram¬ 
mar  in  the  following  sheets,  in  order  to  be  fully  satisfied  of  the  correct¬ 
ness  of  this  statement.  And  if  correct,  then  is  it  obvious,  that  in  every 
step  of  his  progress  in  the  study  of  the  Chaldee,  he  is  gaining  additional 
light  and  satisfaction  and  confirmation,  in  regard  to  the  meaning,  forms, 
and  structure  of  the  Hebrew.  Who  will  say  that  the  study  of  Greek, 
Latin,  French  (specially  the  Norman),  and  Saxon,  does  not  cast  light 
upon  the  English  language  ?  Indeed,  how  can  it  ever  be  radically  un¬ 
derstood,  without  sonle  knowledge  of  these  languages  ?  But  the  Chal¬ 
dee  is  much  nearer  to  the  Hebrew,  than  any  of  these  languages  to  the 
English. 

“  (2)  The  most  important  ancient  helps  extant,  for  illustrating  the 


6 


PREFACE. 


meaning  of  Hebrew  words,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.  The  two 
Targums  of  Onkelos  and  Jonathan  (which  extend  over  the  most  con¬ 
siderable  portion  of  the  Old  Testament)  are  more  to  be  depended  on 
in  difficult  cases,  than  any  other  aid  to  which  we  can  resort,  in  all  the 
store-houses  of  antiquity.  In  all  probability  they  are  older  than  the 
Christian  era  (excepting  a  few  later  adscititious  passages  that  have 
been  mingled  with  them)  ;  and  inasmuch  as  they  are  substantially  of  the 
same  idiom  with  the  Hebrew,  so  they  often  give  us  the  exact  shape,  as 
well  as  meaning  of  the  Hebrew,  better  than  any  or  all  other  ancient  ver¬ 
sions.  Let  the  attentive  student  note  the  use  which  Rosenmueller  has, 
with  so  manifest  advantage  to  his  commentaries,  often  made  of  the  Tar¬ 
gums.  We  may  reasonably  have  a  confidence  in  such  ancient  Chaldee 
translators,  that  they,  at  least  for  the  most  part,  rightly  understood 
their  original. 

u  (3)  Several  chapters  in  Ezra  and  Daniel,  as  exhibited  in  our  He¬ 
brew  Bibles,  are  in  the  Chaldee  language.  The  student,  then,  who  de¬ 
signs  to  acquire  the  power  of  consulting  all  the  original  Scriptures,  must 
make  himself  acquainted  with  the  Chaldee  language. 

“  (4)  Whoever  designs  to  pursue  Talmudic  and  Rabbinic  literature, 
or  to  be  able  to  judge  of  quotations  from  the  Talmud  or  the  Rabbins, 
must  have  some  acquaintance  with  the  Chaldee.  The  Gremara  of  the 
Talmud  is  Chaldaic  in  its  idiom  ;  and  so  are  nearly  all  of  the  older 
Rabbinical  writings.  All  the  works  of  this  class  are,  indeed,  of  a  cor¬ 
rupt  dialect  and  mixed  nature ;  but  they  all  Clialdaize. 

“  (5)  The  Chaldee  is  a  very  easy  conquest  to  the  well-grounded  He¬ 
brew  student.  A  few  weeks  devoted  to  it  will  enable  him  to  read  it 
with  as  much  facility  as  he  does  the  Hebrew.  Buxtorf’s  Lexicon 
Chald.  Talmud.  Labbinicum ,  is  a  complete  store-house  of  these  dia¬ 
lects,  and  is  a  book  which  may  be  procured  for  a  trifle.  It  is  an  “  opus 
triginta  annorum  /  ”  and  truly  a  paragon  in  this  species  of  lexicography. 
Every  biblical  student  should  possess  it.  A  Polyglott  Bible  will  pre¬ 
sent  the  student  with  all  the  Targums;  and  Buxtorf’s  Liblia  Labbinica 
will  not  only  give  these,  but  all  the  distinguished  Rabbinic  commenta¬ 
ries,  such  as  those  of  Kimchi,  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra,  etc.” 

After  some  remarks  respecting  the  publication  of  such  a  work  as 
the  Chaldee  Manual  in  this  country,  he  adds : 

“  As  to  the  work  itself,  the  plan  and  the  execution  are  throughout 
such  as  Lean  commend.  The  grammar  is  brief;  but  quite  copious 
enough  for  the  student  who  is  well  versed  in  Hebrew.  In  the  text, 
notes,  and  lexicon  of  the  Chrestomathy,  will  be  found  all  that  is  needful 


PREFACE. 


7 


« 


in  an  introduction  to  the  Chaldee  language.  With  Buxtorf’s  Lexicon 
and  the  Targums,  one  can  easily  make  his  own  way,  after  reading  this 
Chrestomathy.” 

A  second  edition  of  Prof.  Winer’s  Chaldee  Grammar  appeared  at 
Leipzig  in  1842,  revised  and  considerably  enlarged.  This  was  translated 
into  English  by  the  Bev.  Hor.  B.  Ilackett,  D.D.,  Professor  of  Bibl.  Lit. 
in  Newton  Theol.  Institution,  and  published  at  Andover  in  1845. 

Bevisiting  my  native  land,  after  an  absence  of  twenty-four  years  in 
the  foreign  missionary  service  in  Greece  and  Turkey,  it  seemed  to  me 
due  to  the  cause  of  Biblical  literature  that  I  should  revise  and  re-edit 
the  Chaldee  Manual.  This,  with  the  full  concurrence  and  approbation 
of  Prof.  Ilackett,  I  have  undertaken,  availing  myself  of  whatever 
seemed  to  be  improvements  in  Prof.  Winer's  second  edition,  and  incor¬ 
porating  numerous  manuscript  notes  of  my  own.  To  the  brief  view  of 
the  Babbinic  dialect  in  the  Appendix  has  been  added  a  similar  view 
of  the  Samaritan.  The  former  is  a  Chaldaizing  Hebrew,  the  latter  a 
Hebraizing  Chaldee. 

I  trust  it  will  be  found  that  the  work  has  been  decidedly  enhanced 
in  value,  although  somewhat  diminished  in  size,  by  the  omission  from 
the  Chrestomathy  of  the  text  of  the  Biblical  Chaldee.  The  notes  are 
preserved,  and  in  the  first  edition  the  text  also  was  printed  for  conven¬ 
ience  of  reference ;  but  as  every  student  has  it  already  in  his  Hebrew 
Bible,  it  was  thought  that  his  interest  would  be  best  consulted  by  omit¬ 
ting  it  here,  and  thus  diminishing  the  size  of  the  book,  and  consequently 
its  price. 

This  edition  will  be  issued  simultaneously  in  this  country  and  in 
Great  Britain.  It  is  offered  to  the  lovers  of  biblical  and  oriental  study 
in  both  countries,  with  a  prayer  to  the  Author  of  the  Scriptures,  that 
He  would  condescend  to  employ  it  as  a  means  of  furthering  in  these 
highly  favored  lands  the  critical  study  of  the  Sacred  Volume. 

ELIAS  BIGGS. 


New  York,  January,  1858. 


In  the  tables  of  pronouns  and  numerals,  and  generally  in  the  grammar,  unusual 
forms  are  included  in  parentheses. 

In  references  to  the  Scriptures,  where  the  name  of  the  Targum  is  not  given,  that 
of  Onkelos  is  to  be  understood,  when  the  passages  cited  are  from  the  Pentateuch, 
and  that  of  Jonathan,  when  they  are  taken  from  the  prophets. 

Distinct  meanings  of  words  are  separated,  in  the  vocabulary,  by  semicolons. 
Where  two  or  more  words  are  employed  to  express  or  illustrate  the  same  definition, 
they  are  separated  by  commas. 


INTRODUCTION. 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


The  Aramean,  one  of  the  three  grand  divisions*  of  the 
Shemitish  or  Oriental  languages,  comprises  two  principal 
subdivisions ;  viz.  the  Syriac,  sometimes  called,  by  way 
of  distinction,  West  Aramean ,  and  the  Chaldee,  or  East 
Aramean,  The  appropriate  region  of  the  latter  was  the 
province  of  Babylonia,  between  the  Euphrates  and  Tigris, 
the  original  inhabitants  of  which  (related  in  respect  of 
their  origin  to  the  Hebrews  and  Syrians,  and  who  should 
not  be  confounded  with  the  Chaldeans ,  a  tribe  which 
occupied  that  region  much  later)  cultivated  this  language 
as  a  distinct  dialect,  and  communicated  it  to  the  Jews 
during  the  Babylonian  exile. 

The  Chaldeans  [XaASaioi,  d^bd]  originated,  as  is  evident  from  a 
comparison  of  the  statements  of  Greek  authors,  (particularly  Xenophon.) 
with  those  of  the  Bible,  in  the  mountains  of  Armenia.  Partly  overcome 
by  the  Assyrians,  they  removed  to  the  plains  of  Mesopotamia,  and  espe¬ 
cially  of  Babylonia,  in  the  seventh  century  B.  C.  They  afterwards  not 
only  gained  their  own  independence,  but  rose  to  universal  dominion  on 
the  ruins  of  the  great  Assyrian  Monarchy.  The  name  Babylonians  (Ezra 
4  :  9)  we  apply,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  original  inhabitants  of  Babylonia, 
who  were  of  a  Shemitish  (Aramean)  stock.  To  them  belonged  the  lan¬ 
guage  of  which  we  are  treating  ;  and  it  may  therefore  not  inappropriately 


*  Aramean,  Hebrew,  and  Arabic. 


10 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


be  termed  Babylonish.  For,  that  the  Chaldeans  did  not  speak  the  same 
language  as  the  descendants  of  Abraham  who  settled  in  Palestine  did, 
nor  even  a  kindred  dialect,  is  clear  from  the  Chaldaic  names  of  gods, 
kings,  and  offices,  which  appear  in  the  Old  Testament  after  the  time  of 
Nebuchadnezzar,  and  which  are  connected  with  the  Medo-Persian  lan¬ 
guage,  (see  Gesenius’  Geschichte  der  Hebr.  Sprach.  p.  62  seq).  but 
which  admit  no  adequate  explanation  from  the  Shemitish  dialects. 

The  appellation  Aramean  (language)  is  derived  from  2  Kings  18  :  26, 
Isa.  36  :  11,  Ez.  4  :  7,  and  Daniel  2  :  4.  In  the  first  two  passages  the  name 
rprnx  is  applied  to  the  dialect  through  which  the  Assyrian  and  Chaldean 
officers  made  themselves  understood  in  conversation  with  Hebrews  [Jews]  ; 
i.  e.  the  universal  language  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Assyrian  [Chaldean] 
kingdom  on  this  side  the  Tigris.  See  Gesenius  Com.  zu  Jes.  Vol.  I.  p. 
956  seq.  In  the  last  case,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Chaldean  magians 
address  Nebuchadnezzar  in  Aramean  ;  which  is  indeed  remarkable.  It  is 
manifest  however  that  the  same  dialect  is  meant  from  the  sequel,  in  which 
the  speech  of  the  magians  is  inserted  in  the  Chaldee  dialect,  now  so 
called.  In ‘the  Greek  and  Latin  languages  the  term  Aramean  is  not 
wholly  wanting,  (comp.  Strabo  I.  p.  212.  ed.  Siebenkees,)  although 
Syriac  is  very  extensively  used  in  respect  to  Syria,  Mesopotamia,  and 
Babylonia,  and  specially  of  the  languages  of  these  countries.  Comp.  Xen. 
Cyrop.  7,  5.  31.  Jerome  on  Dan.  2  :  4.  Strabo  II.  p.  58. — On  the  name 
applied  to  the  Chaldee  by  the  Talmudists,  see  Lightfoot  Hor.  Heb.  on 
John  4  :  2,  and  below  No.  2. 

Chaldaic.  [c’1'nb3  *jV23b]  in  the  Old  Testament,  signifies  the  language 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Chaldea  proper,  which,  according  to  Dan.  1  :  4.  was 
the  court-language  under  Nebuchadnezzar.  On  the  other  hand.  Philo 
uses  XaXSatVrt  of  the  Babylonian  also,  and  even  of  the  ancient  Hebrew. 

To  what  extent  the  Babyloneo-Aramean  was  cultivated,  as  a  separate 
dialect,  and  whether  it  ever  became  the  language  of  books,  history  does 
not  inform  us.  That  it  continued  in  Babylonia,  in  connection  with  the 
proper  Chaldee,  as  the  language  of  ordinary  intercourse,  is  evident, 
partly  from  the  above-quoted  Scripture  passages  and  from  several  pas¬ 
sages  in  Xenophon’s  Cyropaedia,  but  especially  from  the  well  known 
circumstance,  that  the  exiled  Jews  found  the  Babylonish,  as  a  living 
language,  in  the  provinces  to  which  they  were  carried.  It  appears  also, 
from  the  remains  of  the  Pehlvi  dialect ,  that  the  Babylonish  produced  a 
very  great  influence  upon  the  ancient  language  of  the  Chaldeans,  (i.  e. 
the  Median.)  See  Gesenius  Com.  uber  Jes.  Vol.  I.  p.  947. 

2.  By  means  of  tlie  Jews  the  Clialdee  was  transplant¬ 
ed  into  Palestine,  where  it  became  the  vernacular  tongue, 
and  was  employed  by  them,  as  it  had  been  in  Babylonia, 
as  the  language  of  books.  Though  the  Aramean  as 
spoken  by  Jews  partook  somewhat  of  the  Hebrew  char- 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  .  LITERATURE. 


11 


acter,  no  entire  or  very  important  corruption  of  it  took 
place  ;  and  to  this  circumstance  alone  the  Babylonians 
are  indebted  for  the  survival,  or  at  least  the  partial  pre¬ 
servation,  of  their  language,  which,  even  in  the  mother 
country,  has,  since  the  spread  of  Islamism,  become  ex¬ 
tinct. 

The  Jews  however  did  not,  immediately  after  their  return,  adopt  the 
Chaldee  exclusively.  It  was  not  until  the  time  of  the  Maccabees,  that 
this  language  completely  displaced  the  Old  Hebrew,  as  Gesenius  has  de¬ 
monstrated.  Gescli.  d.  Heb.  Spr.  p.  44.  Concerning  the  Chaldee  as  the 
language  of  books  among  the  Jews,  see  No.  3.  It  is  clear  from  Ezra  4: 
7,  8,  that  it.  was  also  the  government-language  of  the  western  provinces 
of  the  Persian  empire.  The  Samaritans  also  spoke  a  dialect  very  nearly 
resembling  the  Chaldee. 

In  later  times,  the  name  Hebrew  (expats,  ij3pai<s  SiaAe/cros,  yXwcraa  riZi/ 
kfipabov,  k(3palo-Ti),  was  transferred  to  the  Babylonish  dialect;  comp.  Prol. 
to  Sirach,  John  5  :  2,  19:13.  Acts  21 :  40,  22:2,  26:14.  Rev.  9:11,  16: 
16.  Jerome  Prol.  to  1  Macc.  It  was  even  called  TrarpLos  yXwcrcra,  cfxDvr). 
2  Mac.  13:  37.  Joseph.  Jewish  War,  Pref.  §  1.  The  Talmudists,  on  the 
other  hand,  call  the  Chaldee,  in  distinction  from  the  Old  Hebrew,  "jittjb 
^nDn  i:i3H.  See  Lightfoot  on  John  5:2.  Also  ‘’DTiO  [Syriac]  Baba 
Kama  fol.  83,  1.  Sot.  49.  2.  Pesach.  61.  1.  Compare  C.  H.  Zeibich  de 
lingua  Jud.  Heb.  tempore  Christi.  Viteb.  1741.  The  name  Chaldaic  did 
not.  however,  become  totally  obsolete.  We  find  it  again  in  Jerome,  Prol. 
ad  Tob.,  Judith. 

It  is  plain,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  that  the  Babylonish  language 
would,  as  spoken  and  written  by  Jews,  i.  e.  by  those  who  inhabited  Pales¬ 
tine,  receive  something  of  the  Hebrew  character.  That  such  was  the 
fact  will  be  more  particularly  shown  below,  No.  3.  Still  the  assertion  is 
incorrect,  that  the  Chaldee  which  we  have,  (and  which  has  come  to  us 
only  through  the  Jews.)  has  been  extraordinarily  corrupted  by  them,  or  is 
a  mixture  of  Hebrew  with  pure  Babylonian.  See  Michaelis  Abh.  v.  d. 
Syr.  Spr.  36  seq.  Wahl  Geschichte  d.  morg.  Sprachen.  §  78  seq.  Meyer 
Hermeneut.  d.  A.  T.  vol.  I.  p.  266.  Comp.  Jahn,  Einleitung  in  das  A.  T.  I. 
248,  284.  For,  from  a  comparison  of  the  Chaldee  (as  it  is  found  in  the  old 
Targums,  for  example)  with  the  Syriac,  which  we  learn  from  native  Sy¬ 
rian  author^,  it  is  evident  that  the  Chaldee  has  all  the  most  important  pe¬ 
culiarities  of  grammatical  form  and  syntactical  construction,  as  well  as  the 
greatest  part  of  its  stock  of  words — copia  verborum ,  in  common  with  the 
Syriac.  Its  prominent  features  are  those  of  an  Aramean  dialect.  On  the 
other  hand,  those  traits  in  which  the  Chaldee  differs  from  the  Syriac  and 
agrees  with  the  Hebrew,  are  few;  and  those  few  relate  mostly  to  ortho¬ 
graphy  and  punctuation.  See  No.  4.  But  why  may  not  all  this  be  re¬ 
garded  as  dialectic  difference  ?  As  widely  as  the  Aramean  was  extended, 


12 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


it  was  natural  that,  like  other  languages  extensively  in  use,  it  should 
split  up  into  different  dialects.  The  Hebrew  and  Phenician,  notwithstand¬ 
ing  their  original  relation  and  vicinity,  exhibit  variations  of  this  kind.  Be¬ 
sides,  it  would  be  difficult,  on  the  other  supposition,  to  say  why  the  Jews 
varied  from  the  Aramean  character  in  so  few  points,  and  those  such  as  dif¬ 
fered  from  the  Hebrew  not  more  than  others  which  they  have  left  un¬ 
touched:  why  for  example,  they  said  instead  of  btppa,  xbajs  instead 

of  xbispTS,  which  certainly  did  not  savor  more  of  foreign  idiom  than  psbE 
for  for  ni^lT  or  hipp’d  for  biap . 

The  periods  of  Persian  and  Grecian  supremacy  introduced  some  Per¬ 
sian  and  Greek  words  into  the  Babylonish  (though  less  than  into  the  Sy¬ 
riac) ;  whence  even  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  is  not  free  from  Greek  words. 
But  the  Saracen  dominion,  which  commenced  with  the  invasion  of  Baby¬ 
lonia  by  the  hosts  of  the  Kaliphs,  A.  D.  640,  soon  swept  away  the  ancient 
language  of  the  country,  so  that  at  the  present  day  scarce  a  relic  of  it 
exists  in  the  East. 

Note  1.  There  is  a  modern  Syriac  dialect  spoken  by  the  Nestorians 
on  the  plain  of  Orooimah  and  in  the  mountains  of  Koordistan.  See  Smith 
and  Dwight’s  Researches  in  Armenia,  vol.  II.  p.  212.  and  Perkins’  Resi¬ 
dence  in  Persia,  p.  11.  The  language  of  the  Jews  in  the  same  region 
closely  resembles  this.  So  do  those  remains  of  Aramean  which  are  found 
farther  south  in  Mesopotamia.  The  fact  that  these  remains  have  some¬ 
times  been  called  Chaldee,  has  perhaps  arisen  from  the  circumstance  that 
a  portion  of  the  nominal  Christians  among  whom  they  are  found  (viz., 
those  who  acknowledge  the  authority  of  the  see  of  Rome)  have  been 
designated  as  the  Chaldean  church  ;  or,  perhaps,  from  the  fact  that  these 
Christians  reside  in  the  region  of  the  ancient  Chaldea.  Niebuhr,  speaking 
of  these  remains,  (Reisebeschreibung,  vol.  II.  p.  352,)  calls  them  indiffer¬ 
ently  Chaldee  or  Syriac.  The  subject  is  worthy  of  further  investigation. 

Note  2.  Other  Aramean  dialects  are,  the  Samaritan ,  preserved  in  a 
translation  of  the  Pentateuch  and  a  few  hymns  ;  the  Zabian ,  in  the  books 
of  the  Zabians  or  Christians  of  St.  John  ;  and  the  Palmyrene,  only  in  in¬ 
scriptions.  The  first  of  these  is  more  nearly  related  to  Chaldee,  and  the 
others  to  Syriac. 


3.  The  principal  remains  of  the  Chaldee  dialect  in 
our  possession  are  the  following.  (1)  In  the  canonical 
books,  Ezra  4  :  8 — 6  :  18,  7  :  12 — 26.  Daniel  2  :  4 — 7  : 
28,  Jerem.  10  :  11.  (2)  A  class  of  translations  and 
paraphrases  of  the  books  of  the  O.  Test.  [Targums] 
which  have  originated  in  different  ages,  and  which  ex¬ 
hibit  very  considerable  varieties  of  linguistic  and  exegeti- 
cal  character. 


& 


ivu  XXXI  -*■/ 7 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


13 


Note  1.  In  respect  to  linguistic  character,  with  which  alone  we  are  at 
present  concerned,  these  remains  of  the  Babylonish  dialect  may  be  divided 
into  three  classes.  The  purest  Chaldee  (*i.  e.  the  freest  from  Hebraism) 
appears  in  the  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch.  Similar  to  this  in 
respect  to  words,  orthography,  and  grammatical  construction,  but  somewhat 
inferior,  is  the  Biblical  Chaldee ,  which  is  interspersed  throughout  with 
Hebrew  peculiarities  ;  e.  g.  the  substitution  of  ti  for  X  whether  quiescent 
or  not,  the  Plural  termination  on— ,  the  Dual  form,  the  conj.  Hophal. 
Finally,  the  remaining  Targums  are  composed  in  a  language,  not  only 
abounding  in  foreign  words,  but  exhibiting  many  peculiar  forms,  (e.  g. 
Hiphil  Q"lpiX  from  D*ip,  E  preformative  of  the  Infin.  Pael,  lthpeel,  and 
Ithpaal.)  part  of  which  resemble  the  Syriac  or  Rabbinic,  (as  3  prefixed  to 
the  3d  p.  Fut.  and  the  syllable  Fi3  prefixed  in  Passives,)  and  part  arise 
from  contractions,  (as  in  the  numerals.)  These  peculiarities  have  been 
noticed,  though  inadequately,  by  Eichhorn  (Einl.  ins  A.  T.  II.  6  seq.  90 
eeq.)  They  deserve  indeed  to  be  collected  into  a  separate  treatise.  In 
the  sequel  the  later  Chaldee  will  constantly  be  distinguished  from  the 
earlier. 

Note  2.  The  language  of  the  Talmud  is  commonly  termed  Chaldee. 
The  Mishna  and  the  Gemara  are  however  very  different.  The  former  is 
written  in  a  dialect  nearly  resembling  the  Hebrew,  and  is  only  disfigured 
by  some  Chaldee  forms  ;  the  style  of  the  Gemara  exhibits  the  funda¬ 
mental  characteristics  of  Chaldee,  both  in  respect  to  the  roots  of  words 
and  their  grammatical  conformation — still  it  is  to  be  regarded,  especially 
the  Jerusalem  Gemara,  as  a  very  corrupt  Chaldee.  Its  grammar  needs 
therefore  to  be  treated  separately.  See  J.  E.  Faber  Anm.  z.  Erlernung 
des  Talmud,  und  Rabbin.  Gott.  1770. 

Note  3.  The  Syrochaldaic  originals  of  several  of  the  Apocryphal  books 
[those  which  were  written  in  Palestine]  are  lost.  See  Jerome  Prol.  ad 
Tob.,  Judith,  1  Macc.  and  the  Intrr.  of  Eichhorn,  Bertholdt,  and  De  Wette. 
Josephus  also  wrote  his  work  on  the  Jewish  War  in  the  Syrochaldaic  lan¬ 
guage,  (Jewish  War,  Preface  §  1.) 

4.  The  Chaldee  with  which  we  are  now  concerned 
sustains,  as  js  apparent  from  the  slightest  observation,  a 
near  relation  to  the  Syriac,  and  shares  with  that  dialect 
all  its  essential  peculiarities,  both  in  respect  to  the  forms 
of  words  and  their  themes,  but  differs  from  it  in  details 
sufficiently  to  claim  separate  individuality  as  a  dialect. 
These  variations  concern  rather  the  grammatical  forms 
than  the  themes  of  words,  and  especially  punctuation,  in 
which  the  Chaldee  nearly  accords  with  the  old  Phenician 
and  Hebrew. 


14 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


Note  1.  On  the  connection  of  Chaldee  with  Syriac,  see  Michaelis 
Abhandl.  von  der  syr.  Sprache,  pp.  12  seq. 

Note  2.  A  full  consideration  of  Chaldee  ground-forms  would  be  out 
of  place  here.  I  shall  only  notice  the  change  of  letters  for  others  of  some¬ 
what  different  sounds,  in  such  words  as  the  Chaldee  has  in  common  with 
the  Hebrew.  In  consequence  of  that  flat  pronunciation  which  character¬ 
ises  the  Aramean  dialects,  we  frequently  find  I  and  n  substituted  for  the 
Hebrew  1  and  tli ;  e.  g.  np'n  to  offer  (sacrifices),  gold ,  seed ,  npn  to 

break  in  pieces ,  “nn  an  ox;  and  15  for  it,  as  a  rock ,  HV’J  counsel.  Be¬ 
sides  these,  is  used  almost  constantly  instead  of  n  final,  2i  is  sometimes 
changed  into  5,  as  snx  (On  the  cause  of  this  change,  compare 

Gesenius  Heb.  Lex.  letter  3?);  2  into  b,  as  xbpbx  a  widow.  Finally,  it  is 
scarcely  necessary  to  remark,  that  letters  of  the  same  organ  may  be  in¬ 
terchanged  ;  e.  g.  mpp3  [Heb.  rvn&a]  brimstone ,  3*pip  [Heb.  snis]  a 
helmet.  Nsp  [Heb.  nsn]  to  wander. 

Note  3.  In  respect  to  grammatical  forms,  the  Chaldee  shares  the  fol¬ 
lowing  peculiarities  in  common  with  the  Syriac. 

(1)  The  same  forms  of  words  are  pronounced  with  fewer  vowels  than 
in  Hebrew,  so  that  the  consonants  predominate  in  grammatical  forma¬ 
tions  ;  as,  bpp,  pbp,  b^pp. 

(2)  The  emphatic  slate  (of  nouns)  equivalent  to  the  article  in  Hebrew 
and  Arabic. 

(3)  The  use  of  ^  as  a  sign  of  the  Genitive  case  ;  also  as  a  Relative 
Pronoun  ;  and  the  formation  of  Possessive  Pronouns  from  b*1^  and  suffixes 
as  ■'b“!^  mine ,  Tjb^  thine. 

(4)  b  as  a  mark  of  the  Accusative. 

(5)  The  termination  “p—  for  the  plural  of  masculines. 

(6)  Distinction  of  genders  in  the  3d  p.  plur.  Pret.  of  verbs. 

(7)  The  formation  of  Passives  by  prefixing  the  syllable  na$. 

(8)  The  formation  of  the  third  conjugation  like  baps.1 

(9)  Imperatives  Passive. 

(10)  Two  participles  in  the  Actives  of  the  second  and  third  Conj. 

(11)  The  use  of  the  participles  with  pronouns  for  a  separate  tense. 

(12)  The  preference  of  X  to  n  as  a  termination  of  words;  e.  g.  fctsbE 
a  queen ,  and  the  consequent  confusion  of  verbs  fb  and  fib . 

(13)  The  use  of  pleonastic  suffixes  before  the  Genitive. 

(14)  The  use  of  the  3d  p.  pi.  of  Actives  in  a  Passive  sense. 

Note  4.  Peculiarities  of  the  Chaldee,  in  which  it  differs  from  the 
Syriac,  and  in  some  of  them  more  nearly  resembles  the  Hebrew.  (1)  Pre¬ 
ference  of  the  clearer-sounding  vowels.  Thus  a  is  often  substituted  for 
the  Heb.  and  Syr.  o;  e.  g.  nnp,  Syr.  ;  Sfibtf,  Syr.  ;  cb$, 

Heb.  cbisJ;  1B3K,  Heb.  ;  bp,  Heb.  bip;  Npp,  Syr.  ]£o  •  the  plural 
termination  of  feminines  instead  of  Syr.  So  the  Chaldee  often 
has  1  where  *1  occurs  in  Syriac,  e.  g.  b3,  'Vs  ;  and  —  for  the  Syr.  — . 
e-  g-  bapPi,  Syr.Va^oZ. — (2)  Avoiding  diphthongs;  compare  wav'  with 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE.  15 

,  *obE  const,  st.  with  ,  T’b'ix  with  g.!^o)  ,  ibg  with  also 

otiant  letters  ;  compare  “oba  my  king  with  v».*:alJLo ,  ^bwp  with 
5<b^p  with  v.^ls.^0. — (3)  The  possibility  of  doubling  letters  not  guttural ; 
as  bpp  ,  — (4)  The  tone  regularly  on  the  ultimate;  xlbbft  ,  — 

(5)  The  formation  of  the  Inf.  except  in  Peal  without  the  prefix  a,  &c. — In 
‘respect  to  orthography,  it  may  be  remarked  here  that  the  scriptio  plena , 
or  full  mode  of  writing  quiescents,  is  decidedly  prevalent  in  Chaldee. 


THE  FOLLOWING  ARE  THE  PRINCIPAL  HELPS  TO  THE 

STUDY  OF  CHALDEE. 

I.  Lexicons. 

J.  Buxtorfii  (f  1629)  Lexicon  Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum.  Basil. 
1640.  fob 

Edm.  Castelli  Lexicon  Heptaglotton.  London,  1669.  fob  (This  work 
contains  a  complete  Chaldee  Vocabulary.) 

M.  J.  Landau,  Rabb.  Aram.  Deutsch.  Worterbuch  zur  Kenntniss  des 
Talmud.,  der  Targum.  u.  s.  w.  Prag.  1819. 

II.  Grammars. 

(a)  Of  the  Shemitish  dialects  generally,  or  at  least  of  the  Aramean 
dialects. 

J.  Buxtorf.  Gram.  Chald.  et  Syr.  Basil.  (1615)  1650.  8vo. 

Lud.  de  Dieu  (f  1642.)  Grammatica  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Chald.  et  Syr. 
inter  se  collatarum.  Lugd.  Bat.  1628.  4to.  Frcf.  a.  M.  1683.  4to. 

J.  H.  Hottinger  (t  1667)  Gramm,  quatuor  linguar.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr.  et 
Arab.  Tigur.  1649.  4to.  Heidelb.  1658. 

Andr.  Sennert  (f  1689)  Hypotyposis  harmonica  ling.  Or.  Chald.  Syr. 
et  Arab,  cum  matre  Heb.  Viteb.  1653.  4to. 

Car.  Schaaf  (f  1729)  Opus  Aram,  complec.  Gram.  Chald.  Syr.  &c.  L. 
Bat.  1686.  8vo. 

Ign.  Fessler  Instt.  Ling.  Orient.  Heb.  Ch.  Syr.  et  Arab.  Vratisl.  1787, 
1789.  2  vols.  8vo. 

J.  Gottfr.  Hasse  (f  1806)  Prakt.  Handb.  der  aram.  Sprache.  Iena 
1791.  8vo. 

J.  Jahn  (f„1817)  Aram,  oder  chald.  u.  syr.  Sprachlehre.  Wien  1793. 
8vo. — Elementa  Aram.  s.  Ch.  et  Syr.  ling.  lat.  reddita  et  accessionibus 
aucta  ab  Andr.  Oberleitner.  Vindob.  1820.  8vo. 

j 

J.  S.  Vater,  Handbuch  der  hebr.  syr.  ch.  und  arab.  Gramm.,  Leipzig, 
(1802)  1817.  8vo. 


\  The  obelisk  designates,  throughout  this  list,  the  year  of  an  author’s  decease. 


16 


CHALDEE  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE. 


( b )  Of  the  Chaldee  language  only. 

Chph.  Cellarii  (fl707)  Chaldaismus  sive  Grammatica  nova  Linguae 
Chaldaicae.  Cizae.  1685.  4to. 

Henr.  Opitii  (f  1712)  Chaldaismus  targ.  talm.  rabb.  Hebraismo  harmoni¬ 
ous.  Kil.  1696.  4to. 

J.  Dav.  Michaelis  (f  1791)  Grammatica  Chald.  Goett.  1771.  8vo. 

Wilh.  Fr.  Hezel  Anweis.  zum  Chald.  bei  Ermangelung  alles  miindl. 
Unterrichts,  Lemgo.  1787.  8vo. 

N.  W.  Schroder  (f  1798)  Instt.  ad  fundam. — Chaldaismi  bibl.  brevissime 
concinnata  (1787)  ed.  2.  aucta  et  emend.  Ulm.  1810.  8vo.  (a  proper  appen¬ 
dix  to  the  Hebrew  grammar  of  this  author.  See  Eichhorn’s  Bibl.  VIII. 
694.) 

F.  Nolan,  An  Introduction  to  Ch.  Grammar.  Lond.  1821.  12mo. 

W.  Harris,  Elements  of  the  Chaldee  language,  Lond.  1822,  24  pp.  8vo. 
(republished  at  N.  York.) 

Jul.  Fiirst,  Lehrgebaude  der  Aramaischen  Idiome  in  Bezug  auf  die  indo- 
german.  sprachen.  (1  Thl.  Formenlehre  der  Chald.  Grammatik.)  Leip¬ 
zig,  1835.  8vo. 

G.  B.  Winer,  Grammatik  des  biblischen  und  targumischen  Chaldais¬ 
mus,  Leipz.  1824,  and  2d  ed.  1842.  8vo.  (the  basis  of  this  work.) 

III.  Chrestomathies  and  Readers. 

Geneseos  ex  Onkelosi  paraphr.  Chald.  quatuor  priora  capita  una  cum 
Dan.  c.  2.  Chald.  Ed.  W.  Fr.  Hezel.  Lemgo,  1788.  8vo. 

Geo.  Lor.  Bauer  (f  1806.)  Chrest.  e  paraphras.  Chald.  et  Talmude 
delecta  c.  nott.  et  ind.  Nurnb.  1792.  8vo.  (See  Eichhorn’s  Bibl.  IV 
895  seq.) 

J.  Jahn,  Ch.  Chrestomathie  grosstentheils  aus  Handschriften.  Wien, 
1800.  Svo.  (without  a  vocabulary.) 

H.  Adolf  Grimm  (f  1813.)  Chald.  Chrestomathie  mit  einem  vollstandi- 
gen  Glossar.  Lemgo.  1801.  8vo. 

G.  B.  Winer,  Chal.  Lesebuch,  aus  den  Targ.  d.  a.  T.  ausgewahlt, 
Leipz.  1825.  8vo. 

The  Hebrew  Lexicons  generally  contain  also  the  Chaldee  words  which 
occur  in  Daniel  and  Ezra.  The  older  Hebrew  Grammars,  (compare 
those  of  Alting  and  Danz,)  contained  also  brief  instructions  for  Chaldee. 


CHALDEE  GRAMMAR. 


PART  I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ORTHOEPY. 


§  1 .  Consonants. 

The  Chaldee  is  written  with,  the  same  characters  as  are 
employed  in  Hebrew ;  and,  so  far  as  we  can  trace  its 
ancient  history,  was  never  expressed  by  any  others.  In¬ 
deed  the  square  character,  now  termed  Hebrew  by  way 
of  distinction,  appears  to  have  belonged  originally  to  the 
Chaldeans,  (Babylonians,)  and  to  have  taken  the  place  of 
the  old  Hebrew  character  among  the  Jews  in  the  age  suc¬ 
ceeding  the  Babylonish  exile. 

The  most  ancient  Phoenician,  the  Samaritan  and  the  Hebrew  coin¬ 
letter  alphabets  are  essentially  the  same.  The  letters  of  the  Palmyrene 
inscriptions,  (the  oldest  of  which  date  back  to  the  first  century  after 
Christ.)  much  more  resemble  the  square  character.  So  do  the  letters  of 
the  Egyptian  Aramean  inscriptions,  which  are  still  more  ancient.  See 
Gesenius’  Geschichte  der  Hebr.  Sprache  und  Schrift,  pp.  140  seq.  Wood’s 
Ruins  of  Palmyra,  (the  plates,)  and  Kopp’s  Bilder  und  Schriften,  II. 
245  seq. 


§  2.  Punctuation. 

1.  The  vowel-points,  which  are  employed  in  Hebrew, 
have  been  transferred  to  the  Chaldee,  and  appear  in  many 
manuscripts,  and  most  editions  of  the  Chaldee  text.  Since 

2 


18 


2.  PUNCTUATION. 


it  is  evident  that  these  points  are  the  work  of  the  Jews, 
and  were  invented  several  centuries  after  Christ,  it  is  plain 
that  the  Chaldee  must  originally  have  been  written  with¬ 
out  vowel-points.  Thus  the  Palmyrene  inscriptions  ex¬ 
hibit  no  vowel-marks.  But  the  letters  1  ^  [matres  lec- 
tionis ]  were  earlier  employed,  in  doubtful  cases,  as  a  guide 
in  reading. 

The  last-mentioned  fact  is  clear  from  such  orthographical  phenomena 
as  Strain  ,  Dan.  2  :  35,  etc.  and  from  the  abundant  use  of 

the  scriptio  plena  throughout. 


2.  The  transfer  of  the  Hebrew  vowel-points  to  the 
Chaldee  took  place  in  an  age  when  the  vowel  system  of 
the  Jews  was  yet  in  an  imperfect  state ;  and  in  later  times, 
the  pointing  of  the  Chaldee  text,  especially  that  of  the 
Targums,  did  not  receive  the  same  attention  which  was 
devoted  to  the  Hebrew.  These  circumstances  exhibit 
clearly  the  reason  why  the  punctuation  of  the  Chaldee 
writings  appears,  at  present,  far  less  regular  than  that  of 
the  Hebrew.  This  irregularity  is  indeed  so  great  that 
not  only  do  different  copies  and  editions,  (especially  those 
of  London  and  Venice,)  differ  widely  from  each  other, 
but  there  prevails  throughout  an  extreme  variableness  in 
the  use  of  the  long  and  short  vowels. 

On  the  variable  punctuation  of  the  Targums,  see  Eichhorn  Einl.  ins 
A.  T.  Part  2.  p.  24  seq. 

3.  Long  vowels  sometimes  occur  in  a  mixed  syllable  without  the  tone, 
and  vice  versa,  short  vowels  in  a  simple  syllable.  (Especially  are  and  — 
employed  altogether  promiscuously,  to  which  usage  only  a  slight  tendency 
is  noticeable  in  Hebrew.  See  Gesenius  Lehrgebaude  p.  60.)  For  exam¬ 
ples  of  the  former  comp,  ttpsin  Deut.  23:  16,  pSTVX  Jer.  49:  19, 
[allin]  Dan.  4:4;  of  the  latter  >ibap  . 

4.  The  violation  of  the  rule  of  Qamets  Hhatuph,  in  such  cases  as 

is  only  apparent.  The  i  is  only  a  superfluous  mater  lectionis  and  is 
by  no  means  to  be  regarded  as  quiescing  in  Q,amets  Hhatuph,  or  as  a  con¬ 
sonant  [Ilhavchma]  since  it  is  written  without  Sheva.  In  general,  how¬ 
ever,  Qamets  Hhatuph  seldom  occurs  in  Chaldee  words. 


2.  punctuation;  daghesh. 


19 


DAGHESH.  » 

5.  Daghesh  lene  is  subject  to  tlie  same  general  rules  as 
in  Hebrew. 

a.  The  pron.  suff.  p's  and  *J3  never  receive  it. 

b.  In  some  editions,  in  the  middle  of  a  word  is  treated  as  a  diph¬ 
thong,  and  the  next  letter  does  not  receive  Daghesh  lene ;  as  TV2  baithi. 
Generally  however  n  is  regarded  as  a  proper  consonant,  and  we  find  "'FVs 
FPba  bay-tl,  geldy-ta. 

c.  Nouns  of  the  form  (Heb.  Tjbtt)  are  treated  as  though  the  ground- 

form  was  ,  and  Daghesh  is  inserted  in  the  3  where  a  mixed  syllable 
precedes;  as  . 

6.  Daghesh  forte  compensative 

a.  Is  inserted  in  the  first  radical  of  verbs  S&j  e.  g.  for  pp^iSS, 
Aphel  from  pp^  . 

b.  In  n  of  the  passive  prefix  it  compensates  for  the  omission  of  X 

the  characteristic  prefix  of  Aphel,  e.  g.  for  bppxpx . 

Note.  The  peculiarity  of  the  Chaldee  in  both  these  cases  is,  that  the 
letter  for  which  compensation  is  made  would,  if  the  word  were  fully  writ¬ 
ten,  have  succeeded  the  letter  in  which  Daghesh  forte  is  inserted.  In  He¬ 
brew  this  is  unusual,  and  where  it  occurs  might  perhaps  be  denominated 
Chaldaism. 

c.  Sometimes,  especially  in  the  later  Chaldee,  it  compensates  for  the 

omission  of  quiescents  and  consequent  shortening  of  the  vowel  preceding 
the  letter  in  which  Daghesh  forte  is  inserted;  as  instead  of 

Gen.  3  :  2,  Pseud.  Jon.  The  converse  of  this  also  takes  place ;  §  7.  a.  (2.) 

7.  Forms  which  regularly  exhibit  Daghesh  forte,  but 
sometimes  appear  with  a  different  orthography. 

a.  The  letter  3  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Daghesh  forte,  even 

where  the  radical  form  does  not  exhibit  a  5;  e.  g.  Dan.  2  :  25,  instead 
of  or  from  This  may  have  arisen  from  an  imperfect  ac¬ 

quaintance  with  Chaldee.  A  Jew,  on  perceiving  that  3  was  expressed  in 
Chaldee  in  many  cases  where  his  own  language  required  Daghesh  forte 
or  a  long  vowel  compensating  for  it,  would  perhaps  be  liable  to  employ  it 
even  where  it  was  not  required  by  good  Chaldee  usage.  See  below  §  6.  a. 
note.  Gesenius,  Lehrg.  §  33.  3. 

b.  Very  frequently  no  compensation  is  made  for  the  exclusion  of  Da¬ 
ghesh  forte  from  gutturals;  e.  g.  pSTipn  Gen.  3 :  3,  TTI13  2  K.  21  :  6. 

c.  As  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  is  sometimes  dropped  when  the  letter 
in  which  it  would  regularly  be  inserted  has  Sheva. 


20 


3.  TONE-SYLLABLE 


MAPPIQ. 

8.  Mappiq  is  inserted,  as  in  Hebrew,  in  n  where  it  is 
not  quiescent. 

a.  In  the  Pronominal  suffixes  ft—  and  ft—,  comp.  §  8. 

b.  In  ft  when  it  occurs  as  the  last  radical  of  a  verb  or  noun  and  is  not 
quiescent;  e.  g.  ftna  Ps.  131 :  1,  ftbx  Dan.  2  :  28. 

ACCENTS. 

9.  a.  In  tlie  Chaldee  portions  of  the  original  Scrip¬ 
tures,  the  same  accents  are  employed,  and  subject  to  the 
same  rules,  as  in  Hebrew,  only  that  the  half-accent  Metheg 
is  much  less  regularly  and  less  frequently  inserted  than 
in  Hebrew. 

b.  In  the  Targum  of  Onkelos,  the  train  of  accents  is 
substantially  the  same  as  in  the  original  text.  See  Chres- 
tomathy  Part  I.  Note  on  No.  1. 

c.  To  the  text  of  the  other  Targums  no  accents  have 
been  appended. 


Tone- Syllable, 


The  tone  falls  in  Chaldee,  (as  in  Hebrew,)  usually  on 
the  last  syllable.  The  following  forms  are  exceptions, 
and  are  accented  on  the  penultimate. 

1.  Segholate  nouns  which  follow  the  Plebrew  form; 
as  SfVa,  D?t3 ,  p:n,  which  however  occur  almost  exclu¬ 
sively  in  the  biblical  Chaldee. 

2.  Verbal  forms  terminating  in  m  and  *1; 

O  T  T  T  •  7 


as  nbbp ,  abtofp,  awbbjj,  sibtjjy. 

3.  The  suffixes  “0—  as—  —  vvr  e.  g.  ansbtt 

TT  TT  *  T  *7  O  T  T  J  - 

,  wrvin ,  &c. 

T  T  ,  /  •  •  / 


The  German  and  Polish  Jews  place  the  tone  in  Chaldee  (as  they  also 
do  in  Hebrew)  on  the  penult.  Whether  this  was  the  ancient.  Babylonish 
accentuation,  cannot  be  decided  from  the  accentuation  prevalent  in  Syriac; 
since  two  closely  related  dialects  may  differ  widely  in  this  respect.  Were 


4.  OF  READING  UNPOINTED  TEXT. 


21 


the  vowels  of  the  Chaldee,  as  we  have  them,  entirely  conformed  to  the 
old  Babylonish  pronunciation,  we  should  have,  in  them,  a  clew  to  the 
ancient  accentuation. 

§  4.  Of  reading  unpointed  text. 

As  points  have  not  been  attached  to  all  the  Chaldee 
text,  and  since  the  unpointed,  (besides  the  use  of  the  mot¬ 
ives  lectionis  ,  1 ,  41 ,  which  obtains  likewise  in  Heb.)  pre¬ 
sents  some  peculiarities,  it  may  be  well  here  to  notice,  as 
an  assistance  in  reading  without  vowels,  one  usage  at  least, 
which  obtains  in  the  Targums,  viz.  that  a  double  *1  or  *  is 
sometimes  employed, 

(a)  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  either  to  indicate  that 
these  letters  are  moveable ;  as  tfMYisna  i.  e.  anjstta , 
i.  e.  ;  or  that  they  are  to  be  pronounced  double ;  as 
nrrmna  i.  e.  nrmpa ,  pn^n  i.  e.  pn?n . 

(V)  In  the  end  of  a  word,  especially  when  it  is  neces¬ 
sary  to  distinguish  between  the  pronouns  and  ‘’—j  as 
^bm  i.  e.  ■ton . 

Note.  Only  one  abbreviation  occurs  in  the  Targums,  viz.  ^  for 
The  Talmud  abounds  with  them.  See  J.  Buxtorf  De  Abbreviat.  Hebr. 
Basil.  1640.  Svd. 


PART  II. 


ETYMOLOGY. 


CHAPTER  I. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  WHICH  REGULATE  THE  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION 

OF  WORDS. 


§  5.  The  subject  generally . 

1.  Before  entering  upon  the  derivation  and  modifica¬ 
tions  of  the  various  parts  of  speech,  it  will  he  necessary 
to  notice  briefly  the  general  principles  according  to  which 
these  changes  take  place.  In  Chaldee,  as  in  every  other 
language,  these  changes  respect  partly  consonants,  and 
partly  vowels,  which  will  naturally  divide  this  subject 
into  two  parts. 

2.  It  is  proper  to  distinguish,  among  the  changes  of 
consonants  and  vowels  with  which  we  meet  in  the  inflec¬ 
tions  of  the  parts  of  speech,  between  those  which  are 
necessary ,  and  those  which  are  the  result  of  euphony. 
The  former  class  includes  those  changes  which  are  essen¬ 
tial  to  permanent  forms, — those  which  run  through  the 
language,  and  which  form,  so  to  speak,  its  substratum. 
Such  are  the  terminations  of  the  persons  in  verbs,  and  of 
the  numbers  in  nouns.  Those  changes,  on  the  other  hand, 
may  be  reckoned  euphonical ,  which  are  not  essential  to 
the  form,  but  result  simply  from  facility  of  utterance ; 


6.  MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 


23 


as  ■phtpjj  instead  of  pbpp  ,  ‘H«:n  instead  of  “p^n ,  nnnctf 
instead  of  *inDntf .  So  in  Latin  we  have  imminutus  for 
inminutus ,  mi  for  mihi,  hodie  for  hoc  die ,  &c.  It  is 
plainly  with  this  latter  class  of  changes  that  we  are  at 
present  chiefly  concerned. 

4 

§  6.  Mutations  of  Consonants. 

The  derivation  and  inflection  of  words,  so  far  as  they 
depend  on  the  consonants,  are  effected  by  other  letters 
(beside  those  which  compose  the  root)  being  prefixed, 
inserted,  or  suffixed  ;  or  by  the  radicals  themselves  being 
omitted,  doubled,  or  commuted  with  other  letters ;  e.  g. 
bi:p*a  ,  brjp ,  tfpbttp ,  bDp  from  bttp ;  Dtj  from  a*)T3 ;  “'ba  from 
aba  .  For  these  purposes  the  Chaldee  employs  the  let¬ 
ters  tt,  5,m.  It  belongs  to  the  details  of  ety¬ 

mology  to  exhibit  the  manner  in  which  these  servile 
letters  are  employed  in  each  particular  case.  Those 
changes  only  will  be  noticed  in  this  place,  which,  in  the 
formation  and  inflection  of  words,  are  the  results  of  eu¬ 
phony.  Such  are  the  assimilation ,  transposition ,  omis¬ 
sion,  commutation ,  and  insertion  of  consonants. 

a.  Assimilation  takes  place  regularly,  (1)  Of  the 
letter  2,  when  it  occurs  as  the  final  consonant  of  a  mixed 
syllable  and  immediately  precedes  another  consonant. 
Thus  instead  of  p22?  is  commonly  written  p5p ,  nnpp  in¬ 
stead  of  sropa .  Comp.  §  18. — (2)  Of  ri  in  the  passive 
prefix  with  a  succeeding  tt  or  *1,  more  rarely  with  any 
other  letter.  See  §  10.  5. 

Note.  The  converse  of  this  takes  place,  when,  instead  of  doubling  a 
consonant,  the  letter  3  is  inserted;  e.  g.  ‘12£3j3  for  “’Sip ;  tn33Ji  for  ttsx 
Job  31  :  12,  Dan.  4 .9.  (This  takes  place  however  in  only  a  few  words 
which  must  be  learned  by  practice.) — n  also  is  so  used  in  the  later  Tar- 
gums  ;  e.  g.  TV"|pnK  instead  of  ynpx  Gen.  38 :  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  in¬ 

stead  of  "’feE  Eccl.  10  :  12. 

1).  Transposition .  The  n  of  the  passive  preformative 


24 


6.  MUTATIONS  OF  CONSONANTS. 


rtf  regularly  changes  places  with  the  first  radical,  when 
that  happens  to  be  a  sibilant  (T,  or  E) ;  e.  g. 

rornjtf ,  "tnnotf ,  . 

c.  The  following  letters  are  dropped.  (1)  h  and  3  in 

some  forms  in  which  they  would  stand  in  the  beginning 
of  a  word  without  a  vowel ;  e.  g.  Pp  instead  of  ppi , 
[Imp.]  for  3H?  . — (2)  Consonants  destitute  of  vowels,  by 
contraction  ;  e.  g.  instead  of  nipantf ,  wnn  instead 

of  *102  .  Here  belong  also  instead  of  , 

anno  instead  of  anppo  Ex.  9:31,  Jon. — (3)  5  without 
a  vowel  and  in  the  end  of  a  syllable,  of  participles 
changed  into  tenses  ;  e.  g.  *pmbi2  2  for  pnpbpp. — (4)  Very 
frequently  the  quiescents ;  e.  g.  IppP  instead  of  praa? , 
wn  instead  of  — (5)  n  in  the  end  of  words,  con¬ 

stantly  in  the  absolute  state  of  feminine  forms  like  msbtt ; 
— also  in  the  later  Targums  ^  for  ms  Gen.  22  :  19,  Jon. 

d.  Commutation  takes  place,  especially  of  quiescents ; 

( 1 )  When  one  quiescent  letter  is  exchanged  for  another 
capable  of  quiescing  in  the  same  vowel ;  as  instead 
of  nna’p ,  (which  is  merely  an  orthographical  change ;) — 

(2)  When  a  quiescent,  homogeneous  with  the  character¬ 
istic  vowel  of  a  particular  form,  is  substituted  for  one 
which  would  be  heterogeneous  ;  as  D^pa  for  Dlpa  (nipa). 

But  those  numerous  eases  of  verbs  do  not  belong  here,  in  which  11 
appears  instead  of  it ;  nor  such  instances  as  instead  of  ; 

for  in  these  cases  the  ^  is  only  the  original  consonant  (which  had  been  dis¬ 
placed  by  another)  restored.  See  above. 

e.  Insertion,  a  prosthetic  is  sometimes  inserted  in 
cases  where  other- wise  a  syllable  would  commence  with 
two  consonants ;  e.  g.  T^a ,  ‘yna .  Here  belong  also 
such  cases  as  osna  instead  of  naana ,  bopna  instead  of 
bppana .  For  DagJiesJi  forte  is  here  euphonic ,  being  pri¬ 
marily  designed  to  shorten  the  pronunciation,  (see  Gese- 
nius.  Lehrgeb.  p.  860,)  though  it  constantly  indicates  the 


7.  VOWEL-CHANGES. 


25 


doubling  of  the  consonant;  and  for  this  purpose  the 
vowel  of  the  falls  back  to  the  n  of  the  prefix. 

§  7.  Vowel-changes. 

The  derivation  and  inflections  of  words  are  effected, 
in  the  second  place,  by  vowels ,  when  forms  of  words  de¬ 
rived  from  the  same  ground-form  are  characterized  by 
different  vowels ;  ex.  Sfbft  from  rjbtt  ?  bp£  from  bppp ,  brio 
from  bnp .  It  is  impossible  to  decide,  in  each  particular 
case,  why  such  and  such  vowels  have  been  selected  as 
characteristic  of  the  form.  We  can  distinctly  ascertain, 
however,  what  are  the  characteristics  of  particular  forms  ; 
and  this  again  must  be  referred  to  the  details  of  ety¬ 
mology.  Only  some  variations  from  the  general  prin¬ 
ciples  which  regulate  these  forms,  and  some  other  modifi¬ 
cations  of  vowels  which  result  from  facility  of  pronuncia¬ 
tion,  will  be  noticed  here.  Vowels,  in  the  course  of  for¬ 
mation  and  inflection,  are  commuted ,  transposed ,  dropped , 
or  inserted. 

a.  Commutation  of  vowels;  (1)  Short  for  long,  when 
a  mixed  syllable  loses  the  tone ;  as  pnb?  from  bb  ?  run 
from  ,  ipp  const,  state  of  .  In  these  cases  i  pure 
generally  becomes  — ;  and  — ,  — .  When  the  long  vowel 
remains  unchanged,  either  that  is  impure,  or  the  last  con¬ 
sonant  of  the  ground-form  is  thrown  forward  and  pro¬ 
nounced  with  the  suffix;  e.  g.  pD'abrc  Dan.  3  :  31.  So  con¬ 
stantly  in  Hebrew ;  as  Tpin .  See  above  §  2.  2. — • 
(2)  Long  vowels  take  the  place  of  short ; — in  pause  ;  as> 
Sps  Dan.  2:32,  Dan.  4:6,  na  Gen.  4:11,  nbra 
Ex.  4  :  13,  (though  this  is  not  universally  the  case  ;  comp. 
Dan.  2:9,  17)  ; — before  a  guttural  which  would  regularly 
be  doubled ;  as  instead  of  tpntt ,  instead  of 

awns1}?,  (although  this  likewise  is  not  without  exceptions, 
especially  if  the  guttural  be  n  or  n,  Dan.  4  :  16,  24)  ; — - 


26 


7.  TOWEL-CHANGES. 


before  other  consonants,  less  frequently ;  as  ‘ptp^  instead 
of  phptf  Gen.  38:9.  Ps.  Jon.  see  §  6.  a. ; — when  a  quies¬ 
cent  which  would  regularly  have  a  composite  Sheva,  drops 
it  and  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel ;  as  p^b  instead 
of  p*i2*b . — (3)  It  is  for  the  sake  of  euphony  that,  in  final 
syllables  which  terminate  in  a  guttural,  Pattahh  is  usually 
found  before  it,  instead  of  the  usual  characteristic  vowel ; 
as  nbirn  instead  of  fib©1?,  nn©  instead  of  ns©  ;  also  that 
when  a  syllable  terminates  in  a  quiescent  preceded  by  a 
heterogeneous  vowel,  that  vowel  becomes  homogeneous  5 
e.  g.  Spoia  instead  of  CpoiK . 

The  case  of  simple  syllables,  in  which  long  vowels  have  displaced  the 
short  ones,  does  not  belong  here.  In  most  of  these  instances,  the  punc¬ 
tuators  probably  employed  the  short  vowels;  and  such  forms  as  *12230 , 
*ni?a  occur  only  in  particular  editions. 

b.  Transposition  of  vowels  takes  place  in  some  mono¬ 
syllabic  forms  of  verbs,  the  vowel  of  which  is  between 
the  last  two  radicals,  when  they  receive  a  pronominal 
suffix ;  as  nbpp  from  bpp ; — also  in  some  contracted  forms 
of  verbs  ;  as  pn?  for  ppp? ; — and  finally,  in  cases  like 
D^ip  for  D}p ,  ‘'ft©  for  ‘’Pitf  ©  ?  when  the  moveable  or  1 , 
etc.  throws  back  to  the  preceding  consonant  its  own 
vowel,  for  the  sake  of  quiescing  in  it. 

c.  Vowels  are  dropped ,  in  the  final  syllable  of  ground- 
forms,  only  when  formative  syllables  are  added,  and  then 
much  less  frequently  than  in  Heb. ;  e.  g.  s©b?  from  obp  ? 
pbtpp  from  bpp  ?  abns  from  bna  ,  pbipp?  from  btjp? .  The 
vowels  most  frequently  omitted  are  Pattahh,  Tseri  and 
Hhireq. 

d.  Finally,  vowels  are  inserted ;  (1)  When  two  con¬ 
sonants  would  otherwise  stand  together  without  a  vowel 
in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable ;  as  bpp?  from  btpp  ?  pbpb 
from  pb©  .  The  vowel  most  commonly  employed  in  such 
cases  to  facilitate  pronunciation  is  Hhireq.  But  when 


8.  PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


27 


the  following  consonant  is  a  guttural,  and  has  a  compo¬ 
site  Sheva,  the  preceding  consonant  takes  the  short  vowel 
corresponding  with  this  Sheva  ;  as  tfpsp  >  • — (2)  In 

cases  like  Ez.  7:18,  ttn^nn  Ez.  4 :  15,  instead  of 

;  where  three  consonants  would  come  to¬ 
gether,  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  without  a  vowel. 

Note.  In  case  (1)  the  inserted  vowel  regularly  belongs  to  the  first  of 
the  two  consonants  which  would  have  been  without  vowels.  In  the  later 
Targums,  a  practice  somewhat  different  prevails  to  considerable  extent 
Instead  of  a  short  vowel  under  the  first  consonant,  a  long  vowel  appears 
under  the  second  ;  e.  g.  instead  of  *vaxi  Gen.  3  :  1.  Ps.  Jon.  et  passim, 
fctbnna'n  instead  of  fctbTvai  Gen.  3  :  24.  Ps.  Jon. 

t  •  ••  5  ▼  •  :  • 


CHAPTER  II. 
PRONOUNS. 


§  8.  Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

1.  Personal  pronouns  are  divided,  as  in  Hebrew,  into 
two  classes,  separate  and  suffixed.  The  former  exjoress, 
with  some  exceptions,  the  nominative  case,  and  the  latter 
the  oblique  cases. 


TABLE  OF  THE  SEPARATE  PRONOUNS  OR  GROUND-FORM  . 


Singular. 

1 .  C.  !!05t,(nDN)  I 

2.  c.  tnx,  nsx  (rinss)  thou 

3.  m.  Mn  sinas,  sin 

Prov.  25  :  20,  like  the  Syr.)  he 
3.  f.  fiOft  (kivk,  ‘'rvx,)  she 


1.  c. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

3.  m. 
3.  f. 


Plural. 


03«) 

we 

Hn:«,  ■jsnx  j 

I'nix ,  Tnx  f 

ye 

W>  (ran)  1 

linn ,  ian  v 

they 

(rsr* ,  ) 

2.  The  suffix  (or  inseparable)  pronouns  are  appended 
to  verbs,  to  the  signs  of  cases  (§60)  and  prepositions,  or 
to  nouns.  In  the  last  case  they  are  usually  translated  by 
possessive  pronouns,  though  the  genitive  of  personal  pro¬ 
nouns  would  more  exactly  express  them ;  precisely  as  in 


28 


8.  PERSONAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Greek,  n ccr/jg  [xou,  &c.  The  following  are  the  suffixes  at¬ 
tacked  to  verbs. 


1.  c. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

3.  m. 
3.  f. 


*'3— ’ .  (“13)  me 

T  ’  ^  i  thee 

v-  d-  T-  f 

rt-,  ft'—  ('ft,  *ini>)  him 
(«*,)  her 


(It.  s3“) 
P= 

1? 

Pb  P*- 

i5 ,  rs ,  is — 


us 

you 

them 


Which  of  the  forms  is  to  be  used  in  each  particular  case,  is  explained 
in  §  16,  where  also  will  be  found  an  explanation  of  the  so-called  Nun  epen¬ 
thetic ,  which  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verbal  form  and  its  suffix. 


3.  The  suffixes  of  nouns  are  divided,  again,  into  two 
classes,  viz.  those  attacked  to  nouns  singular,  and  tkose 
attacked  to  nouns  plural.  Tke  latter  are  expressed  by 
somewkat  lengthened  forms,  in  which  tke  ^  of  tke 
plural  termination  commonly  appears.  They  are  gene¬ 
rally  tke  following : 

I.  SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  SINGULAE. 


Singular  suffixes. 

1.  C. 

2.  m.  --  1 

2-f-  | 

3.  m.  n  — 

3.  f.  ft— .  (in  bibl.  Ch.  ft— -) 


my 

thy 

his 

her 


Plural  suffixes. 

3*3—2 

pD,  DID  ) 

1?  S 

pn,  (Din)  ) 

rrb  n  j 


our 

your 

their 


Note  1.  Twice,  instead  of  n—  appears  X—  Dan.  4  :  15,  5:8;  the  Tar- 
gumists  wrote  likewise  *,ni  Gen.  1  :  12,  21,  or  with  the  full  orthography 
ft'—.  Appended  to  the  words  DJ< ,  Hi*  and  DH  which  before  suff.  take 
the  forms  1DX ,  etc.,  the  suff.  of  the  2d  and  3d  per.  sing,  take  the  forms  ”  , 
'ft ,  3<n ;  the  last  of  which  forms  occurs  also  elsewhere  as  a  noun-suffix. 
Gen.  3  :  5.  Est.  1  :  12. 

The  same  forms  are  attached  to  prepositions ,  (excepting  such  as  are 
originally  plural  nouns,  §  44.  2.)  and  to  the  signs  of  cases  b,  ny  etc. ;  as 
'b ,  '2,  nn^,  etc.  See  below  §  44. 


II.  SUFFIXES  TO  NOUNS  PLUEAL. 


Singular  suffixes. 

1.  C.  *1— 

2.  m.  --  ) 

2.  f.  “  \ 

3.  m.  ■> ft' i ,  nl 


my 

thy 

his 


3.  f  3<n— r,  (ft.'—  Dan.  7 :  7, 19.)  her 


Plural  suffixes. 

T**’-  I 
\ 

\ 

vr-  i 


our 

your 

their 


9.  OTHER  PRONOUNS. 


29 


Note  1.  These  suffixes  are  regularly  appended,  however,  only  to  plu¬ 
rals  masculine.  Indeed,  it  is  from  the  termination  of  such  nouns,  that  the 
*’  comes,  which  appears  in  the  suffix  of  the  2d  per.  sing,  and  in  all  the  plu¬ 
ral  suffixes.  Feminines  frequently  take  the  sing.  suff.  "I— ,  «n— ,  etc. 
Gen.  20:17.  Dan.  2  :  32,  5:2.  Ez.  4  :  17,  6:18.  Is.  1 :  4.  Prov.  1  :  18. 
Gen.  47  :  9.  In  Syriac  this  is  constantly  the  case.  The  Chaldee  exhibits 
a  medium  between  the  usage  of  the  Hebrew  and  that  of  the  Syriac. 

Note  2.  The  suffix  7p—  is  in  some  editions  written  7|"n—  or  T*?—. 
Frequently  it  appears  abbreviated  Dan.  5:10.  2  Sam.  11:8,  24. 

Ps.  119  :  4. — So  also  the  feminine  7p— -  is  in  many  editions  written  7j— ,  so 
that  the  genders  are  not  distinguished.  Isa.  49  :  18.  Ven. 

Note  3.  The  possessive  pronoun  may  be  expressed  separately  from  its 
noun  by  appending  suffixes  to  b"H  (comp,  of  the  relative  ^  ,  and  b ,  sign 
of  the  dative  case)  ;  or,  more  rarely,  to  mn  (comp,  of  ^  relative  and  ‘n, 
sign  of  the  genitive  case) ;  e.  g.  Tib-1^  T|b^  ,  thy  king ,  lit.  the  king  who  [is] 
to  thee.  Usage  has  however  made  these  particles  mere  signs  of  the  geni¬ 
tive;  for  even  to  them  ^  (relative)  is  prefixed. 

Note  4.  Prepositions  which  are  originally  plural  nouns  take  the  suffixes 
of  pi.  nouns;  e.  g.  *nna ;  ,  ^nibs>,  ■jisTna  .  See  §  44.  2.  So  also 

do  mx  [=Heb.  izpj  mb  its  negative,  and  ,  as ;  e.  g.  “’mx,  ini  mb, 
•jimos ,  and  the  suffix  must  be  rendered  in  the  nominative  case. 


9.  Other  Pronouns. 


1.  Tlie  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are,  sing.  masc.  -ft 
(■OT  Gen.  37  :  19,  W  Job  9  :  24,)  pi,  H  (HP  Jer. 
26:9  ;)  fem.  1ft  ,  ;  com.  H ,  (nn  ,)  fyj  (Ps.  24  :  6, 

52  :  8,)  this ,  that  /  plur.  com.  pbtf,  n!b«,  ba  ?  ^jbis:  these, 
those. 


Note.  With  the  Hebrew  article,  X^nn,  pbxn  (Ex.  20:  1)  are  equiva¬ 
lent  to  our  expressions  this  very ,  precisely  this.  So  also  are  the  forms 


xmx,  x^mx,  xmx  (Ruth  1 :  16.  Lam.  1:4.) 

•  ’  •  •  t  • v  •  du,  Lb** 


2.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  p  (as  a  prefix),  or  ^  * 


(as  a  separate  word),  of  both  genders  and  both  numbers. 


It  designates  regularly  the  Nominative  or  Accusative. 
How  the  other  oblique  cases  are  indicated,  see  in  Syntax 
§  60. 

3.  The  Interrogative  Pronouns  are  expressed,  some¬ 
times,  according  to  the  Hebrew  analogy,  by  ‘jft  who  ?  of 


e, 


*  In  the  Egyptian  Aramean  inscriptions  ’’t  and  nt .  Comp.  the  Heb.  nt . 


4 


30 


1 0.  VERBS  ;  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 


persons,  (whence  ’latt  for  ps  Prov.  20:6,  27:4,)  and 
(he)  what  f  of  things :  sometimes,  by  prefixing  the 
interrogative  particle  to  the  demonstrative  pronoun : 
pT»  m.  f.  (“’To5,  The  latter  mode  is  rather 

more  expressive,  who  indeed  t  who  then  f 

On  the  mode  of  designating  the  reflexive  and  recipro¬ 
cal  sense  of  pronouns,  compare  Syntax,  §  49.  1. 


'  CHAPTER  III. 

I 

VERBS. 


§  10.  Derivation  and  inflection  of  verbs  generally. 

1.  Verbs,  as  in  Hebrew,  are  generally  primitive.  A 

few  are  formed  from  nouns,  and  are  called  denominatives  / 
e.  g.  tnij  to  eradicate ,  thnESi  to  take  root ,  from  tint)  a 
root  /  V’nan  to  pitch  a  tent ,  from  tfbfitf  a  tent  /  to 

be  acquainted ,  from  an  acquaintance. 

2.  The  roots  of  verbs  consist,  generally,  of  three  con¬ 
sonants  which  are  pronounced  in  one  syllable  with  the 
vowel  —  under  the  middle  radical.  A  few  consist  of  four 
consonants  [quadriliterals],  and  are  pronounced  with  —  —  ; 
as  bsno  to  cover.  The  root  is  the  third  person  singular 
masculine  Praeter,  and  from  this  are  derived,  not  only  the 
other  parts  of  the  active  voice,  but  a  passive  consisting 
of  the  same  moods  and  tenses. 

Derivative  Conjugations. 

3.  As  in  Hebrew,  other  forms,  derived  from  the  root 
and  analogous  to  it,  are  employed  to  express  various 
modifications  of  the  original  sense.  These  also  are  con¬ 
jugated  through  an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  They 
are  generally  two,  bap  and  baps  .  These,  as  well  as  the 


10.  VERBS  ;  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 


31 


ground-form,  are  called  conjugations  /  so  that  we  may 
reckon  in  Chaldee  three  usual  conjugations,  each  in¬ 
cluding  an  active  and  a  passive  voice.  For  the  unusual 
conjugations,  Shapliel,  Poel,  &c.,  see  §  14. 

4.  Characteristics  and  signification  of  the  conjuga¬ 

tions.  (1)  The  2d  conjugation  or  Pael  is  characterized, 
like  the  Hebrew  Piel,  by  Daghesh  forte  in  the  2d  radi¬ 
cal.  (a)  Its  signification  is  usually  causative ,  when  Peal 
is  intransitive  ;  as  con  to  be  wise ,  Dpn  to  malce  wise  /  T,n  to 
be  white ,  to  malm  white ,  to  wash,  (b)  Frequently 

Pael  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibiting ,  regarding ,  or  treat¬ 
ing  a  person  as  being  or  doing  what  is  expressed  in  Peal ; 
e.  g.  -T3  to  lie ,  to  regard  one  as  a  liar ,  to  convict  one 

of  falsehood,  (c)  Sometimes  it  is  privative  /  as  to 
remove  ashes  ;  bpc  to  clear  out  stones. 

(2)  The  characteristic  of  the  3d  conjugation  or  Apliel 
is  x  (sometimes  n)  prefixed  to  the  root,  and  the  vowel  - 
(or  — )  in  the  last  syllable.  In  signification  it  is  usually 
(a)  causative  of  Peal  (especially  in  verbs  whick  want 
Pael,  though  both  are  sometimes  found;  e.  g.  pftp7  ppp). 
Thus  ttab  to  put  on ,  ©aba  to  cause  [ another ]  to  put  on ,  to 
clothe ,  tfpn  to  sin ,  witf  to  seduce  or  entice  to  sin.  Some¬ 
times,  ( b )  like  Pael,  it  has  merely  the  sense  of  exhibiting , 
&c.,  e.  g.  pp2x  to  to  be  righteous ,  to  treat 

as  righteous ,  to  acquit. 

Note.  The  same  conjugations  are  not  in  use  in  all  verbs.  A  large 
number  appear  only  in  Peal,  others  in  Pael  only;  tor  examples  of  the  latter 
compare  "iet ,  nnn,  qao,  nbo .  Where  the  same  verb  has  both  Pael  and 
Aphel.  these  two  conjugations,  for  the  mo.st  part,  have  different  senses; 
e.  g.  to  advise ,  Tjbtas*  to  constitute  a.  king. 

5.  The  Passives  of  all  the  conjugations  are  character¬ 
ized.  by  the  preformative  syllable  nx  .  The  n  of  this  pre¬ 
fix  is  sometimes  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  letter,  or 
transposed  with  it,  as  follows. 


32  §  10.  VERBS  ;  DERIVATION  AND  INFLECTION. 

(a)  When  the  active  form  commences  with  1 or  n  , 

the  n  of  the  passive  prefix  is  assimilated,  and  expressed  by 
JDaghesh  forte  in  the  following  letter ;  e.  g.  “Ops  ,  ,  • 

*innx  ,  from  W and  *inn .  Less  frequently,  and  only 
in  the  later  Targums,  does  the  same  assimilation  take 
place  before  other  letters ;  e.  g.  a^nssi  it  is  written ,  for 
mnpritf ,  Eccl.  12:10. 

(b)  If  the  ground-form  commences  with  a  sibilant  [T , 

D,  a,  to  or  to],  the  n  is  inserted  after  that  letter;  e.  g. 
pnntox  .  But  after  T ,  it  is  changed  into  "I ;  as  from 

•pat ;  and  after  a  into  tt ;  as  ■Hipsfc*  from  rns . 

The  signification  of  these  forms  is  not  merely  passive, 
but  sometimes  reflexive  or  reciprocal ;  as  to  consult 

together  ;  frequently,  even  in  the  sense  of  the  Greek  mid¬ 
dle  voice  ;  e.  g.  fnnc:*  to  get  an  advantage . 

Moods  and  Tenses. 

6.  All  these  conjugations  have,  in  both  active  and 
passive  voices,  the  Praeter  and  Future  tenses,  the  Infini¬ 
tive  and  Imperative  moods,  and  the  Participle.  The  ac¬ 
tives  have  two  participles  throughout.  All  these  arise 
out  of  the  ground-form,  mediately  or  immediately,  by 
the  insertion  of  formative  letters,  or  by  a  different  pro¬ 
nunciation  of  the  radicals,  or  by  both  together.  The  dif¬ 
ferent  persons  of  the  Praeter  and  Imperative  are  formed, 
as  in  Hebrew,  by  suffixes,  and  the  Future  by  prefixes  and 
suffixes,  originally  fragments  of  personal  pronouns. 

7.  Verbs  are  either  regular  or  irregular .  The  former 
class  includes  all  those  verbs,  the  radicals  of  which  remain 
unchanged  throughout  all  their  inflections;  the  latter, 
those  which  suffer  a  change  or  omission  of  one  or  two 
radicals. 


11.  REGULAR  VERBS  J  INFLECTION. 


33 


§  11.  Inflection  of  the  Regular  'Verb. 

1.  Most  nearly  connected  with  the  Praeter  stands,  the 
Imperative ,  from  which  the  Future  is  derived.  The  Im¬ 
perative  of  Peal  is  characterized  by  the  vowel  — ;  those 
of  Pael  and  Apliel  are  like  the  Praeter  of  the  same  conju¬ 
gation. 

2.  The  Future  is  derived  from  the  Imperative  by  pre¬ 
fixing  which  is  pronounced  in  Peal  with  — ,  in  Pael 
with  — ,  in  Aphel  (where  the  suffers  elision)  with  — , 
and  in  all  the  Passives  with  —  ["!]• 

3.  The  Infinitive  is  formed  from  the  Praeter  in  two 

ways,  (a)  In  Peal  by  the  prefix  £  .  (5)  In  the  other 

conjugations  and  in  all  the  Passives,  by  the  sufformative 
syllables  . 

4.  The  Participles  are  also  derived  from  the  Praeter, 

and  are  formed,  (a)  In  Peal,  by  merely  changing  the 
vowels,  bttjj ,  ;  (fi)  In  all  the  other  conjugations  and 

in  the  Passives,  by  prefixing  which  is  pronounced  in 
Pael  with  —  ,  in  Aphel  with  —  and  in  the  Passives  with 
— ,  m  .  Of  the  two  Participles  in  the  Active  forms,  the 
first  has  —  constantly  in  the  last  syllable,  and  is  active  ; 
the  second  has  —  in  the  ultimate,  with  a  passive  significa¬ 
tion. 

5.  The  formation  of  the  persons  is  more  simple  in  the 
Praeter  and  Imperative,  in  the  Future  more  complex. 
The  following  table  exhibits  the  letters  and  syllables  era- 

i  ployed  in  forming  the  different  persons. 


Sing.  3.  m.  3.  f.  2.  m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 

PI.  3.  m.  3.  f.  2.  m. 

2.  t 

1.  c. 

Praeter.  —  n—  Pi — • 

rn — 

n— 

*1 —  N—  l^lPl — 

v— 

N3 — 

T 

Imperat.  — 

i _ 

S|— 

N3  — 

T 

Future  — *  — Pi  — Pi 

y-Pi 

— X 

l5—' ’  V1  l’-n 

!-n 

— 3 

6.  When  suffer matives 

are 

added  which 

take 

the 

tone, 


3 


/ 


31 


12.  REGULAR  VERBS  ;  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM. 


(a)  The  vowels  — ,  —  and  —  (the  latter  only  in  the 
Fut.  Peal)  of  the  final  syllable  Qf  the  ground-form,  are 
dropped,  provided  the  sufformative  commences  with  a 
vowel.  Those  which  precede  *i  and  of  the  3d  person 
plural  Praeter,  and  the  termination  of  the  Imp.,  since 
these  sufformatives  do  not  take  the  tone,  are  retained. 

(b)  In  the  3d  pers.  fern,  and  1st  pers.  com.  sing.  Praet. 
in  Peal  and  Ithpeel,  where  two  consonants  would,  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  above  rule,  come  together  without  a  vowel, 
Hhireq  is  introduced  to  facilitate  pronunciation. 

Note.  The  principal  variations  of  the  Chaldee,  from  the  mode  of  form¬ 
ing  the  persons  in  Hebrew,  are,  that,  in  the  former,  the  2d  p.  sing.  Praet. 
has,  generally,  no  distinction  of  gender,  while  the  3d  p.  plur.  has;  and  that 
the  3.  plur.  fem.  Fut.  takes  11  instead  of  n  for  its  preformative.  The  suf¬ 
formatives  of  the  Future  (e.  g.  1—)  are  capable  of  an  easier  explanation 
than  in  Hebrew. 

§  12.  JVotes  on  the  paradigm  of  the  Regular  Verbs. 

I.  Generally. 

1.  Forms  with  —  are  often  written  fully  (*1— )  or  even  with  ~,  e.  g. 

a.  1  sing,  and  2.  f  plur.  Praeter;  as  rPS®®  Gen.  3  :  10,  (rv^E’iD  Pseudo- 
Jonathan,)  prnas  Ex.  1  :  18.  Ps.  Jon. 

b.  Pael  and  Aphel ;  e.  g.  ’pjsnx  2  K.  6  :  23,  Ps.  16  :  2. 

c.  The  Part.  act.  in  Pe.  e.  g.  rP)3  Dan.  4 :  10,  20,  ri'CS  Gen.  3 :  15.  Jeru. 
Targ.  “GO  Gen.  3  :  9.  Pseudo-Jon.  should  doubtless  be  read  “CO  . 

d.  The  Participle  Peil  sometimes,  though  seldom,  appears  in  a  con¬ 
tracted  form  ;  as  bpn  Dan.  5:27. 

2.  Praeter.  The  2.  p.  sing.  masc.  sometimes  as  Xfibop?  Prov.  23 :  8. 
2  Sam.  14:13.  The  1st  pers.  sing.  m.  sometimes  appears  in  the  form 

Gen.  3:10,  13,  Pseud.  Jon.;  or  even  like  the  2d  person;  e.  g. 

5  Gen.  3:22,  Pseud.  Jon.  The  3.  p.  pi.  m.  sometimes  in  the  later 
Targums  takes  a  paragogic  1 ;  e.  g.  p“G?  Gen.  3  :  7,  prcd  Ps.  148:7. 
The  fem.  sometimes  appears  ending  in  *]— ;  as  *p£X  Ruth  1  :  10,  ynox  1 :  19. 

3.  Future.  Instead  of  the  formative  the  Targum  of  Proverbs,  in  ac¬ 
cordance  with  the  Syriac,  exhibits  also  3 ;  e.  g.  Prov.  16:10,  etc. 

Compare  Dathe,  de  ratione  consensus  version.  Chald.  et  Syr.  Prov.  Leip¬ 
zig,  1764.  pp.  16. — Instead  of  p ,  appears  *1  as  termination  of  the  3d  p.  pi. 
m.  Ez.  4  :  12.  fiun1’ . 

'  •  r 

4.  Infinitive.  The  biblical  Chaldee  has  H—  sometimes  instead  of  X— 
termination  of  all  the  Inf.  excepting  Peal.  Dan.  2:12.  14.  Ez.  7:14. 
Dan.  6:4.  In  the  Targums  sometimes  appears  n*  (without  suffixes) 
Esth.  1  :  5.  Ps.  102  :  23.  Sometimes  the  characteristic  ending  x —  is 

0  T  T 


12.  REGULAR  VERBS  ;  NOTES  ON  THE  PARADIGM. 


35 


omitted  ;  as  1  Sam.  26  :  25,  30  :  8.  Pael,  Aphel  and  the  Passives  have 
sometimes  a  12  prefixed  to  the  Inf  e.  g.  JObpp  Sol.  S.  1 :  7,  Xizjxpp 
Deut.  32  :  23.  Jerusalem  Targ.  Forms  like  ‘oibn  Lev.  13  : 7.  Jon.  ‘’binnx 
Job  1  :  13,  “'piopx  Deut.  18 :  10.  Jer.  T.,  with  paragogic  ,  are  more 
rare. 

5.  Passives.  Instead  of  the  preformative  PX  the  biblical  Chaldee  fre¬ 
quently  exhibits  rp  (Ez.  6:2,  &c.);  the  later  Targums  in  the  1st.  conj. 
P3  ;  e.  g.  Pppn3  1  Sam.  23  :  7 ;  (agreeing  with  the  Rabbinical  conj.  Nith- 
pael) ;  and  in  the  Inf.  of  all  the  conj.  np ;  as  xppDpp  Ex.  21  : 20,  Jer.  T. 
xphnoia  Deut.  32  :  1,  Jer.  T.  On  the  other  hand  Prof.  Winer  in  the  second 
ed.  of  his  grammar  remarks  that  the  Participles  sometimes  drop  their  ini¬ 
tial  E,  and  cites  as  examples  XPptjpX  Job  28  :  21,  and  pppipnnx  Gen.  31  :  15. 
J.  T. ;  but  Walton’s  Polyglott  has  in  these  passages  fiOppp  and  XjQtsnnat . 


II.  Notes  on  the  several  conjugations. 

1.  Peal.  a.  Some  verbs,  especially  such  as  are  intransitive,  take  —  (“'— ) 
and  a  few  i  as  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  Praeter;  e.  g. 
1^X2  to  be  evil.  to  be  good ,  33rp  to  sit,  ZPptU  to  lie  {recline),  ppn  to  be 
strong ,  TpEn  to  sleep,  Gen.  2:21,  33*hn  to  be  dry.  These  vowels  remain  in 
those  persons  where  —  is  usually  retained;  e.  g.  nbxtp  Prov.  30  :  7,  Xjbxpj 
Ez.  5  :  9.  >ipbq  4  :  12,  Jer.  49  :  4.  The  3d  p.  sing.  fem.  also  retains  iis 

vowel;  as  rbpp  Ez.  4:24,  r.aiiPl  Ezek.  26:2. — Such  verbs  in  —  or  ~ 

UJpb  1  K.  22  :  30,  btx  Gen.  22  :  2,  npp 


form  the  Imp.  in  — ,  —  or  — ;  as 
Job  2:5;  the  Future  in  — ,  —  or  i ;  as  \Uppp  Dan.  5:16,  Deut.  28  :  30, 
fpprn  Gen.  31 :  35.  When  two  forms  of  the  Future,  as  —  and  — ,  or  -  and 
i  coexist  in  the  same  verb,  they  have  different  significations;  e.  g.  13  "ip"] 


5: 

in 


19. 


si 


let  [it]  ap- 
e.  g.  r^v. 


Num.  1:51,  [who]  will  approach,  (Future.)  2“p?  Isa. 
proach,  (Optative.)  etc.  But  verbs  in  i  form  the  Fut. 

Ps.  121  :  4. 

b.  The  Infinitive,  in  the  later  Targums,  has  sometimes  the  termination 
K-;  e.  g.  is'TPpp  Ps.  118:7.  Sometimes  it  has  the  form  bppp  ,  Job  29  :  6. 
Ruth  4:6;  less  frequently  like  the  Heb.  biEjS  or  bitip  ;  e.  g.  Gen.  49 :  6. 
Ruth  2:1.  Ps.  105  :  14,  (even  with  suff.,)  or  as  Inf  absol.  ‘’biap  Lev.  13  :  7, 
Pseud.  Jon. 

c.  The  Imperative  exhibits,  in  a  few  instances,  the  full  orthography 
bsitip ,  2  Sam.  13:20.  Ps.  31  :  24.  It  sometimes  occurs  with  Hholem  in 
accordance  with  Hebrew  analogy  ;  as  “pnp  Ps.  26  :  2;  especially  with  suf¬ 
fixes  ;  e.  g.  ‘pbiap  1  Sam.  20  : 8. 

2.  Ithpeel.  The  last  syllable  sometimes  takes  —  (*1— );  e.  g.  ppPipFi 

Dan.  2  :  44,  comp.  2  K.  7  :  4.  Prov.  3  :  5.  Gen.  9  :  7,  Eccl.  12  :  11. 

Sometimes  —]  as  3bpnx  Gen.  14:  15. — Preformative  sometimes  rx, 
Dan.  7:15. 

3.  Pael.  X  preformative  of  1.  sing.  Fut.  has  sometimes  — ;  e.  g. 

Isa.  42 :  9,  opbpx  63:3;  and  even  ;  as  b^p^X  Deut.  32 : 1,  Jon.,  where 
the  Jer.  T.  has  b^bpx  . — As  in  Hebrew,  Daghesh  forte  is  sometimes 
omitted  when  the  middle  radical  has  Sheva. 

4.  Ithpaal.  Final  vowel  sometimes  —  or  — 7;  e.  g.  Epanx  Hos.  4:11, 


36  §  13.  PARTICIPLES  ;  PERSONAL  INFLECTION. 


TpsrtPX:  Ps.  105 : 25,  Gen.  3  :  15,  Jer.  T.  Heb.  Pual  forms  occa¬ 
sionally  appear  instead  of  this  conjugation;  as  Isa.  53:5,  “p}r^ 

Gen.  28  :  17,  Jon.  Gen.  37  :  3,  Jon. 

X  5.  Aphel.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee,  and  occasionally  in  the  Targums  n 
appears,  as  the  prelormative  of  this  conj.  (bppft  ),  and  even  in  the  Fut. 
and  Part,  after  the  characteristic  prefixes;  e.  g.  Ez.  5  :  12, 

Dan.  5  :  29,  bsprp  7  :  24,  p-'pnfi  Ez.  4: 13,  6  :  10. — Hiphil  some¬ 
times  takes  the  place  of  Aphel  in  the  biblical  Chaldee;  e.  g.  Dan. 

5  :  20,  7  :  22. 

6.  Ittaphal.  For  this  conjugation,  which  indeed  elsewhere  is  seldom 
found,  the  biblical  Chaldee  constantly  exhibits  Hophal ;  e.  g.  Ez.  4:  15, 
Dan.  j :  33,  7  :  11,  (with  Q,amets  Hhatuph  or  Shweq.) 

§  13.  Personal  mflection  of  the  Participles. 

1.  The  Participles  of  all  the  conjugations,  in  order  to 
supply  the  want  of  a  Present  tense,  are,  as  in  Hebrew, 
construed  with  the  separate  Personal  Pronouns  of  the 
first  and  second  persons ;  e.  g.  a;  a  bpp  I  Mil.  Beside  this 
mode,  the  Chaldee  has  one  peculiar  to  itself,  viz.,  to  infiect 
the  Participle  by  the  addition  of  pronominal  fragments, 
thus  forming  in  fact  a  new  tense.  The  two  Participles 
Peal  are,  after  this  mode,  inflected  as  follows. 

First  Participle.  Second  Participle. 


2 

m. 

Sing. 

nb-jp  * 

Plur. 

•pjmbpjj 

Sing. 

nb">pp 

Plur. 

prv’^pp 

2 

f. 

*>nbpp 

^nb^pp 

1 

m. 

T  :  ••  tr  ^ 

TVi# 

xpypp 

ipb^pp 

1 

f. 

tfStfb  Bp 

T  t  :  *T 

l*“i? 

arab-ra 

T  T  •  V, 

2.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee  a  kind  of  passive  preterite 
tense  is  in  use,  formed  by  appending  the  sufformatives  of 
the  Praeter  to  the  Part.  Peil.  It  takes  the  place  of  Ith- 


peel. 

1.  c.  2.  f. 

2.  m. 

8.  f. 

3.  m. 

nb*»pp  nb^pp 

an-  nb^np 

nbvjp 

b">pp  Sing. 

ajb^pp  ‘jnb^pp 

pinb^pp 

ab^pp 

^pp  Plur. 

*  QaUldth ,  not  qotldth , 

§  2.  9.  a.  The 

learner  should  bear  in  mind  that  a 

knowledge  of  forms  alone 

can  enable  him 

to  distinguish  Qamets  Hhatuph  from 

Qamets. 


14.  15.  VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 


37 


Comp.  Dan.  5:27,  28,  30,  7:4,  6,  11.  Ezra  5:14.  That  these  are 
not  to  be  considered  forms  of  Praeter  Peal  with  —  is  plain,  partly  from 
their  passive  signification,  and  partly  from  the  fact  that  other  forms  of  the 
same  are  usually  employed  in  the  Praeter  in  an  active  sense. 

§  14.  TJnfrequent  Conjugations  and  Quadriliterals. 

1.  As  in  Hebrew,  certain  unfrequent  conjugations 
occur,  some  of  which  are  confined  to  particular  classes  of 
irregular  verbs. 

a.  Poel  and  Ithpoal ,  characteristics,  same  as  in  He¬ 
brew  ;  e.  g.  psio  Hos.  13:5,  ISTum.  11 :  12 ;  especially 
in  verbs  Hi  ;  as  DttiD ,  D’ainiptf . 

b.  Polel  and  Ithpolal ,  in  verbs  JH ;  e.  g.  Dfcin  Ps.  75:8. 
Han.  4:34,  DDiina  Han.  5:23.  Ps.  107  :  25. 

c.  Polel  and  Ithpalel /  as  dds>d ,  . 

d .  Palpel ,  formed  by  repeating  the  first  and  third 
radicals,  and  ItJipalpal /  e.  g.  bsba  Gen.  11:9,  , 

(from  did)  Judg.  3  :  22,  pw  (from  tpn)  Ps.  143  :  3. 
Comp.  §§  19,  22.  v  ^ 

e.  SlidpfielvfaidL  Islitaplial  /  e.  g.  bbp©  Ez.  4:12.  Gen. 

49  : 10,  Gen.  49  : 10,  bbpnsh  Ez.  4  :  13. 

Ez.  6  :  15,  is  Shaphel  from  .  Gen.  2  :  2,  without  X,  ^ta  ; 
Pa  ssive  ‘^"’niax  to  procure  the  completion  of  a  thing ,  lofnish. 

2.  Quadriliteral  verbs  follow  usually  the  form  of  Pael ; 
e.  g.  iHDg  (Syr.  i.  q.  xarrjyoQelv)  Job  37  :  20,  bnpD 
20  :  15,  D5pr)  to  interpret.  The  origin  of  these  verbs  is 
to  be  explained,  for  the  most  part,  as  in  Hebrew.  See 
Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  861,  seq. 

Note.  Altogether  peculiar  is  the  verb  a^nia  (Tvntd)  Dan.  3:  28.  Fut. 

Isa.  53:11.  Inf.  rnrta  Dan.  3:15.  Part.  Santas  Dan.  6  :  28.  Pass. 

Gen.  32:30.  Syr.  This  Chaldee  form  should  however 

be  regarded  rather  as  a  kind  of  Poel  than  as  a  quadriliteral. 

§  15.  Verbs  with  Gutturals.  .  ' 

1.  The  gutturals  (» ,  n ,  n ,  * ,  and  to  some  extent  also, 

present  the  same  peculiarities  as  in  Hebrew.  It  will 


38 


15.  VERBS  WITH  GUTTURALS. 


be  sufficient  therefore  to  give  examples  of  the  most  im¬ 
portant  forms. 

2.  Verbs  Pe  guttural.  Peal ,  Praet.  "73?  f.  rrro  2.  m. 
ito?  1.  c.  rvro,  Imp.  "73?,  to?,  to,  bT»,  (b^T»),  TOtf 
Ex.  4:  4,  fern.  to?,-(vto  Gen.  12  :  13),  Plur.  TO3?  Ex. 
5:16,  vynx  Dan.  2  :  9,  Inf.  TOtt,  “Vito,  Fut.  TOP,  TOP, 
top ,  pTO ,  Participles  TO ,  to? . — Ithpeel ,  *n?]n8 ,  tops . 
— PacZ,  Praet.  na? ,  Fut.  TO? . — Ithpaal ,  TOna  . — Aphel , 
Praet.  "D?a  ,  jcna  ,  3TOS  ,  Fut.  rpbrn  ,  csn?  ,  Part,  pbra . 

3.  Verbs  Ayin  guttural.  Peal ,  Praet.  *jn3  f.  n?rp, 
1.  C.  top? ;  Imp.  ^3  ;  (*jina)  ;  Inf.  pro  ;  Fut.  pro ;  Part. 
713 ,  pro . — Itlvpeel ,  proa ,  prana . — P&eZ,  unr? ,  Inf.  . 
— Aphel,  inn». 

4.  Verbs  Lameclh  guttural.  Peal,  Praet.  ft3i?  fern. 
nTO ;  Imp.  riDUD ,  tot? ;  Fut.  top ,  nbi??  (?iEi??)  ;  Part. 
row  ,  tot? . — Ithpeel ,  rpr\i?2$ ,  fern,  tronica  . — AWZ  Praet. 
row ,  Fut.  TO? ;  Part.  act.  iTOtt  Dan.  4  :  34. — Ithpaal , 
nsrTO . — Aphel ,  TOa ,  TOi?a ,  1st.  pers.  nTOa  . 


Note  1.  When  the  first  radical  of  a  verb  Pe  guttural  happens  to  be  X, 
this  letter  is  frequently  dropped  in  Ithpeel  when  it  would  be  without  a 
vowel  (i.  e.  would  have  a  composite  Sheva),  and  by  way  of  compensation, 
r  of  the  prefix  takes  Daghesh  forte;  e.  g.  ^nnN  instead  of  nnxrN  Num. 
15:  13,  35:  33. 

Note  2.  Verbs  Lamedh  guttural  have  the  Praet.  3.  sing.  fem.  some¬ 
times  terminating  in  —  —  or  —  —  (the  latter  only  in  verbs  “i  b)  with  the 
tone  on  the  penult;  e.  g.  rHEN  Gen.  30:16,  PHBN  Dan.  5:  10,  rpa-j 
Gen.  16  :  3. 

Note  3.  When  the  1st  radical  takes  a  comp.  Sheva.  verbs  NS  and 
rfs  usually  have  — ,  Dan.  2:9.  Sol.  S.  5:3.;  verbs  rib  and  SB,  gene¬ 
rally  — . 

Note  4.  Forms  like  *pbnn  Dan.  7:  22,  belong  not  to  Aphel  but  to  Hi- 
phil,  and  are  Hebraisms. 

Note  5.  Occasionally  verbs  with  N  for  their  second  radical,  exhibit  *• 
instead  of  that  letter  in  Pael ;  as  from  bxd ,  from  “iNd.  See 
§  6.  d. 


16.  REGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIX  PRONOUNS. 


39 


§  16.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffix  Pronouns. 

1.  Of  the  suffixes  given  above  in  the  table,  §  8,  2. 
those  which  begin  with  a  vowel,  are  generally  appended 
to  verbal  forms  terminating  in  a  consonant;  and  vice 
versa ,  those  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  to  verbal 
forms  terminating  in  a  vowel.  The  Imperative  and  Par¬ 
ticiples  must  be  excepted,  as  they  frequently  take  those 
suffixes  (of  the  1st  pers.  sing,  and  plur.)  which  have  no 
union- vowel ;  as  "'pbtjp ,  tfjbup . 

2.  The  changes  which  verbs  undergo  in  consequence 
of  the  accession  of  pronominal  suffixes,  respect  chiefly 
the  vowels,  which  are  sometimes  dropped,  sometimes 
transposed.  See  Paradigm  II. 

( a )  Peal ,  Praeter.  Before  suffixes  which  have  a 
union-vowel  the  3d  pers.  sing.  masc.  has  the  form  bpp  ;  as 
tjbtpp  he  hilled  thee ,  fcttbtip  he  hilled  us ,  pabtpg  he  hilled  them 
[ those  men].  Before  pD  and  p  the  original  form  remains. 
The  3d  pers.  plur.  masc.  becomes  ^btpp ,  (before  pb  and  p , 
pbipp  ?)  the  fern,  which  is  rare,  btp  ;  as  pbt>g ,  ^nbtp ,  the  2d 
masc.  The  2d  pers.  sing,  remains  unchanged, 

though  in  a  few  cases  we  have  for  the  fern,  ?  Jer. 
15:10.  The  1st  pers.  sing,  takes  the  form  pbttp,  (rarely 
^nbtDjp,  as  Num.  23:11,  Jer.  30  : 14,  or  pbpp  Gen.  3  :  22, 
Pseudo-Jon.)  The  1st  pers.  plur.  has  the  form  'jbttjp  and 
takes  suffixes  for  the  most  part  with  the  union-vowel  — ; 
e.  g.  ^njbtop  we  hilled  him. 

In  the  Venice  Polyglott,  and  occasionally  in  Walton,  the  3d  p.  sing, 
masc.  Praet.  retains  its  vowel  under  the  second  radical ;  as  finb’ij  for  Pifibtfj. 

(5)  Future.  The  3d  fern.,  2d  masc.,  and  1st  pers.  sing, 
receive  suffixes  precisely  like  the  3d  pers.  masc.,  and  that, 
for  the  most  part,  with  Nun  epenthetic.  The  2d  and 
3d  persons  plural  fern,  take  the  form  of  the  masculine, 


40 


17.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  GENERALLY. 


i.  e.  with  suff.  these  forms  are  common .  See  Job  19  :  15. 
Gen.  30  :  13.  Ex.  1:16. 

(c)  Imperative.  Forms  with  —  in  the  2d  pers.  plur. 
masc.  throw  this  vowel  back  to  the  first  radical  before 
suffixes;  e.  g.  “’rnboa  Ex.  16  :  25. 

( d )  The  Inf.  and  Part.  Peal,  having  the  form  of 

nouns,  may  take  the  suffixes  either  of  verbs  or  of  nouns ; 
as  and  . 

(e)  In  all  those  persons  of  Pael  and  Afiliel ,  which  ter¬ 
minate  in  the  third  radical,  —  is  dropped  before  suffixes 
which  have  a  union  vowel.  The  same  takes  place,  (on 
account  of  the  tone  being  thrown  forward,)  in  the  forms 
*)bts£ ,  tejpa .  The  2d  pers.  sing,  fern.,  the  2d  pers.  plur. 
masc.,  and  the  1st  pers.  plur.  in  the  Praeter  receive  suf¬ 
fixes  as  in  Peal. 

(f)  The  Infinitives  of  all  the  conjugations  except 
Peal  take  before  suffixes  the  termination  m  ;  e.  g.  iiprnbtap , 
mrnbt:pa.  (Sometimes,  though  rarely,  this  ending  ap¬ 
pears  out  of  the  suffix  state.  Ps.  102  :  32.  Num.  9:17. 
Est.  1:5.) 

Note  1.  An  epenthetic  5  is  frequently  inserted  between  the  verb  and 
the  suffix.  This  is  most  common  in  the  Fut.  and  Imp. ;  rare  in  the  Praet. 
(ex.  Ps.  16:7.  Isa.  63:9.  Gen.  6:2.  Jud.  13:23.  2  K.  20:13;)  and 
still  less  frequent  in  the  Inf.  (Prov.  22  :  21.  Sol.  S.  6:11.) 

Note  2.  In  the  Targum  on  Prov.  appears  an  epenthetic  *» ;  e.  g. 

4  :  6,  8. 

§  17.  Irregular  Verbs  generally. 

1.  Of  these  there  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  two  general 
divisions,  defective  and  quiescent.  The  irregularity  gen¬ 
erally  respects  but  one  letter.  Verbs  which  exhibit  irre¬ 
gularity  in  two  of  their  radicals  are  called  doubly  anoma¬ 
lous, ,  §  24. 

2.  The  first  general  division  comprehends  twro  classes, 
viz.  fb,  and  VJ ;  the  second,  four,  viz.  tfb,  *>b  (lb),  lb  (*'b), 


19.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  J  AYIN  DOUBLED. 


41 


and  Kb .  Tlie  last  include  also  such  verbs  as  in  Hebrew 
belong  to  the  class  nb . 

Note.  The  division  of  irregular  verbs  into  defective  and  quiescent ,  is  not 
of  special  importance,  and  is  neglected  by  the  most  recent  grammarians. 


Verbs  Pe  Nun. 


The  irregularity  in  these  verbs  results  from  the  same 
cause,  and  is  almost  throughout  the  same  as  in  Hebrew. 

1.  The  letter  3,  where  it  would  otherwise  terminate  a 
mixed  syllable,  is  assimilated  to  the  succeeding  consonant ; 


e.  g.  for  ps3ft  . 

2.  In  the  Imper.  Peal,  where  3  would  regularly  stand 
without  a  vowel  in  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  that  let¬ 
ter  is  ordinarily  dropped;  e.  g.  ps  for  pp3,  (bs3 ,  Jer.  25  :  27.) 
Beside  these,  which  are  common  to  Hebrew, 

3.  Some  forms  have,  usually,  a  different  characteristic 
vowel  from  that  of  regular  verbs:  thus  the  Future  is 
generally  like  ps^  or  pis? ;  Apliel  p^SK  .  In  the  Imp.  the 
forms  p^s ,  pis  and  pS  are  about  equally  common,  though 
not  ordinarily  found  in  the  same  verb. 

4.  Ithpeel,  Pael,  and  Ithpaal  present  no  irregularity. 


Note  1.  From  No.  1.  there  are  many  exceptions,  chiefly  in  verbs  which 
have  a  guttural  for  the  second  radical ;  e.  g.  Din$?  Isa.  5  :  9,  ■vnsp  Prov. 
29:13.  (But  is  inflected  according  to  the  rule  above ;  as  Fut.  nirn 
[instead  of  Hi  ft?],  Aphel  rV’n&t  .)  Also  in  some  others;  e.  g.  *riD^  Dan. 
2  :  16,  *jP)3 n  Ez.  7  :  20,  pp?  Ps.  91 :  7,  p53H  Ez.  5  :  14. 

Note  2.  The  verb  }ri3  takes  —  in  the  Fut.  as  its  characteristic  vowel; 
e.  g-  Ex.  25  :  16,  “jnn  Deut.  21  :  8.  Once  — ,  "(Pis?  Dan.  2  ;  16. 


§  19.  Verbs  Ay  in  doubled. 

The  anomalies  of  these  verbs,  which  accord  only  in 
part  with  the  same  class  in  Hebrew,  are  particularly  the 
following. 

(a)  The  root  is  a  monosyllable,  with  its  vowel  be¬ 
tween  the  first  and  second  radicals,  in  Peal,  (excepting 
the  participles,)  and  in  Aphel ;  and  so,  either 


42 


§  20.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  PE  YODH. 


(1)  No  trace  of  tlie  doubling  of  the  second  radical 
remains ;  as  is  the  case  in  Peal  Praet.  3d  pers.  sing.  masc.. 
2d  masc.  and  fern.,  and  in  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plur.,  in 
the  Imp.  masc.  sing,  and  fern,  plur.,  and  more  rarely  in 
the  1st  Part.;  e.  g.  p- t,  pti,  nfjn ;  or 

(2)  It  is  indicated  "by  Daghesh  forte  in  the  2d  radical 
in  those,  persons  of  the  Praet.  and  Imp.  Peal,  the  sufform- 
atives  of  which  commence  with  a  vowel ;  as  np^ ,  tfp^ , 
^ ;  or,  finally, 

(3)  It  is  compensated  by  Daghesh  forte  in  the  first 
radical  in  the  Fut.  and  Inf.  Peal,  and  throughout  Aphel ; 
as  ,  pVP ;  or  even  sometimes,  in  Ithpeel,  in  fi  of  the 
preformative  syllable  rna  ;  e.  g.  plina . 

(7>)  Instead  of  Pael  and  Ithpaal ,  which  are  regularly 
formed,  (see  Dan.  4:10,  7  :  20.  Ps.  35  :  15,  42  :  6,)  Pal- 
pel  and  Itlipalpal  are  generally  used  ;  as  ppp^ ,  ppp^x , 
Job  9  :  17,  30  :  14.  Isa.  21:9;  or  Poel  and  Ithpoal ;  e.  g. 
Dan.  4:15.  Job  9  :  6,  p&i-ira. 


The  Participles  of  Peal  are  usually  regular.  The  second,  or  Peil ,  ap¬ 
pears  once  in  the  form  p*’|5'n  Ex.  32  :  20. 

An  example  of  Ithpeel  regularly  formed,  is  manx  Am.  7 :  1.  Jer. 
50 :  27. 

The  following  from  the  Biblical  Chaldee  are  Hebraistic  forms.  Aph. 
Dan.  2  :  24,  *l 6  :  25,  p^pE  2:40;  Hoph.  b'Jf} ,  s&yn  Dan.  5:13,  15. 
For  such  forms  as  hbsan  Dan.  4  :  3,  and  Gen.  19 :10,  Jon. ;  see  §  2,  7.  a. 


§  20.  Verbs  Pe  Yodh  (Pe  Vav). 

1.  There  are  three  classes  of  verbs  which,  in  the 
ground  form,  have  ^  for  their  first  radical,  viz.  (1)  Verbs 
originally  lEb;  (2)  Verbs  properly  *& ;  and  (3)  Those  in 
which  the  ^  is  not  treated  as  a  quiescent,  but  is  assimi¬ 
lated  like  the  3  of  verbs  jz . 

2.  Verbs  originally  lib ,  which  constitute  the  most 
numerous  class. 

(a)  In  the  Imp.  Peal,  which  is  generally  pronounced 


20.  IRREGULAR  VERBS ;  PE  TODH. 


43 


witli  — ,  drop  the  first  radical ;  e.  g.  T\  from  V*]*} ,  nn  from 
srr  ?  mn  from  iw . 

(Z»)  In  the  Future  Peal  retain  it  quiescent  in  — ,  in 
consequence  of  which  the  last  syllable  takes  —  or  as 
its  characteristic  vowel ;  e.  g.  “rbl1 ,  £pb‘>?  .  In  accordance 
with  the  remark  §  6.  c.  (4),  the  quiescent  1  is,  in  these 
forms,  frequently  dropped ;  e.  g.  Prov.  11:25.  Ps.  104  :  4. 
J ob.  3  :  4. 

(c)  Resume  their  original  1 ,  which  quiesces  in  Hlio- 
lem,  throughout  Aphel  and  Ittaphal ;  e.  g.  *|oii ,  CpOT> , 
qoinx .  Comp.  Hoph.  Job  33  : 19. 

Ithpeel  and  the  whole  of  the  2d  conj.  are  for  the  most  part  regular.  In 
the  latter,  some  verbs  retain  1  as  their  first  radical ;  e.  g.  Ps.  88  :  13, 

fctnsinN  Eccl.  9  •- 3.  In  Aphel  forms  with  Fi,  after  the  prelormatives  of 
the  Fut.  and  Part.,  are  not  uncommon:  e.  g.  *l3Fp!"ttn  Dan.  2:5,  5:17. 
Ps.  55:14. 

3.  The  first  radical  of  verbs  originally  4  quiesces, 

(a)  In  Fut.  Pe,  ordinarily  in  — ;  e.  g.  “ i p?  2  Kings 
1 : 14,  toy''}  Ps.  102  : 12.  But  compare  Isa.  7  :  18. 

( b )  In  Aphel,  in  — ;  e.  g.  2'u'?  Ps.  49:  19.  Jer. 
10  :  5.  Mic.  1  :  8.  But  compare  b^a  Zech.  11:2. 

The  difference  between  these  two  classes  of  verbs  is  not,  however,  so 
great  as  to  prevent  their  forms  being  frequently  interchanged,  especially 
in  Aphel.  Thus  we  have,  at  the  same  time,  and  SBl'x  Gen.  17  :  16, 

and  b ^ ri ,  Ps.  66:6,  and  ,  p|P,  (in  Heb.  “'b)  becomes  in 

Aphel  . 

4.  A  class  of  verbs  4  assimilate  their  first  radical  to 

the  following  letter,  in  the  Inf.  and  Fut.  Peal,  and  in 
Aphel ;  so  that  they  are  in  these  forms  entirely  analo¬ 
gous  to  verbs  )t> ,  To  this  class  belong  ,  Aphel  rnstf ; 
3^,  Aphel  Deut.  34:6,  Jon.;  Aphel  ; 

also  in  some  of  their  forms,  ^ ,  2^  and  bD^ ;  e.  g.  Inf. 

Gen.  15  : 13,  nwa  Ps.  133  :  1,  bsp  Num.  13  :  31.  .Fut. 

1  Sam.  20  :  30,  (even  Is.  4  :  15.  Dan.  2  :  9,)  also 

;  nrp  2  Sam.  16:18,  bs?  Ezek.  7:19. 


4:4 


21,  22.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  PE  'ALEPH  ;  ATIN  VAV. 


§  21.  Verbs  Pe  Aleph . 

A  few  verbs  fcfe  are  treated  not  only  as  gutturals,  but 
at  the  same  time  as  quiescents  ;  viz. 

(a)  ^ies; ,  bp:*  ?  ana ,  .  The  of  these  verbs,  in 

the  Future  and  Inf.  Peal  quiesces  in  — ;  e.  g.  tea?,  and 
sometimes  is  even  exchanged  for  n ;  as  W? ,  WE . 
Throughout  Aphel  it  becomes  i ;  as  bpia ,  witf .  (bp^x 
Deut.  32:13,  is  altogether  peculiar.)  An  instance  of 
Hophal ,  wn ,  occurs  Dan.  7:11. 

“pax  in  its  third  conjugation  takes  the  Hebraizing  form  ,  (as  if  by 

contraction  from  ,)  Gen.  15  :  6.  Job  4  :  18,  15  :  22.  Pass. 

Gen.  42  :  20. — For  xrx  see  §  24.  2. 

(i)  IQtf,  5]ba  and  frequently  take  in  the  Fut.  and 
Part.  Pael,  the  contracted  form  pbstf  ?  pbtfE  ,  in  consequence 
of  which  is  frequently  dropped. 

(<?)  The  of  some  others  is  dropped  in  Ithpaal  and 
compensated  by  Daghesh  forte  in  n  of  the  prefix,  which 
also  receives  the  vowel  which  belonged  to  ;  e.  g. 
for  "EKha  1  Sam.  2  :  5.  Ezek.  47  : 11. 

§  22.  Verbs  Ay  in  Vav  [Ay  in  Yodh). 

The  commutation  of  1  and  * ,  in  these  verbs,  is  more 
abundant  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  The  following 
particulars  are  worthy  of  notice. 

1.  In  the  first  conjugation  (with  the  exception  of  the 
1st  Part,  which  has  the  form  DXp)  and  in  the  third,  these 
verbs  are  monosyllabic  throughout ;  as  op ,  opE  ,  . 

The  preformatives  of  the  Fut.  and  Inf.  of  both  conjuga¬ 
tions  generally  have  — ,  though  in  the  later  Targums,  they 
are  not  unfrequently  pointed  with  — ,  —  or  —  ;  e.  g.  rmx 
Kuth  1 :  17,  Gen.  27  :  4.  The  form  prr ,  Fut.  Peal 
from  tpn ,  Ez.  5:5,  6:5,  is  entirely  peculiar. 

Note.  The  2d  Part.  Peal  is  sometimes  like  the  Inf.  Mp,  Dan.  6 : 18. 


23.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  LA.MEDH  ALEPH. 


45 


2.  In  Ithrpeel ,  the  first  radical  is  pronounced  with  — , 
and  the  n  of  the  preformative  doubled,  Dpptf  .  In  the 
later  Targums  occurs  also  the  lengthened  form  Dprptf  Ex. 
40:11.  Hhireq  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  Qamets  ; 
e.  g.  Enpnx  Jer.  33:22.  Gen.  38:26,  Jer.  T.  Dan.  4  :  9. 

3.  Pael  and  Itlvpaal  are  regularly  inflected  from  the 

ground-forms  and  .  Many  verbs,  however, 

substitute  for  these  conjugations  Polel  Dttip  or  Palpel 

opop. 

4.  Aphel  has  occasionally  the  form  of  verbs  ;  e.  g. 
D^pix  Ps.  78  :  13.  Gen.  18  : 16,  Jon.  ppiitf  Ps.  14  :  2.  See 
1,  of  this  section. 

5.  The  following  verbs  are  inflected  as  4b ; 

( a )  Dpi,  ma,  mo,  D^to,  and  SpT,  in  Pm? /  thus 
n*>o  5  nnp? ,  rnipD ,  etc.  Gen.  27  :  1.  Prov.  23:  22. 

1  Sam.  12  :  2  ;  Imp.  ,  ‘WD ,  Ez.  4  :  41  ;  Fut. 

Deut.  15  :  6. 

(5)  pin  in  Ithpeel ,  fully,  pDptf ,  or  contracted,  inns  > 
Job  28  :  23,  11  :  12,  37  :  14.  Ps.  73  :  17. 

/ 

Note.  Those  verbs  which  have  l  moveable  for  their  middle  radical,  (as 

"nn,  503  etc.),  do  not  belong  here,  but  are  regular.  The  number  of 
such  verbs  is  greater  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  Some  verbs  with  the 
same  radicals  exist  in  both  forms,  and  in  that  case  have  different  significa¬ 
tions;  *vn  to  look  at,  Tn  to  be  white  ;  ivd  to  smk  down,  rnd  to  sprout. 

§  23.  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph. 

This  class  includes  all  those  verbs  which  are  compre¬ 
hended  in  Heb.  under  the  two  classes  nb  (including  verbs 
originally  4b  and  b'b ,)  and  rfb ,  the  difference  between  the 
two  classes  being  entirely  lost  in  Chaldee.  Rarely,  (and 
almost  exclusively  in  the  biblical  Chaldee),  the  radical 
form  of  these  verbs  terminates  in  n_  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2:16, 
4:8,  6:3.  Num.  5:26.  Frequently,  and  in  the  later 
Targums,  uniformly,  they  end  in  or  .  Their  chief 
anomalies  are  the  following. 


46  §  23.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ;  LAMEDH  ALEPH. 

1.  In  those  forms  which  terminate  in  the  3d  radical, 

(a)  In  Peal  Praeter,  and  Inf.,  as  well  as  in  the  Fut, 
Imp.  and  1st  Part,  of  all  the  conjugations,  that  radical  is 
almost  indifferently  or  n ;  as  ttba  or  “ba  ?  tfba  or  ^ba ,  tfba^ 
or  ‘’bp  . 

(&)  In  the  Praet.  and  2d  Part,  of  the  other  conjugar 
tions  and  in  the  Imp.  Peal,  11 ;  as  “’banx  ,  “’ba ,  ‘’ba ,  iba^  . 

.  2.  This  N  quiesces  in  the  Praeter  Peal  in  — ,  in  the 
Inf.,  Fut.  and  Part,  in  — ;  the  h  in  the  Praeter  of  Ithpeel 
and  Aphel  usually  in  — ,  in  the  Imp.  and  Part,  in  —  ;  in 
the  passive  Part,  of  Pael  and  Aphel  only,  is  moveable ; 
*>batf,  •'broa . 

Note.  For  examples  of  the  Praet.  Peal  with  *1—  see  Gen.  2  :  1&,  Jon. 
Dent.  30:9;  of  the  Praet.  Aphel  with  *1— ,  Ps.  78  :  11.  2  K.  8  :  8  ;  of  the 
Futures  with  Is.  30  :  26.  Jer.  51  :  8. 

3.  In  the  course  of  inflection  the  3d  radical  is 

(a)  Dropped,  before  the  sufformative  ft—  of  3d  fern, 
sing.  Praeter  Peal,  before  fi  and  p—  in  the  Fut.  of  all  the 
conjugations ;  before  the  sufformatives  of  the  Imp.  (in 
which  i  generally  occurs  instead  of  *i)  ;  and  in  the  3d 
pers.  plur.  masc.  Praet.  Peal  before  i ,  which,  in  these 
verbs,  takes  the  place  of  the  regular  *1 ;  e.  g.  fiba ,  iba , 
pban ,  pbp ; 

(b)  Exchanged,  for  moveable,  before  the  sufformatives 
ft—  and  — ,  3d  fern.  sing,  and  plur.  Praeter  of  all  the 
conjugations  except  Peal,  also  before  *}—  of  the  2d  and 
3d  pers.  fern.  plur.  Fut. ;  e.  g.  rpba  ?  rpbaa ,  pbp ;  for 
quiescent,  (quiescing  sometimes  in  — ,  sometimes  in  — )  be¬ 
fore  all  the  sufformatives  which  begin  with  3  or  n?  and 
before  a  of  the  3  d  plur.  Praeter  (which  is  here  moveable) 
in  all  the  conjugations  except  Peal ;  e.  g,  mba ,  pmba , 
»rta ,  V’ba , 

t  ••  :  7  •  “ 


24.  VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS. 


47 


Notes  on  the  Paradigm  of  verbs  it'b . 

1.  Praeter.  The  3d  per.  sing.  fem.  Peal  sometimes  appears  with  the  full 
orthography;  as  nxVia ,  Dan.  2  :  35.  Sometimes  it  follows  the  analogy  of 
the  other  conjs.  ;  thus  n*n3  Job.  17  :  7,  (or  like  niORX  Is.  1  :  7,  or  nba  Dan. 
2  :  35,  4  :  19).  The  2d  per.  sing.  m.  is  sometimes  written  fully,  terminating 
in  S— .  The  3d  per.  pi.  m.  follows,  in  some  copies,  the  Hebrew  iorm;  as 
*nj3  Lam.  1 :  3.  Sol.  S.  3  :  1,  *lba  Num.  26  :  64,  or  the  analogy  of  the  other 
conjs. ;  as  van  Dan.  3  :  21.  The  3d  per.  pi.  f.  occurs  in  the  lorm  *br»  Deut. 
2  :  11,  or  “jxba  Ruth  4 :  17.  Finally  a  few  instances  occur  of  the  Praet.  Pe. 
with  X  prosthetic;  e.  g.  Prov.  20 :  12,  Y'niax  Dan.  5:4.  In  the  other 
conjugations  the  3d  per.  pi.  instead  of  V1—  sometimes  takes  ;  Ezek. 
23:10.  Is.  11:4.  Jer.  6  :  14. 

2.  Future.  The  3d  per.  m.  sing,  terminates  indifferently  in  ‘1—  or  K— . 
It  sometimes  appears  even  with  Q,amets;  e.  g.  &<3RrH  Is-  53:2,  Ninn1? 
Zech.  6  :  12,  (according  to  Buxtorf )  The  3d  per.  pi.  sometimes  takes  the 
termination  p  instead  of  p .  Comp.  Dan.  7  :  26.  Is.  65  :  23.  Ex.  22  :  31. 

3.  Imperative.  The  2d  f.  sing,  ends  sometimes  in  X— ;  as  Gen.  19:  32. 

The  form  Join  ,  Gen.  24  :  60,  is  anomalous.  ^ 

4.  Infinitive.  In  Peal  it  sometimes  takes  a  paragogic  K ;  e.  g.  fiTSM 
Prov.  25  :  17.  Esth.  5  :  14.  Ez.  5  :  9.  The  regular  form  is  employed  as 
Inf.  absolute  Is.  61 :  10.  Am.  5:  5.  Gen.  26:  28.  The  Inff.  of  the  other 
conjugations,  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  terminate  in  rn— ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2:  10, 
5:2,  6:8,  more  rarely,  in  the  Targums  in  pp ;  e.  g.  “'pSPiTlix  Num. 
12  :  8,  Jon. 

For  the  Participles  of  verbs  frtb,  see  below,  §  34. 

Note.  Apocopate  Futures  and  Imperatives  are  less  frequent  in  Chaldee 
than  in  Hebrew.  The  following  are  examples. 

Fat.  apoc.  pain  Hab.  2  :  16,  ’’PH  (irn  Eccl.  11:3,  like  the  Heb.  inna^), 
hnn,  pnn  Ex.  22:  31,  from  Xin,  (elsewhere  fully,  &on^ .  spnn  Gen.  17:  4, 
24  :  14)  ;  ,  Tin  ,  ,  “jinn,  «no  ,  from  son  ,  Deut.  4  :  1.’  "  Prov.  15  :  27. 

Gen.  20:7.  2  K.  1 : 2,  8:10.  These  forms  have  generally  an  optative 
signification. 

Imp.  apoc.  ,  with  N  prosth.,  Gen.  24  :  14.  Pael,  id  Gen.  44 : 1,  in 
Gen.  37  :  16.  Aphel,  *inx  . 

An  apocopate  participle ,  Aphel,  is  “’tpa  instead  of  p'Ra  Deut.  32  :  39. 


§  24.  Verbs  doubly  anomalous. 

1.  is  and  sb  (rib).  These  unite  the  irregularities  of 
both  classes ;  e.  g.  ,  Aphel,  . 

2.  A  and  aft .  E.  g.  ans* ,  ans ,  m  ,  aoa  .  Peal  Fut. 
Deut.  29  :  20,  W?  Gen.  33  :  14.  Inf.  KTtt  (fccrtt)  Dan. 

3  :  19,  wg  Dan.  3  :  2. — Ithpeel ,  Lev.  13:18.  Fut. 


48 


25.  DEFECTIVE  VERBS  AND  MIXED  FORMS. 


Lev.  13:2. — Pael,  Part.  ^  2  Kings  20:5. 

Ithpaal  2  Kings  5  :  13.  Apliel ,  Gen.  4:4. 
Part,  Gen.  6:17.  Imp.  Peal  in  one  case,  by  Aphae- 
resis,  T>n  (Lond.  ed.  come  ye,  Prov.  9  :  5.  Elsewhere 
irw ,  Dan.  3:26. 

3.  4  and  tfb .  E.  g.  (rrr),  ^  •  Peal,  Fut. 
^  Ps.  50:16.  Aphel,  Ps.  75:2.  Inf.  nania  Ex. 
12  :  33.  Part.  Prov.  28  :  13.  Imp.  Tiia  Gen.  19:22. 
W’a  Judg.  5:2. 

Note.  Those  verbs  db  which  have  *1  for  their  middle  radical  are  regular, 
so  far  as  l  is  concerned,  i.  e.  the  1  is  always  a  consonant ;  as  X}'?  ,  fiOn  . 

§  25.  Defective  verbs  and  mixed  forms. 

1.  But  few  verbs  actually  exhibit  all,  or  nearly  all, 
the  moods  and  tenses.  So  far  as  this  deficiency  is  occa¬ 
sioned  by  the  fewness  of  those  remains  of  the  Chaldee 
which  have  reached  our  time,  it  does  not  belong  to  a 
grammatical  treatise.  Those  verbs  only  must  be  noticed 
here  which,  though  cases  frequently  occur  where  certain 
forms  would  naturally  be  employed,  constantly  supply 
their  places  by  forms  borrowed  from  different  themes. 
The  following  are  examples  ; 

nrn  and  *jnj,  to  give,  the  former  occurring  in  Peal 
Praet.  and  Imp.  and  in  Ithpeel ;  the  latter  chiefly  in  Peal 
Fut.  and  Inf. — pbo  and  pDD  to  ascend,  the  former  being 
used  in  Praet.  Peal,  in  Pael,  and  the  Passives  of  the  first 
and  second  conjugations ;  the  latter  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp. 
Peal,  and  in  Aphel.  Deut.  9:9,  10:1,  2  Kings  17  :  4, — 
a™  and  tfpft  to  drink  j  antj  in  Peal,  tfpft  in  Aphel. — pbn 
and  tp.n  to  go  /  tl^e  former  chiefly  in  Pael,  the  latter  in 
Inf.  and  Fut.  Peal. 

An  example  of  double  inflection  in  the  same  word  is  SH*1 .  The  Future 
is  commonly  like  verbs  *jS .  The  1st  per.  sing,  only  follows  the 
analogy  of  verbs  ">2 ,  3HK  Ps.  39  :  5,  101  :  4,  though  SH3X  also  occurs, 
Dan.  2  :  9. 


26.  IRREGULAR  VERBS  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


49 


2.  Tlie  following,  wliicli  have  been  called  'nixed forms, 
are  improperly  so  designated,  twana  Dan  7:15,  and 
tranks  Dan.  4:16,  are  but  Syriac  pointings  of  the  Prae¬ 
tor ;  and  the  Future  1st  sing,  snana  Jud.  15  :  7,  (Yen. 
ed.)  for  ynana  is  not  destitute  of  all  analogy ;  comp,  in 
Hebrew  Anna ,  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  312.  Ipp  Hos.  4  :  2, 
can  hardly  be  called  a  mixture  of  Fut.  and  Part. ;  for, 
(as  the  Future  of  this  verb  has  the  form  nap),  fip!?  may 
be  considered  3d  plur.  fern,  analogous  with  “jbsn  Jer.  3  : 19. 

§  26.  Irregular  verbs  with  suffixes. 

1.  The  forms  of  most  irregular  verbs  before  suffixes 

do  not  differ  essentially  from  those  of  the  regular  verbs  ; 
and,  so  far  as  verbs  “jfe ,  ,  lb ,  and  *&  are  concerned,  may 

be  learned  from  §  16.  The  following  examples  will  illus¬ 
trate  this  remark ; 

(a)  p ,  Peal;  psnlp  Judg.  20:32,  tjpbtp  Ps.  91:12, 
^btpn  Ps.  28  :  3. — Aphel;  papas  Ex.  32  : 12,  pnpaa  Job 
10:18,  apnpaa  Yum.  20  :  5. 

(b)  iv ,  Peal;  pSPS?  Jer.  20:5. — Aphel;  Jnsppn  with 
epenthetic  5 ,  Dan.  7:23,  ajnpaa  Ps.  44  :  20,  pb?n  Dan. 
2  :  24,  nn Jud.  19:3. 

(c)  ft ,  Peal ;  -prato  Gen.  50  :  26,  npto  Ez.  5:14,  naumn 
Dan.  7  :  23. — Pael ;  nppp  Ps.  105  :  10. — Aphel;  nppsa 
Dan.  3  :  2,  ajatt^pj  Hos.  6  :  2,  aawnn  Ez.  5  :  11. 

(d)  h'b,  Peal;  Ez.  28  :  19,  nprp  Deut,  22  :  2. — 
Aphel,  npnin&s  Dan.  5  :  7,  pnipin  Dan.  2:13,  prpninb 
Dan.  2:26. 

2.  The  forms  of  verbs  sb  before  suffixes  differ  more 
widely  from  those  of  the  regular  verbs.  Thus 

(a)  $  and  1  final  quiescent  are  commonly  dropped  be¬ 
fore  suffixes  in  the  Praeter  and  Future  ;  while  the  former 
takes  suffixes  with  the  union  vowel  —  or  — ,  and  the  latter 

with  3  epenthetic ;  e.  g.  pin  he  saiv  me,  2  Sam.  1 :  7,  nnin 

4 


50 


27.  NOUNS  ,  DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


he  said  him ,  Jud.  19:3,  psbn  Is.  42  :  5,  ftaTn?  Lev.  13:21, 
^stn;  Ex.  33  :  20.  Sometimes  they  are  retained ;  e.  g. 

Prov.  8  :  22,  ftajn  Gen,  38  :  15.  Aph.  Deut. 

4  :  36,  Obad.  3,  waa  Gen.  3:13,  Pseudo-Jon. 

(5)  final  quiescent  in  the  Imp.  of  all  the  conjuga¬ 
tions  is  retained ;  e.  g.  ‘’•vw  Ex.  4  :  3,  tfpTna  Ex.  33  :  18. 
(But  Jer.  36  :  15,  arnp  for  airnp). 

(c)  The  i  of  the  3d  pers.  plur.  Praet.  Peal,  and  of  the 
Imp.  is  generally  changed  into  V.  V>_  into  ^ ;  e.  g. 

Jon.  1 : 12,  anim  Lam.  1  :  7,  Is.  3  :  12. 

( d )  The  persons  of  the  Praeter  in  and  n"1—  remain 
unchanged ;  e.  g.  “’ptyw  Jon.  2  :  4. 

(0)  n_  of  the  3d  pers.  sing.  fem.  Praet.  is  changed 
into  rp;  e.  g.  Hos.  4:12. 

On  the  Inf.  Peal  and  the  Participles,  see  below,  §  35. 


r 

| 

r 

CHAPTER  IV. 

i 

NOUNS. 


§  27.  Derivation  of  Nouns. 

1.  Nouns,  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew,  are  either  primi¬ 
tive  or  derivative.  The  former  are,  for  the  most  part,  the 
same  as  in  Hebrew,  and  are  regarded  as  primitive  for 
similar  reasons.  Comp.  Gesenius  Lehrgeb.  p.  478.  seq. 
Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  316.  The  derivatives,  constitu¬ 
ting  the  great  majority  of  nouns,  are  formed  either  from 
verbs,  (which  is  generally  the  fact),  and  these  are  termed 
verbal  /  or  from  other  nouns,  and  then  they  are  called 
denominative . 

2.  Verbals  derived  from  the  Infinitive  are  generally 
abstract  in  signification,  i.  e.  they  express  the  action,  and 


28.  NOUNS  ;  GENDER  AND  NUMBER. 


51 


have  the  forms  bpp ,  bpp ,  bpp ,  bpp ,  bpp ,  b^pp ,  b^pp ,  bitsp , 
b^itsp  ,  bppp  ,  etc. ;  those  derived  from  Participles  are  gen¬ 
erally  concrete ,  i.  e.  express  the  actor,  and  have  the  forms 

^Pl? ,  ^1?  ,  ,  ^Pj? ,  ^Pi? ,  *®P ,  etc. 

3.  Denominatives  are  generally  formed  by  adding  the 
termination  ‘1—  (h— ),  fern.  (if—)  ;  or  1— .  They  are 
generally  adjectives,  especially  ordinal  numerals,  or  patro¬ 
nymic  or  gentile  nouns ;  e.  g.  “Hp?  a  foreigner ,  fpp  an 
Egyptian ,  pnpp  a  rebel.  Many  feminine  nouns  in  rr>-  and 
m  are  also  denominative ;  e.  g.  msbp  a  kingdom ,  from 
•jbp  #  fifpbtf  widowhood ,  from  pahs?  a  widow  ;  tfp“np 

a  rooting  out,  extirpation ,  from  unto  $ 

§  28.  Gender  and  number  of  nouns. 

1.  The  genders  are  two,  masculine  and  feminine.  The 
latter  generally  terminate  in  (n_),  1  (if),  *>_  (if_ ), 
or  if .  It  should  be  noticed  however  that  —  is  also  the 
termination  of  the  emphatic  state  in  masculines.  Conse 
quently,  in  ascertaining  the  gender  of  nouns,  the  analogy 
of  the  other  dialects  and  the  sense  are  more  certain 
guides  than  the  mere  form  of  a  noun. 

Note  1.  The  termination  •"!—  is  generally  to  be  considered  a  Hebraism. 
It  is  regular  in  Chaldee,  only  in  feminines  derived  from  masculines  in  ‘1— ; 
as  nt<p“T£  fem.  from  . 

The  employment  of  n  instead  of  X  in  these  forms  is  obviously  designed 
to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  K  .  For  a  similar  reason  all  the  infinitives  of 
verbs  Lamedh  Aleph  except  Peal  terminate  in  n . 

Note  2.  There  are  a  considerable  number  of  feminine  nouns  with  mas¬ 
culine  forms,  mostly  the  same  as  in  Hebrew;  e.  g.  a  stone ,  rnfc  a  path. 

X  earth,  "if  X  an  ear ,  f.n  a  sword.  Some  are  common  ;  e.  g.  nx  a  mark , 
'aix.jire,  XJStt  a  vine ,  and  the  numerals  from  20  to  100. 

2.  The  numbers  are  two,  singular  and  plural.  The 
few  dual  forms  which  occur  are  to  be  regarded  as  He¬ 
braisms.  They  occur  only  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  ter¬ 
minating  in  the  absolute  state,  in  *p— .  See  Dan.  2  :  34, 


52 


29.  STATES  OB  NOUNS. 


7  :  4.  The  dual  in  the  other  states  cannot  be  distin 
guished  from  the  plural.  Compare  Dan.  2  :  33,  41, 
7:7.  In  the  Targums  the  double  members ,  etc.  are  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  plural,  and  where  the  number  two  is  re¬ 
quired,  tnn  is  inserted.  Plurals  masculine  end  in  “p— , 
plurals  feminine  in  “j— . 


To  most  masculine  nouns,  viz.  to  those  which  terminate  in  a  radical 
letter,  the  termination  p—  is  directly  appended ;  e.  g.  “mo  a  rock ,  pi.  p'pa. 
But  those  which  terminate  in  X— derived  from  verbs  JO,  take  p— ;  those 
in  or  "’X—  take  pX— .  Feminines  in  X—  change  this  ending  directly 
into*)—;  those  in  ni  and  m—  change  these  terminations  intop  and  p  ; 
e.  g.  ,  rpptfia ,  plural  p3ba  ,  p“i’2a  ;  and  finally,  those  in  nx  —  from 

masculines  in  form  the  plural  in  p— ;  e.  g.  HXapp  plur.  papp  . 

As  in  Hebrew,  there  are  also  in  Chaldee  many  nouns  having  the  form 
of  masculines  in  the  sing,  but  of  feminines  in  the  pi.,  and  vice  versa ;  e.  g. 
r-x ,  ■jspx ;  hex ,  pax ;  xba ,  pba ;  xan ,  psn ;  xsd ,  paizi . 

In  some  nouns  both  terminations  are  in  use,  even  in  the  same  Targum : 
e.  g.  ,  pi.  pax  and  piax ;  pi.  p"ip3  and  pPp3 ,  (as  if  from  r*nn3)  ; 
“ivpi-  r  aP  and  p3p ,  etc.  Sometimes  the  forms  with  different  endings 
have  different  significations  ;  e.  g.  from  bp  a  voice ,  pbp  thunders.  Ex.  9  :  23, 
pbp  voices.  Ps.  93  :  4.  These  examples  should  be  distinguished  from  epicene 
nouns,  or  those  which  express  both  males  and  females,  such  as  O^D ,  pi. 
pWD  and  pWb. 

Sometimes  feminines  plural  take  an  additional  plural  ending.  So  in 
Hebrew  and  Arabic;  comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  327.  5. 

Some  nouns  occur  only  in  the  plural;  as  p*fi  life ,  X’att)  heaven ;  espe¬ 
cially  those  which  designate  the  different  ages  of  life  ;  as  paps’  youth , 
though  some  of  these  occur  in  the  singular,  with  the  termination  n*i . 
Others  occur  in  the  singular  only;  e.  g.  the  names  of  the  metals, 
gold,  btps  iron ,  C]b5  silver.  But  psb3  occurs  in  the  sense  of  pieces  of  sil¬ 
ver.  Gen.  42  :  25. 


§  29.  States  of  Nouns. 

1.  Besides  the  absolute  and  construct ,  which  occur  in 
Hebrew,  nouns  in  Chaldee  have  also  the  emphatic  state 
in  which  they  originally  corresponded,  in  sense,  to  nouns 
in  Hebrew  with  the  article.*  It  has  however  come  into 


*  So  in  Danish,  Landene ,  the  countries,  from  Lande,  countries.  Rask,  Danish 
Grammar,  p.  14.  Also  in  Albanian,  Gour ,  stone ;  Gouri ,  the  stone.  Malte  Brun, 
Univ.  Geog.  vol.  VI.  p.  201. 


29.  STATES  OF  NOUNS. 


53 


use,  in  many  cases,  where  the  sense  does  not  require  the 
definite  article.  In  Syriac,  this  liberty  has  been  much 
more  extensively  taken. 

Note.  The  indefinite  article  is  expressed,  either  simply  by  the  absolute 
state,  or  by  the  numeral  “in  one  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  2  :  31,  6  :  18.  Ez.  4 :  8. 

2.  Construct  State.  Characteristic  terminations. 

a.  Masculines  plural  change  p—  into  .  The  termination  of  the 
construct  state  of  masc.  nouns  in  the  sing,  does  not  differ  from  that  of  the 
absolute  state. 

b.  Feminines  in  X—  (rt— )  change  these  endings  into  n—  in  the  sing., 
into  n—  in  the  plur.  const.  Feminines  in  *1  and  resume  their  original 
n  in  the  const,  sing.,  and  in  the  plur.  change  p  and  p  into  rn  and  rp . 

3.  The  emphatic  state  is  characterized,  in  both  gen¬ 
ders  and  both  numbers,  by  the  ending  .  (Masculines 
in  ,  which  take  n_  in  the  emphatic  state,  constitute  the 
only  exception). 

a.  To  masculines  singular  (except  such  as  terminate  in  x—  or  *1— )  this 
termination  is  directly  added  ;  e.  g.  0*10  a  horse,  XQiiO  the  horse  ;  mascu¬ 
lines  in  X—  substitute  the  letter  n  for  their  final  syllable,  and  those 
which  end  in  “l—  change  this  ending  into  fix— ;  e.  g.  xba ,  x^ba  ;  ’’Epp, 
nx^“ip . 

b.  Feminines  in  X—  change  X  in  the  emph.  sing,  into  fi;  e.  g.  X2bp, 
emph.  xrob^a  ;  those  in  fix—  change  this  ending  into  rp-;  e.  g.  fiX^app, 
emph.  xrP'Q-Tp  ;  finally  those  in  ^  and  “l—  appear  in  the  emph.  state  with 
their  original  full  endings  n*i  and  rp— ;  e.  g.  xrpsb'a  . 

c.  In  the  plural,  the  masc.  endings  p—  and  p—  are  changed  into 
X*—  ;  as  X^pb^a .  px—  (from  sing.  — )  becomes  "’X  —  ;  as  pXTapjp  ,  emph. 
•’XEpp . 

d.  In  feminines  plur.,  the  emphatic  state  is  formed  by  adding  X—  to  the 
•instruct;  e.  or  xn3"HE .  xnisba,  xrvba .  But  such  as  terminate  in  the 
sing,  in  nx—  (from  masculines  in  )  resume  here  their  original  ;  e.  g. 
xn“>ia“jp  from  nx?anp . 

4.  Before  suffixes  [in  the  suffix  state] ,  nouns  exbibit 
tbe  following  modifications. 

a.  Derivative  masc.  nouns  in  change  this  ending  into  X— before 
suffi  ;  as  ttxtapp  from  nppp ;  those  in  X—  (from  verbs  xbj  change  this  ter¬ 
mination  into  moveable  ;  as  fvbs  from  xba. 

b.  All  masc.  plur.  nouns  drop  the  ending  p—  (p— )  and  then  take  the 
suff.  of  nouns  plural. 

c.  Feminines  in  X —  change  X  into  n  in  the  sing.;  as  nnsbri  from  xxb’c; 


54 


30,  31.  NOUNS  ;  FIRST  DECLENSION. 


those  in  1  and  *-  take  the  construct  form  before  suffixes ;  as  ttpiiabB ;  those 
in  JV  ( radical )  change  this  ending  to  rp— - ;  and  those  in  HN—  (from  masc 
in  “l—  )  resume  their  original  * ;  e.  g.  nrpanp . 

cl.  In  the  fern,  pi.,  suffixes  are  appended  to  the  construct  state;  e.  g 
Yinna'HE ,  lirtniSibB . 

§  30.  Declension  of  Nouns.* 

Since  no  vowels  are  chopped,  except  those  of  the  final 
syllable  of  ground-forms,  (comp.  §  7.  <?.,)  and  since 
changes  of  any  kind  are  less  frequent  than  in  Hebrew, 
(the  first  vowel  of  the  ground-form  remaining  through¬ 
out  invariable,  excej)t  in  monosyllables  and  segholate 
forms,)  fewer  modes  of  declension  would  naturally  be 
expected,  than  appear  in  Hebrew.  Accordingly  we 
reckon  in  Chaldee  nine  declensions,  six  of  masculine,  and 
three  of  feminine  nouns. 


§  31.  First  Declension. 

The  first  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  have  all 
their  vowels  immutable.  It  comprehends, 

(a)  Nouns  which  have  ,  *1_ ,  i  or  3  before  their  final 
consonant;  as  p3  a  fish,  nv  a  day,  a  head,  near. 


In  a  few  nouns  which  would  seem  to  belong  to  (a),  the  quiescents  are 
treated  as fulcra.  Such  belong  to  Dec.  IV.  e.  g.  ’’BIN  Num.  25  :  15,  Pseu¬ 
do-Jon.  instead  of  ‘’BN . 

"  \ 

(b)  Nouns  which  have  —  in  their  final  syllable ;  as  M 
good,  335  a  thief. 

Note  1.  Nouns  with  —  in  the  ultimate  are  chiefly  of  six  classes. 

(1)  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  13?;  e.  g.  bp  ,  aa  (Heb.  blp,  HI  a)  ; 

(2)  Nouns  of  the  form  ana  ,  (Heb.  oibd)  ; 

I’,  a- 

(3)  Nouns  of  the  form  bap  ,  (Arabic  jUci* ,  Heb.  with  —  impure  ;) 

(4)  Nouns  like  bap,  (Heb.  with  —  pure ,)  and  ba^p  ; 

(5)  Nouns  which  have  the  formative  ending  ■]— ;  as  “|3np  (Arab 

y^-);and 

(6)  Nouns  of  the  form  baip  ;  as  “laiN ,  “013? . 

The  first  three  of  these  classes  retain  —  in  all  the  inflections,  and  con¬ 
sequently  belong  regularly  to  Dec.  I. 


§§  32,  33.  nouns  ;  second  and  third  declensions.  55 


Nouns  of  the  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  classes  sometimes  t^ke  —  instead 
of  —  in  the  construct  sing.,  and  before  the  suff.  *p3  and  *pn  .  Elsewhere 
the  —  is  retained.  The  punctuation  of  these  nouns  is  however  variable; 
and  as  they  present  no  other  irregularity,  and  are  not  very  numerous,  they 
may  better  be  regarded  as  exceptions  from  Dec.  I.  than  as  forming  a  sepa¬ 
rate  declension. 

Note  2.  There  are. also  a  few  nouns,  (principally  of  the  ftfrm  bil3j3,) 
having  (garnets  in  the  penultimate,  which  are  sometimes  varied  according 
to  the  first  declension,  but  sometimes  drop  their  penultimate  vowel,  out  of 
the  absol.  sing. 

§  32.  Second  Declension . 

The  second  declension  includes  nouns  with  final  —  or 
—  ,  either  monosyllabic,  or  having  the  preceding  vowels 
immutable  ;  as  T  ,  die ,  sby  ?  nsaa .  This  —  or  —  is  drop¬ 
ped  before  pronominal  suffixes  or  formative  syllables,  be¬ 
ginning  with  a  vowel. 

Note  1.  Form  with  a  guttural  with  suffix  Job  28  :  26. 

Note  2.  Forms  like  (  —  shortened  into  — )  from  bpp,  1st  part. 

Peal,  e.  g.  pasn  Gen.  3  :  5,  etc.  are  to  be  set  down  to  the  account  of  ir¬ 
regular  punctuation.  Analogy  requires  “pbpp  • 

Note  3.  In  this  declension  may  be  reckoned  bt“i5  ,  emph.  N2T7G  ,  etc.  as 
if  from  bps . 

Note  4.  Before  yb  and  *}in ,  monosyllables,  as  in  Hebrew,  take  — ,  — , 
or  — ;  e.  g.  ‘jinxM  Zeph.  1  :  17,  *p3“n  Isaiah  1  :  15. 

The  form  pda?  from  Ezek.  27  : 2,  is  peculiar. 

§  33.  Third  Declension. 

This  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  correspond 
to  the  Segholate  forms  in  Hebrew.  They  may  be  written 
in  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew,  either  with  two  vowels,  the 
second  of  which  is  always  considered  a  furtive  vowel ;  as 
1\b)2 ,  nbn ,  (these  forms  almost  exclusively  in  the  biblical 
Chaldee,)  rp3, ,  (tthp ;)  or  with  only  one  vowel,  which  be¬ 
longs  between  the  last  two  consonants ;  as  Sjbtt ,  "ipp . 
They  are  inflected,  for  the  most  part,  as  in  Hebrew.  But, 

a.  In  the  Plural  absol.  the  forms  7|?p  and  -iSb  become,  as  they  do  in 
most  other  inflections,  7\bp  and  psp . 

b.  The  form  unp  sometimes  follows  the  analogy  of  Hebrew  ;  as  XSptt 


56 


NOUNS  ;  FOURTH  AND  FIFTH  DECLENSIONS. 


Dan.  2  :  37  ;  sometimes  takes  — ;  as  ipbns  Ez.  5  :  8.  Very  rarely,  Hholerr 
is  retained  ;  as  ‘'iiiiHnitt) ,  Isa.  53  :  2. 

c.  In  a  few  cases  the  of  the  form  rS2  remains  moveable  in  its  inflec> 
tions ;  e.  g.  itrP2  Ez.  5  :  3,  Sol.  S.  4  :  8. 

d.  Nouns  of  the  forms  7$) 9  and  tap  in  the  course  of  inflection,  generally 
take  —  or  —  under  their  first  radical,  according  to  the  paradigm.  1TH,  “pD 
cbn  ,  “ip:?  dbd  some  others  take  — .  Comp.  Dan.  4:6,  5:12.  Gen.  32  :  16 
Isa.  53  :  2.  Nouns  having;  gutturals  for  their  first  or  second  radical,  natu- 
rally  take  — ;  as  nr'j ,  xpsa  ;  122 .  Knps  . 

e.  Participles  Ithpeel.  with  a  few  mouns.  not  properly  Segholates,  fol¬ 
low  the  analogy  of  this  declension ;  e.  g.  bpjpnp,  inflected  precisely  like 

• 

§  34.  Fourth  Declension, 

Tlie  fourth  declension  includes  all  nouns  which  double 
the  final  consonant  when  they  receive  accession.  They 
are  mostly  monosyllables  derived  from  verbs  The 
long  vowels,  — ,  i  and  (for  the  most  part)  *i,  are  exchanged 
in  the  course  of  inflection  for  the  corresponding  short 
vowels.  In  some  nouns  —  becomes  —  ;  as  rip,  Kps;  T2 , 
xyx  Ex.  19:23,  baba ,  pbaba  Dan.  7  :  9. 

b’3  has  in  the  emph.  st.  etc.  with  the  tone  on  the  penultimate ;  but 
with  suff.  which  draw  the  tone  forward,  ‘jinbs  Dan.  2  :  38,  7  :  19. 

§  35.  Fifth  Declension. 

The  fifth  declension  includes  nouns,  participles,  and 
infinitives,  derived  from  verbs  tfb  and  terminating  in  , 
yy-or1-;  as  aba ,  tfba ,  ■oa  ,  ^bya  ?  ^bara .  The  ^  gene¬ 
rally  appears,  in  the  course  of  declension,  as  the  third 
radical,  displacing  the  substituted  in  forms  like  tfba . 
The  termination  p—  of  the  plural  absolute  is  sometimes 
contracted  into  )— .  More  rarely  it  follows  the  Hebrew 
analogy,  and  terminates  in  p— ;  as  Job  1  :  13.  Lam.  1  :  3. 
Sometimes,  perhaps  by  mistake  of  transcribers,  it  is 
pointed  p— ;  as  pate  Dan.  7  :  3,  pma  Gen.  3  :  15,  Jeru. 
Targum,  where  the  connection  decides  that  these  forms 
are  masculine.  In  the  const,  and  emph.  plural,  no  trace 
of  the  radical  n  remains. 


36,  37.  nouns;  sixth  and  seventh  declensions.  57 


Note  1.  Peculiar  forms  of  this  declension.  PI.  with  suff.  ■j'irVHSJ 

Is.  10  :  2.— ’’as  Plur.  Lev.  19  :  10. — ">j?3  PI.  “|*p3  Deut.  6  :  3,  Jer.  Targ.— 
‘,2“i  PI.  w\*m  Ruth  2  :  21. 

Note  2.  Infinitives  Peal  of  verbs  xb  are  sometimes  regularly  inflected 
in  this  declension.  Comp.  Dan.  4  :  23.  2  Sam.  13  :  6.  Ez.  5  :  9.  But 

sometimes  the  X  is  dropped;  as  1  K.  18:16,  Tjtn^  2  Sam.  13:5, 

Josh.  3  :  3,  Gen.  23  :  2. 

\ 

§  36.  Sixth  Declension . 

Here  belong  the  derivative  nouns  terminating  in  the 
formative  syllable  ta|—  ,)  compare  §  27.  3.  They  are 
mostly  gentile  or  patronymic  nouns ,  or  ordinal  numerals . 

a.  These  nouns,  when  they  receive  accession,  change  their  final  11  into 
2*  ,  which  is  likewise  moveable,  and  commences  a  new  syllable.  As  a  con¬ 
sequence,  —  is  here  changed  into  — . 

b.  The  plur.  emph.  terminates  in  “1— ,  agreeing  in  form  with  the  con¬ 
struct,  as  has  been  remarked  above  §  29.  3.  c. 

Exc.  from  b.  Dan.  2  :  5,  JOfiSn  Dan.  3 :  2,  3,  Dan.  3 :  8. 

Ez.  4  :  12,  23,  5  :  1,  5.  This  declension  includes  also  some  derivatives  from 
verbs  £<b  which  terminate  in  "l— but  are  not  passive  participles.  (Comp, 
the  preceding  deck)  ;  e.  g.  nb3> ,  pi.  “’ttbs  Gen.  1 :  6,  Jer.  T.  Ps.  104  :  13,  *’31 , 
emph.  iUSST .  pi.  *p^3T  Jer.  19  :  4. 

§  37.  Seventh  Declension. 

The  seventh  declension  includes  all  invariable  femi¬ 
nines,  i.  e.  all  nouns  with  the  feminine  endings  — ,  ‘1— 
and  *1 ,  the  final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  only 
one  consonant ;  as  height ,  KS?  counsel ,  strength , 

fcOlys  a  roll ,  too  goodness ,  “’ana  a  nurse. 

Whatever  vowels  precede  this  termination  are  immu¬ 
table  ;  so  that  the  paradigm  exhibits  all  the  changes  of 
these  nouns  in  accordance  with  the  principles  stated  in 
§§  28,  29. 

Note.  In  forms  like  a ,  if  the  penultimate  be  a  simple  syllable,  the 
Sheva  which  takes  the  place  of  the  final  Garnets  in  the  emphatic  and 
suffix  states  singular  is  silent;  e.  g.  mgdhlna ,  emph.  niedhmta:  if  the 
penultimate  be  a  mixed  syllable,  that  Sheva  is  vocal;  as  msgilla,  emph. 
megillstha. 


58 


38,  39.  nouns;  eighth  and  ninth  declensions. 


§  38.  Eighth  Declension. 

The  eighth  declension  includes  all  those  feminines,  the 
final  syllable  of  which  commences  with  two  consonants ; 
e.  g.  a  Up ,  ■’btpiK  (i.  q.  oTob'i)  a  robe ,  *DT purity. 

a.  Nouns  in  fci—  of  this  declension  must  evidently  supply  a  vowel  in  the 
emph.  and  suff.  states;  for  otherwise  they  would  exhibit  the  impossible 
forms  NPSb  ,  Nnbmtt  ,  etc.,  viz.  with  two  vocal  Shevas  in  immediate  sue- 
cession.  This  supplied  vowel  is  Hhireq  or  Pattahh,  (the  latter  with  gut¬ 
turals  ;)  more  rarely  Seghol;  e.  g.  asb,  ansb,  xrx.  Ntyatf,  NEn,  Niman. 

belongs  here,  and  is  treated  as  if  written  xbbjs? ;  e.  g.  emph.  st. 
:  but  the  vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  dropped  for  the  sake  of 
-  euphony. 

b.  The  paradigm  b.  comprises  all  feminines  in  iO  ,  derived  from  verbs 
N?,  which  have  a  consonant  without  a  vowel,  immediately  preceding  this 
termination.  The  supplied,  vowel  is  Hhireq,  in  which  quiesces. 

c.  Those  in  “1—  and  are  regular  in  the  sing,  like  Dec.  VII.  In  the 
plur.,  as  becomes  necessary,  they  also  take  a  supplied  vowel,  Hhireq  or 
Pattahh. 


§  39.  Ninth  Declension. 

Here  belong  feminines  in  derived  from  mascu¬ 
lines  in  of  Dec.  YI.  Com]}.  §  28.  1.  Note  1.  In  the 
emphatic  state  and  before  suffixes,  a  is  exchanged  for  “» 
moveable ,  though  ordinal  numerals,  for  the  most  part, 
take  or  or  entirely  drop  it ;  e.  g.  Lev.  25:22, 

Deut.  15:9,  y.  12.  (but  comp,  arrjron , 

Dan.  7  :  19.)  The  same  substitution  of  1  for  occasionally 
appears  even  in  the  absolute  and  construct  plural;  as 
lyM  Gien.  13  :  15. 

Note  1.  As  in  Hebrew,  the  fern,  forms  are  sometimes  so  mixed  that  the 
singular  is  of  one  declension  and  the  plural  of  another;  e.  g.  pi. 
as  if  from  ;  mVa'na  ,  pi.  and  • 

Note  2.  When  feminine  nouns  are  formed  from  masculines  by  adding 
the  terminations  a— ,  and  “1— ,  the  changes  in  the  ground-form  are  pre¬ 
cisely  the  same  which  appear  in  the  emph.  st.  of  masculines. 

Note  3.  Segholates  in  n— —  are  rare.  They  are  inflected  precisely 
as  in  Hebrew. 


g§  40 — 42.  IRR.  NOUNS - ADJECTIVES - NUMERALS. 


59 


# 


§  40.  Irregular  and  Defective  Nouns . 

These  are  doubtless  such  as  were  in  most  frequent 
use.  The  following  are  the  principal,  is  ,  na ,  , 

©aa ,  'ox  5  ?  ana ,  rpa ,  ip ,  np  ?  on ,  ^bp  ?  ,  arpa ,  op  , 

■’T'S,  ^p,  Eyi  and  Dp  or  Dii3 .  Their  anomalies  are 
given  in  the  vocabulary. 

§  41.  Adjectives. 

The  most  frequent  forms  of  adjectives  are  bp]j5  bipp 
and  b^pp ;  less  usual  are  bpp  and  bpnp .  They  are  in¬ 
flected  like  nouns.  For  the  comparison  of  adjectives  see 
§  64. 

Note.  Adjectives  of  the  first,,  third,  and  fourth  declensions  have  thei) 
feminines  generally  declined  according  to  the  seventh  ;  those  of  the  sec 
ond  and  fifth,  according  to  the  eighth  ;  and  those  of  the  sixth,  accord 
ing  to  the  ninth. 


42.  Numerals. 


1.  Cardinals,  a.  These,  from  3  to  10,  present  the  same  anomaly  as  in 
Hebrew,  the  masculines  being  indicated  by  fem.  forms,  and  the  feminines 
by  masc.  forms.  See  Par.  XI. 

Note.  inn  sometimes  takes  suffixes,  and  then  appears  in  the  form 
inn ;  e.  g.  yirninn  both  of  them ,  Gen.  2  :  25,  *)13‘\inn  both  of  you,  Gen. 
27  :  45. 

b.  From  11  to  19.  The  units  are  prefixed  to  no?  for  the  masc.,  and 
to  inq?  for  the  fem.  It  must  be  remarked  however,  (1)  That  the  units 
appear  somewhat  different  from  the  regular  form,  (comp,  the  paradigm,) 
and  (2)  That,  in  the  later  Targums,  the  units  and  no?  or  ■''no?  are 
contracted  into  one  word.  These  forms  are  presented  in  the  paradigm  in 
parentheses. 

c.  The  tens  from  30  to  90  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  simple  plurals  of  the 
units  3 — 9 ;  e.  g.  pnbn  thirty ,  p?anx  forty ,  etc.  Eighty  is  somewhat  ir¬ 
regular.  viz.  pon  [i.  e.  pDon]  or  pqn,  Jer.  41  :  5.  Ex.  7  :  7.  Twenty  is 
expressed  by  the  plural  of  ten,  pno?  or  pnp?.  Though  masc.  in  form, 
these  are  all  of  the  common  gender. 

d.  The  intermediate  numbers  21 — 29,  31 — 39,  etc.  are  expressed  by 
simply  placing  the  smaller  number  after  the  larger,  connected  by  l  ;  e.  g. 
masc.  nni  pnq? ,  fem.  xnrn  pno?  twenty-one ,  etc. 

e.  One  hundred  n&ua ,  200  pnxo  ,  ",nso  ,  300  nxo  nbn  ,  400  nxo  Sana  , 


60 


43.  ADVERBS. 


etc.  the  prefixed  units  being  feminine;  1000  pba?:,  2000  *pE&&P  ‘pnFi,  300C 
“pabsK  xnbn,  etc.  the  prefixed  units  being  masculine;  10,000  i20,000 

■prn  ‘nos  xmn,  Jon.  4 : 11. 

2.  Ordinals.  The  first  two  have  peculiar  forms,  viz  .first  “>app  ,  second 
■j^an,  (comp.  Heb.  D^aia). 

a.  From  third  to  tenth  they  are  formed  from  the  cardinals,  and  ter¬ 
minate  in  (’’at—,)  emph.  Hit—  for  the  masc.,  and  fiat— ,  emph.  xn—  or 
atn"1  lor  the  fem. 

t  • 

b.  From  eleventh  to  nineteenth  the  units  are  prefixed  to  “n^px  ,  but 
contracted  into  one  word  ;  e.  g.  “’X'no'nrt  eleventh ,  Num.  25  :  8,  *1Xpp*nn 
twelfth,  etc.  In  designations  of  time  (as  the  fourteenth  year ,  &c.)  the  car¬ 
dinal  numbers  are  generally  employed. 

c.  Above  20,  as  in  Heb.,  cardinals  and  ordinals  are  the  same.  For  the 
mode  of  designating  distributives  and  numeral  adverbs  see  §  65.  4,  5. 


CHAPTER  V. 
PARTICLES. 


§  43.  Adverbs. 

1.  The  following  are  primitive  •  where?  ‘’TO  when? 

also,  rrari  there ,  tfb  not. 

2.  Derivatives  with  characteristic  ending  /  un^  by  day , 

ajw  to-day ,  carefully ,  mana  m  Aramean  QAqcc- 

{ucugti),  if  anrriofc  hastily ,  if  rori  again. 

3.  Other  parts  of  speech  used  adverbially  ; 

а.  Substantives,  either  with  prepositions  ;  as  isis*’p3  in  short,  shortly 
XpUppp  in  truth ,  truly ,  "p5?  immediately  ;  or  without  them  ;  as  bbs  wholly , 
xnnn  below. 

T  •  “ 

б.  Verbal  forms,  viz.  Inf.  and  Part. ;  as  Spsp  backwards ,  again, 

once  more. 

c.  Adjectives,  numerals,  and  pronouns;  e.  g.  ‘3  [jirm]  frn/i/,  lAns,  etc. 
[  as  onej  together ,  fnap  [Zi&e  u7ia7 ?]  Aon?/  /iou>  very  ! 

4.  Compound  adverbs ;  Aow  ?  *,np*'X  irAen  ?  fip-ns  ]fo  A^re] 

hitherto.  <“i3p  [/rom  here ]  hence ,  ai3‘1!"i3  whence  ?  crip  thence ,  mb  [mx  xb] 
there  is  not.  For  the  mode  in  which  the  last,  as  well  as  mx,  takes  pro¬ 
nominal  suffixes,  see  5  8.  3.  II.  Note  4. 


44,  45.  prepositions  ;  conjunctions. 


61 


5.  A  simple  question  is  expressed  by  the  prefix  ft,  (before  a  conso¬ 
nant  with  Sheva,  simple  or  composite,  !n).  Pronouns  or  adverbs  express 
an  interrogative  sense  by  prefixing  “’X  ;  e.  g.  "JSE  ix  whence  ?  ^bx  ‘’X  who  ? 
Comp.  §  9.  3.  Before  interrogative  adverbs  iX  is  intensive  ;  as  “'X  , 
to  which  I  believe  our  language  has  nothing  precisely  equivalent,  unless 
it  be  the  colloquial  phrase,  where  in  the  world ? 

§  44.  Prepositions.  - 

1.  Tlie  following  are  originally  prepositions  : 

( a )  The  inseparable  3,  s,  and  b  prefixed  to  nouns 
and  pointed  with  —  before  simple  Sheva  ;  as  ;  be¬ 
fore  a  word,  the  first  letter  of  which  has  a  composite 
Sheva,  with  a  corresponding  short  vowel ;  as  TMajs ,  wb 
In  the  latter  case,  contraction  sometimes  takes  place  ;  as 
anbab  Dan.  5  :  *23. 

T  T 

(b)  The  separable  monosyllables  nib  ?  ms  ?  rns  ? 
which  before  nouns,  appear  as  separate  words.  They 
take  pronominal  suffixes  without  change  ;  as  ‘'nib  with 
me . 

Instead  of  3  prefix,  appears  the  separate  form  ^3,  Sol.  S.  1  :  9,  13. 

2.  Words  employed  as  prepositions  but  originally  nouns  or  other  parts 
of  speech;  viz.  xb3  without ,  (compounded  of  the  adv.  xb  and  3,)  “ta 
[  part ]  from ,  of  bija  and  onpp  before ,  ps  between .  rpbn  instead  of  ninn 
under ,  blEE  and  b^iBEX  on  account  of  These,  (with  the  exception  of  the 
first,)  and  some  others,  are  originally  nouns,  and  conform  to  the  analogy 
of  nouns,  in  receiving  suffixes  ;  sometimes, 

a.  Having  feminine  forms  ;  e.  g.  .  But  bias  retains  the  masc. 

form  before  yin  and  p's  ;  or 

b.  Having  plural  forms ;  e.  g.  Ipbs ,  ,  inPns ,  etc. 

3.  Compound  prepositions;  onpa  pa,  bsjsb ,  psba. 

§  45.  Conjunctions. 

1.  Primitive  conjunctions  are  )  and ,  3  as ,  b  that  (before  Fut.),  *,n  if 
*13  since ,  inx.  because ,  ix  or.  Borrowed,  from  other  parts  of  speech  D“i3 
but.  *nb  so,  “p  that.  Compounded  xb  *p  or  x^abn  that  not ,  p  ij  until, 
n  pbn  and  n  bins  because ,  pn  bs  therefore,  n  p"3  after. 

.  2.  The  inseparable  conjunctions  3,  " ,  and  b  are  prefixed  like  the 

prepositions,  §  44.  1.  a.  Vav,  before  consonants  with  Sheva,  also  before  3, 
a,  and  S,  is  pointed  *1 .  When  b  is  prefixed  to  the  Fut.  the  preforma- 


62 


46.  INTERJECTIONS. 


tive  of  the  latter  is  dropped  ;  e.  g.  instead  of 

low  §  50.  2. 


§  46.  Interjections. 

'  \ 

1.  These  are  for  the  most  part  primitive  ;  e.  g.  xn  lo  !  “‘Jib 
that!  oh  that  !  ^  wo!  (comp.  Lat.  vae.) 

2.  Some  are  bomywed  from  other  parts  of  speech ;  e.  g 
on!  (Imp.  from  3n?),  *1533  I  pray !  [Jit.  in  entreaty ],  bton 
b'zn  to  destroy.) 


i 


.  See  be- 

would 

.  ton  come 
wo  !  (from 


PART  III. 


SYNTAX. 


CHAPTER  I. 

SYNTAX  OF  PRONOUNS. 


§  47.  Personal' Pronouns. 

1.  The  separate  pronouns  sometimes  supply  the  place 
of  the  substantive  verb,  or  at  least  render  the  use  of  that 
verb  unnecessary ;  e.  g.  ian  awnSK  we  are  [lit.  we  they\ 
Ez.  5:11;  tfptn  tfptf  I  [am]  the  seer ,  1  Sam.  9:19.  Most 
frequently  is  the  verb  omitted  when  the  pronoun  is  joined 
to  a  participle. 

•  ✓ 

The  reason  of  this  omission  of  the  substantive  verb,  in  such  cases, 
seems  to  be  this..  These  pronouns  have  a  certain  strength,  an  inherent 
emphasis,  (so  to  speak),  unattainable  in  English,  on  account  of  the  fre^ 
quency  with  which  we  are  compelled  to  use  them  in  the  ordinary  inflec¬ 
tion  of  verbs. 

2.  The  suffixes  are  used  in  Chaldee  as  in  Hebrew.  Compare  Stuart’s 
Heb.  Gram.  §§  470 — 472,  Conant’s  Gesenius  §  121.  The  pleonastic  use  of 
suffixes,  where  the  noun  to  which  they  relate  immediately  follows,  is  more 
frequent  here  than  in  Hebrew.  Thus  ttbx  iJii-nS  servants  of  God ,  Ez. 
5 :  11,  biOUa  in  Daniel .  Dan.  5:12. 

Note.  Even  the  separate  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
manner. 

3.  Anomalies  likewise  are  the  same  as  in  Hebrew  ;  e.  g.  masc.  for 

fem.  Ruth  1:8,9,  T’3533>,  (referring  to  the  daughters-in-law  of  Naomi;) 
suff.  of  pi.  nouns  appended  to  sing,  nouns,  as  in  Num.  24:  7,  his 

kingdom ,  the  latter  probably  a  result  of  the  full  orthography,  n  being  only 
a  mater  lectionis. 

t 


l 


64 


48 - 50.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ; 


TENSES. 


§  48.  Relative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  ^  ,  (as  a  prefix  'n.)  corresponds  to  the  Hebrew 

F12X:  ;  e.  g.  with  noun  suff.  forming  a  Gen.,  Satan  xb  ,  whose  lan¬ 

guage  thou  shalt  not  understand ;  with  the  adverb  of  place,  ]an  .  ...  ‘i , 
sometimes  iani  =  Hebrew  Dta  .  .  .  .  “HEX,  where. 

2.  The  interrogative  appears  as  a  Genitive ,  where  a  noun  immediately 
precedes  it  in  the  construct  state;  e.  g.  Fix  “(a  r2  whose  daughter  art 
thou  ?  Gen.  24  :  23. 

3.  In  respect  to  the  compound  possessive  pronouns  ■’bn‘n  my ,  Fib"1^  his, 
&c.  see  §  8.  3.  note  3. 

§49.  Mode  of  designating  pronouns  for  ivhich  specific  forms  do 

not  occur  in  Chaldee. 

1.  Reflexive  and  reciprocal.  These  senses  are  indicated, 

a.  Simply  by  passive  verbs  ; 

b.  By  the  personal  pronouns;  e.  g.  Judg.  20:40.  The  Benjamites 
looked  ‘jirrnrs  behind  them  [i.  e.  behind  themselves,  the  English  usage 
being  analogous]. 

c.  By  tasa ,  2b  or  FiFa  ;  e.  g.  ‘’1T23  myself,  “3b>2  upon  thyself  Ex.  9:14; 
Xin2a2  Gen.  18  :  12,  Sarah  laughed  within  herself.  So  ST1}  a  “’a  himself 
Ruth.  3  :  8. 

2.  Indefinite.  Some  one  ttJSX,  something  cans ,  xaana  (  =  Hebrew 
^2F)  and  os'na  .  So  no  one  12J3X  xb ,  nn  xb ,  nothing  aarna  xb ,  also  ^pa  xb 
Job.  6  :  6. 

3.  Demonstrative.  Sometimes  by  X^Fi  ,  X^Ft  ,  or  with  the  Hebrew  arti¬ 
cle  X^iFin ,  x^nn  . — A  peculiar  mode  of  designating  the  same  idea  is  to  at¬ 
tach  a  suffix  to  the  preceding  word ;  e.  g.  X3at  Fi2  Dan.  3:8 ,  at  that  time , 
(lit.  in  it,  the  time),  comp.  X^at  X^Ft  “>2  Sol.  S.  1  :  13. 

Other  forms  might  be  mentioned,  but  they  will  occasion  no  difficulty 
which  the  analogy  of  the  Hebrew  will  not  readily  solve. 


CHAPTER  II. 

SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 

§  50.  Use  of  the  Tenses. 

1.  The  same  variety  of  signification  exists  here  as  in 
Hebrew.  Thus  the  Praeter  sometimes,  (especially  in 
verbs  of  existence  or  condition,)  corresponds  to  our  Pres- 


51.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS. 


65 


ent,  sometimes  to  our  Pluperfect;  and  tire  Future  to  the 
Optative,  Subjunctive,  or  Imperative  mood.  It  some- 
tunes  expresses  even  past  time.  See  Dan.  4:9,  33. 

2.  When  the  Future  is  used  in  an  Optative,  Impera¬ 
tive,  or  Subjunctive  sense,  it  not  unfrequently  takes  the 
prefix  b  that,  ut ,  and  the  preformative  ^  falls  out ;  e.  g. 
IJinb  pb  thy  presents  he  to  thyself ,  Dan.  5:17.  *nnb 

rft'ta ,  with  the  beasts  of  the  field  shall  he  thy  dwelling , 
Dan.  5:22.  Though  in  the  latter  case  Gesenius  (Lehrgeb., 
p.  787,)  considers  tfinb  as  Inf.  instead  of  tflijab,  and  com¬ 
pares  the  frequent  use  of  the  Infinitive  for  finite  tenses  in 
Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  543. 

To  this  use  of  b  with  the  Fut.,  corresponds  entirely  the  Arabic  J 

" ) 

Rosenmuller’s  Inst,  ad  fundam.  Ling.  Arab.  p.  331.  Compare  also  the 
French  que. 

Prof.  Winer  in  his  2d  ed.  abandons  this  explanation,  on  the  ground  that 
this  use  of  b  is  found  nowhere  else  in  Chaldee,  and  prefers,  with  Beer,  to 
consider  the  b  as  an  unusual  preformative  of  the  Future  tense,  (not  unfre¬ 
quent  in  the  Talmud)  instead  of*1.  He  quotes  two  passages  from  the 
Targums  to  which  he  considers  this  explanation  suited;  viz.  Ex.  10:28, 
Jer.  T.  7\2"0 b  SE123  “Hlib  xb^  ME^b  *15S£ ,  ( Pharaoh )  desires  to  die .  and  not 
to  be  listening  to  your  words ;  and  Ex.  22  :  24,  Jon.  •ynb'-i  “'lbs>  ■jsiinsn  xb 
F'lhG  *'ib 2,  ye  shall  not  impose  upon  him  that  there  should  be  witnesses 
against  him.  But  the  old  explanation  seems  to  me  preferable.  Is  not  this 
very  idiom  the  basis  of  the  Talmudical  use  of  b  as  a  preformative  of  the 
Future  ? 


§  51.  Peculiar  mode  of  designating  certain  finite  tenses. 

1.  A  Pluperfect  is  formed,  in  tlie  later  Targums,  by 
prefixing  sort  to  the  Praeter ;  e.  g.  ann  he  had  gone 
out.  The  Arabic  has  a  similar  usage. 

2.  A  kind  of  Paulo-post-future,  to  he  about  to  do  any 
thing ,  is  expressed  by  prefixing  “pny  [ready]  to  the  Inf. 
with  b ;  e.  g.  snsnxb  y  Tny  ?  Jehovah  is  about  to  punish , 
i.  e.  will  speedily  punish ;  by  tfjin ;  e.  g.  byrib  see®  nirn 
Gen.  15  :  12,  the  sun  was  just  about  setting.  In  the  lat¬ 
ter  construction,  the  sense  of  tke  Inf.  active  sometimes 

5 


66 


52,  53.  USE  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


becomes  passive  ;  e.  g.  Dent.  31  : 17,  b^ttb  prrq  they  shah 
speedily  be  destroyed. 

§  52.  Use  of  the  Imperative  arid  Infinitive. 

1.  Of  two  Imperatives  connected  by  1 ,  tbe  second 
must  often  be  rendered  by  the  Future,  being  a  promise, 
of  which  the  first  was  the  condition.  So  in  English  we 
say  Do  and  live ,  i.  e.  If  ye  will  do,  ye  shall  live. 

2.  The  use  of  the  Inf.  governed  by  verbs  indicating 
desire,  purpose,  &c.  and  sometimes  by  nouns,  with  (or 
without)  b ,  is  more  frequent  than  in  Hebrew ;  e.  g.  Ex. 
2  : 15,  bqppb  xyz  he  sought  to  hill;  Gen.  29  :  7,  itottb  pya  ab 
it  is  not  time  to  collect,  b  is  sometimes  omitted,  espe¬ 
cially  when  the  Infinitive  is  governed  by  a  noun ;  as  Josh. 
10:27,  bsp'a  pt?,  the  time  of  sunset. 

In  other  respects  these  moods  are  employed  as  in  Hebrew 

§  53.  Use  of  Participles. 

1.  Participles  joined  (a,")  To  the  substantive  verb ,  in¬ 
dicate  generally  the  Imperfect ;  as  rirn  Dan.  2  :  31, 
Thou  sawest  [or,  wast  looking  /]  also  with  the  Future, 
pinn  “f&np  ab  Ruth  1:20,  Ye  shall  not  call  [ be  in  the  habit 
of  calling ]  me  Naomi.  The  same  indefiniteness  seems  to 
be  given  to  the  sense,  as  in  the  corresjjonding  construc¬ 
tion  in  English.  This  usage  is  more  frequent  in  Chaldee 
than  in  Hebrew.  ( b )  Joined  to  the  personal  pronouns  and 
iTtf,  they  designate  generally  the  Present  tense;  some¬ 
times  others ;  e.  g.  b^nn  Gen.  32:11,  I  was  afraid, , 
p*ns  prys  Judg.  6:36,  if  thou  wilt  save. 

Note.  Sometimes  the  subst.  verb  is  omitted  in  this  construction ;  e.  g. 
Job  1:13.  "pbsx  •'■foa  his  sons  (were)  eating  and  drinking. 

2.  Participles  govern  nouns  ;  either,  ( a )  In  the  Geni 
tive,  the  participle  being  in  the  construct  state ;  as  “’bpaj 

1  K.  2  :  7,  those  who  eat  at  thy  table ;  or,  (b)  In  the 


54 - 56.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  J  OPTATIVE,  ETC. 


67 


case  governed  by  tbe  verb  from  which  they  are  derived  ; 
as  prpsna  Ex.  25:20,  stretching  out  their  wings . 

§  54.  Optative  mood . 

This  is  indicated  in  Chaldee,  either, 

a.  By  the  simple  future  (compare  §  50 ;)  or, 

b.  By  questions  expressing  desire;  e.  g.  Judg.  9:29,  fctES  77  t"iO?2i  "ft 

who  will  deliver  this  people  to  me  ?  i.  e.  would  that  this  people  were  under 
my  control.  Especially  is  the  formula  ‘]n“l  *]73  (comp.  Heb.  ‘jt-p  ■'E)  em¬ 
ployed  in  this  optative  sense  ;  e.  g.  Deut.  2S  :  67,  1PP  “je  ,  Oh  that  it 

were  evening ,  lit.  who  will  give  evening  ? 

c.  By  "'lb  with  the  Future,  when  the  wish  respects  future  time  ;  as 

7^*1^  vb .  may  he  stand  before  thee!  Gen.  17  :  18. — With  the  Prae- 

ter  when  the  wish  regards  time  past;  e.  g.  Num.  20  :  3,  *7b ,  Ok 

that  we  had  died  ! 

§  55.  Agreement  of  the  verb  with  its  subject. 

1.  The  general  principles,  as  well  as  most  anomalies, 
are  the  same  here  as  in  Hebrew.  See  Stuart’s  Heb. 
Gram.  §  479,  seq.  Conant’s  Gesenius,  §§  146-148. 

2.  AVhen  a  verb  has  several  predicates  it  is  generally 
put  in  the  plural.  Sometimes  however,  especially  when 
the  verb  precedes  the  predicates,  it  is  singular ;  so  Gen. 
8  : 16.  Num.  20  :  11. 

§  56.  Impersonal  verbs  and  verbs  with  indefinite  Nominatives. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  are,  as  in  Hebrew,  simply  the 
third  person  singular  of  personal  verbs  without  any 
Nominative.  They  also  take  a  Dative ;  e.  g.  1  Sam.  30:6, 

nP? ,  David  was  distressed. 

2.  To  express  the  idea  of  a  verb  with  an  indefinite 
Nominative ; 

( a )  Tbe  3d  person  singular  is  sometimes  employed 
exactly  as  in  impersonal  verbs  ;  e.  g.  &lpi“6  said  (some 
one)  to  Joseph  / 

( b )  The  3d  pers.  plur, ;  which  frequently  must  be 


68 


57 - 59.  SYNTAX  OF  VERBS  ;  REGIMEN,  ETC. 


rendered  by  the  passive  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  4:13,  [English  Ver¬ 
sion  4:16,]  ttnnb  let  his  heart  be  changed ,  lit.  let  them 
change  his  heart . 

(6)  The  2d  per.  sing,  sometimes  expresses  the  same 
idea,  Is.  41:12. 

(d)  Also  the  plur.  Part. ;  as  ■p'TQfc*  Dan.  3  :  4,  it  is 

spoken. 

§  57.  Regimen  of  Verbs. 

The  use  of  the  simple  Accusative  or  Dative,  of  two 
accusatives,  and  of  verbs  with  prepositions,  may  be 
learned  from  the  Hebrew  analogy.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb. 
Gr.  §§  508 — 513.  Conant’s  Gesenius,  §§  138 — 140. 

§  58.  Verbs  Used  for  Adverbs. 

In  Chaldee,  as  in  Hebrew,  two  verbs  are  often  so 
connected  that  one  of  them  may  be  best  translated  by 
an  adverb.  The  verbs  most  commonly  so  employed  are 
Spoil*  to  add ,  for  again ,  more /  to  make  good,  for 

well  /  nnp  to  precede,  for  before ;  to  return,  for  again  • 
Tiis  to  hasten,  for  quickly ;  e.  g.  STS  rn  noni  nn ,  Isaac 
digged  again  (lit.  returned  and  digged)  the  wells,  Gen. 
26:18. 

So  in  English  we  say,  make  haste  and  come ,  for  come  quickly . 

§  59.  Constructio  praegnans  and  jEUipsis. 

1.  Constructio  praegnans.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr. 
§  566.  Conant’s  Gesenius,  8  141.  fcW'inias  anb  ^  mb  13th , 
and  Jehovah  changed  (his  heart  and  gave)  to  him  another 
heart.  I  Sam.  10:9. 

2.  Ellipsis  is  not  frequent,  except  of  the  substantive 
verb.  Ps.  120  :  7,  anpjpb  pan  obuj  apa ?  I  (desire)  peace% 
tJiey  (are)  for  war. 


69 


SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS;  CASES. 


CHAPTER  III. 
SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS. 

i 

\ 


§  60.  Designation  of  Cases. 

1.  The  Genitive  is  indicated, 

(a)  As  in  Hebrew,  by  the  const,  state  of  the  preceding 
noun ;  e.  g.  ‘’btt  the  words  of  the  king. 

(b)  By  the  prefix  'n  (or  ^ ,)  in  which  case  the  preced¬ 

ing  word  is  ordinarily  in  the  emphatic  state ;  e.  g. 
tfsn&n  the  king  of  the  earth ,  the  king's  cap¬ 

tain,  Dan.  2:15. 

(c)  In  designations  of  time,  by  b ;  e.  g.  arrcb  Gen. 
8:5,  the  day  of  the  month ;  2  Kings  12  :  1,  30®  ni«a 
8TPb  in  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu . 

Note  1.  The  case  b.  may  be  compared  with  the  Hebrew  b  TtiiS. ,  and 
^  be  regarded  as  a  real  relative;  thus  Nsbtt  *'‘1  Nwbbd  might  be  rendered 
the  captain  who  (belonged  to)  the  king.  N5bE  might  be  regarded  as  a  Da¬ 
tive  (b  being  omitted  by  ellipsis),  or  as  a  Genitive  governed  by  ^  in  the 
construct  state. 

Note  2.  In  the  later  Targums  the  characteristic  prefix  of  the  Genitive 
is  sometimes  omitted ;  e.  g.  Esth.  1  :  9,  itndtt  banquet  of  the  womens 

In  some  instances,  on  the  other  hand,  the  characteristic  of  the  Genitive 
case  C?)  is  inserted  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  state. 

Note  3.  The  form  of  the  construct,  especially  of  the  const,  pi..  some¬ 
times  appears  in  the  Targums  instead  of  the  absolute ;  e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  10,  the 
collections  of  water  X'lfc  ,  he  called  seas. 

2.  As  in  Hebrew,  b  prefixed  forms  the  Dative. 

8.  The  Accusative  takes  either  b ,  (like  the  Syriac, — 
and  this  is  almost  universal  in  the  Targum  on  Proverbs;) 
or  FP  (i.  q.  Heb.  fix ;)  or  it  has  the  simple  form  of  the 
Nominative. 

4.  The  Vocative  is  generally  expressed  by  the  form 
of  the  emphatic  state. 


70 


61,  62.  SYNTAX  OF  NOUNS  ;  USE  OF  CASES,  ETC. 


§  61.  Peculiar  use  of  the  cases. 

1.  The  Genitive  is  often  employed  instead  of  an  adjective  qualifying, 

the  preceding  noun;  e.  g.  Dan.  3:  5,  an  image  of  gold ,  i.  e.  a 

golden  image. 

Note  1.  Sometimes  the  first  noun  qualifies  the  second;  e.  g.  T?  pipns 
with  a  strong  hand — lit.  with  strength  of  hand. 

Note  2.  The  Hebrew  student  will  not  be  disappointed  to  meet  in  Chal¬ 
dee  with  phrases  like  N’pbn  ■na  Gen.  37  :  19,  lit.  master  of  dreams ,  i.  e. 
interpreter  of  dreams;  stntzj  “>3  son  of  a  year ,  i.  e.  a  year  old. 

2.  The  Accusative  of  place  answers  the  question,  where ?  and  must 
consequently  be  translated  by  at  or  in.  The  simple  Accusative  is  also 
sometimes  employed,  by  synecdoche  where  we  must  render,  in  respect  of; 
e.  g.  ^TH  sipijaG  ruddy  in  respect  to  complexion ,  or  of  a  ruddy  complexion , 
Lam.  4  :  7. 

This  construction  is  legs  frequent  in  Chaldee  than  in  Hebrew.  Instead 
of  it  the  Targums  sometimes  employ  2. 

3.  The  case  absolute,  either  the  Nom.  (which  is  most  frequent),  the 
Acc.,  or  even  sometimes  the  Dat.  (with  b  signifying  quoad^j  is  employed  as 
in  Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr.  §§  415 — 417. 

§  62.  TJse  of  the  plural  and  repetition  qf  nouns. 

1.  The  plural  is  sometimes  employed  where  only  one  of  the  things  des- 
ignated  is  meant.  Judg.  12  :  7,  Jephthah  was  buried,  "iinpa ,  in  one 
of  the  cities  of  Gilead ;  Gen.  8  :  4,  The  ark  rested  on  one  of  the  moun¬ 
tains ■,  etc. 

2.  “ppp  and  ‘psisip  are  employed  as  plurals  of  excellence  or  respect. 
On  the  other  hand  ‘pnb $  has  always  a  plural  sense.  In  the  biblical  Chal¬ 
dee  only,  occurs  •pi'Pbfi* ,  the  Most  High ,  as  a  name  of  God,  Dan.  7  :  15. 

3.  The  double  members,  etc.,  which  in  Hebrew  require  the  dual,  are 
designated  in  Chaldee  by  the  plural.  When  the  dual  in  Hebrew  is  em¬ 
ployed  to  designate  definitely  two  persons  or  things,  it  is  rendered  in 
Chaldee  by  the  plural  with  “p'npi . 

4.  The  immediate  repetition  of  a  noun  indicates, 

a.  Multitude.  Gen.  14  :  10,  “PT?  many  wells. 

b.  Partition  or  separation,  expressed  by  each ,  etc. ;  as  Gen.  32  :  16, 

each  particular  herd  ;  Esth.  3  :  4,  every  day. 

- —  §  63.  Construction  of  Adjectives. 

1.  Exceptions  from  the  general  principle  u  that  adjectives  agree  with 
the  substantives  which  they  qualify  in  gender  and  number”  are  the  same 
as  in  Hebrew.  Comp.  Stuart’s  Heb.  Gr.  §  449. 

2.  When  an  adjective  is  the  predicate  of  the  sentence,  it  stands  gen¬ 
erally  after  the  noun.  Rarely,  and  only  when  the  substantive  verb  is 
omitted,  it  precedes. 


64,  65.  SYNTAX  OF  ADJECTIVES,  ETC. 


71 


3.  Adjectives  used  as  simple  epithets ,  follow  their  nouns. 

4.  The  neuter  gender  is  usually  expressed  by  feminine  adjectives; 
Ps.  27  :  4,  “Tpra  xan  one  thing  have  I  desired. 

5.  An  adjective  is  put  in  the  construct  state  before  a  noun  expressing 
the  thing  in  respect  to  which  the  quality  is  affirmed;  e.  g.  Prov.  16:  19, 
mi  bad  of  a  humble  spirit ,  lit.  humble  of  spirit. 


§  64.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

1.  The  comparative  is  formed,  either 

(a)  By  XQ  simply,  as  in  Hebrew ;  or 

(b)  By  inserting  "W  or  TW  ( abundant ,  but  here  in 
the  sense  of  more )  before  ;  e.  g.  Ps.  119:103. 

IP  tpp  sweeter  than  honey ,  lit.  sweet  more  than  etc. 

2.  The  superlative  is  designated  as  in  Hebrew.  Thus 

b&p  Dan.  4 : 14,  the  basest  of  men  /  Lev. 

24:9,  the  highest  heaven  /  etc. 

§  65.  Numerals. 

1.  Numerals  from  1  to  10  are  placed  either  before  or  after  nouns.  Gen. 
8  : 10.  pap  xaad .  Dan.  3  :  25,  xsaax  paaa . 

2.  From  11  to  100  the  numerals  precede  the  substantive  in  the  ploral. 
Jud.  11:33,  p'jap  pads  .  But  the  tens  sometimes  follow  their  substan¬ 
tives.  Gen.  32 :  14. 

Note  1.  In  a  few  instances  the  substantive  appears  in  the  construct 
state  before  its  numeral.  1  K.  8  :  63,  Xian  pndap  pfinn  *nin  220,000  oxen. 
Comp.  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

Note  2.  When  rn  precedes  the  numeral,  the  noun  is  in  the  emph.  st. ; 
e.  g.  Gen.  1  :  16,  X*nirn  pain  rp  the  two  great  lights. 

Note  3.  In  designations  of  weights  and  measures  the  noun  expressing 
the  weight,  etc.  is  often,  though  not  so  frequently  as  in  Hebrew,  omitted. 
Thus  Gen.  37  :  28,  C)&a  pniasa  for  20  (shekels)  of  silver.  So  in  designa¬ 
tions  of  time,  XEV>  is  still  more  frequently  omitted.  Comp.  Gen.  8  :  13, 
Lev.  23  :  32. 

3.  Instead  of  the  ordinals  from  1  to  10  the  cardinals  are  not  unfrequently 
employed.  Gen.  8  :  13,  XJVpb  ana  ,  on  the  first  of  the  month.  2  K.  12  :  1, 
Mrnb  rad  roda  in  the  seventh  year  of  Jehu — lit.  in  the  year  VII.  of 
Jehu. 

4.  Distributives  are  expressed  by  a  simple  repetition  of  the  cardinals 
without  V,  as  xsad  xrad  by  sevens,  pan  pan  two  and  two,  by  pairs. 
Gen.  7  :  2,  9. 


72 


66,  67.  SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES  J  ADVERBS,  ETC. 


5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  of  two  kinds. 

a.  Those  of  degree  or  intensity.  These  are  expressed  in  Chaldee  by 

prefixing  "in  to  the  cardinals  ;  e.  g.  Dan.  3  : 19,  fcC’Otlj  ,  seven  fold. 

b.  Those  of  repetition.  These  are  expressed,  precisely  as  in  English, 

by  times ,  *Jn3at ;  as  Josh.  6  :  3,  one  time ,  once.  Ex.  34  :  23,  *p3at 

nbn  three  times ,  etc. 

t  ;  ' 


CHAPTER  IV. 

SYNTAX  OF  PARTICLES. 


§  66.  Adverbs  generally. 

1.  The  repetition  of  an  adverb  expresses 

a.  Intensity.  Deut.  28  :  43.  very  low ; 

b.  Repetition  or  continuation.  Ex.  23  :  30,  “PS  I  “PSt  by  little  and  little . 

2.  Adverbs  sometimes  qualify  nouns  by  being  placed  before  them  as 
nouns  in  the  construct  state.  Gen.  18  :  4,  “PSt  a  little  water. 

3.  Adverbs  sometimes  take  prepositions  before  them;  e.  g.  TXO  instead 
of  TX  simply.  Comp.  Gesenius5  Lehrgeb.  p.  82§. 

Note.  In  the  last  three  cases,  1.  6,  2  and  3,  these  adverbs  maybe  re¬ 
garded  as  real  nouns.  Thus  “PSt  a  small  quantity  of  water,  7X3  at 
that  time.  And  so  of  many  other  cases. 

4.  Many  adverbs  are  expressed  by  periphrasis  of  verbs.  See  §  58. 

§  67.  Negatives. 

1.  The  same  distinction  exists  between  xb  and  ITPb ,  as  in  Hebrew  be¬ 
tween  xb  and  l*1^  ;  the  latter ,  in  both  languages,  implying  the  substantive 
verb. 

2.  bb.  .  .  xb  none ,  nobody ,  nothing.  So  in  Hebrew.  Compare  Gesenius’ 
Heb.  Lex.  word  X'b  . 

3.  In  oaths  or  strong  declarations,  ‘JX  or  EX  ,  \f)  takes  the  place  of  a  di¬ 
rect  negative.  Thus  Is.  62  :  8.  ‘P1X  OX  I  will  not  give ,  lit.  if  I  will  give. 
So  xb  ox  affirmatively ,  Josh.  14  :  9. 

4.  “  That — not  ”  is  sometimes  expressed  by  b^  before  the  Inf.  e.  g.  Lev. 
26  :  19.  I  will  make  the  heavens  strong  as  iron  above  you  XPD?a  xnnxba, 
that  they  may  not  send  down  rain ,  (lit.  from  that  they  should ,  etc.)  For  the 
signification  of  b  alone  prefixed  to  the  Infinitive,  see  §  50.  2. 


73 


/ 


/ 

68.  INTERROGATIVE  PARTICLES. 


§  68.  Interrogative  Particles. 

1.  The  direct  question  is  indicated  by  ,  or  has  no  peculiar  designa¬ 
tion. 

2.  The  double  interrogation  is  generally  expressed  by  ox  ....  ft ;  e.  g. 
Num.  13 :  20,  Xttj-’O  ox  xoooft  ,  whether  good  or  had.  1  K.  22  :  15,  .  .  .  .  b*\I3ft 
Sjiana  ox,  shall  we  go  up  to  Ramoth  Gilead  to  battle,  or  shall  we  for¬ 
bear  ? 

3.  The  question  with  xbft  ,  being  employed  simply  to  excite  attention, 

is  frequently  better  rendered  by  behold  !  Comp.  X’Vi  under  the  word  x'bin 
Gesenius’  Heb.  Lex.  Thus  Deut.  11  :  30,  Xpn^  x8nsa  psx  xbft  behold 
they  are  on  the  other  side  Jordan ,  lit.  are  they  not ,  etc.  So  also  the  fre¬ 
quent  expression,  ‘pax  xbft.  behold  they  are  written. 


PARADIGMS. 


Paradigms  of  verbs,  nouns,  and  numeral  adjectives  are  here  subjoined, 
accompanied  by  references  to  the  corresponding  sections  in  the  Grammar 


74  Par. 

I.  Regular  Verbs.  §§  11 — 13. 

Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael 

• 

Praet.  3  m. 

^P 

ba  or  bapns 

bap 

3  f. 

rtop 

nbapns 

nbap 

2  m. 

sn  or  nbap 

nbapns  sn  or  nbap 

?•••!•  •  •  t  •  •  •• »— 

2  f. 

nbap 

nb^pna 
•  •••!•  •  • 

nbap 

1  c. 

nbap 

nbap ns 

nbap 

Pl.  3  m. 

nbap 

nbapns 

nbap 

3  f. 

sbap 

sbapns 

Nbap 

2  m. 

■jnnbop 

■jnnbapns 

nnnbap 
•  ••  1— 

2  f. 

l^bpp  • 

IPibapns 

1  c. 

x:bap 

t  :  — 

s;baans 

t  :  :  • 

s-bap 

Inf. 

'PPP 

abftpna 

r  tI;  :  • 

sbap 

r  t 

Imp.  2  m. 

bap 

bapns 

^p 

2  f . 

-bapns 
•  •* » :  :  • 

■Pp>p 

PI.  2  m. 

*ap 

nbapns 

nbap 

2  f. 

s;bap 

t  :  v : 

s:bapns 

T  *  ••  1  •  •  • 

•  •  •  • 

s:bap 

Fnt.  3  in. 

bap- 

V:  • 

bap  i" 

mm*i  :  • 

bap- 

3  f. 

bapn 

bapnn 

bapn 

2  m. 

bapn 

bapnn 

bapn 

2  f. 

l^pn 

■j-bapnn 

■pbapn 

1  c. 

baps 

bapns 

baps 

PI.  3  m. 

1*pp: 

■j'fcppp: 

-nbap- 

3  f. 

■ftoprv 

*  t  :  I—  :  * 

nbap-1 

It  :  I— : 

2  m. 

■jnbapn 

■jnbapnn 

-(nbapn 

2  f. 

ibapn 

i^P™ 

*'-P~ 

1  c. 

^p? 

bapn; 

bap? 

1  Part.  m. 

^Pp 

bapa 

£ 

sbap 

t  :  MT 

sbapa 

2  Part.  m. 

p‘pp 

bapna 

bap  a 

£ 

sb-ap 

t  •  *; 

sbapna 

T  ;  1—  ;  . 

sbapa 

75 


Par.  I.  Regular  Verbs.  §§  11 — 13. 


Ithpaal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

btipna 

baps 

bapps 

rbtapps 

nbcps 

nbppr^ 

pbepns 

SF  or  pbapS 

rtep™ 

Fibers; 

PbapS 

pbapps 

nbtapna 

fibtm 
••  ;  — 

nbapps 

iibtbpna 

•.bits 

ttpFS 

sbapps 

r  —  :  • 

ships 

t  ••  f ;  — 

SbipFS 

t  — —  • 

■ppbapps 

■jlFbops 

■ppbapps 

■jFbapns 

■pbaps 

■(pbapFs 

t  :  —  i—  :  • 

s:bips 

s:bipps 

sbupns 

abapx 

r  t  * :  — 

sbapps 
T  T  1  ;  —  • 

bapns 

baps 

bapps 

-biprs 

•  —  f—  ;  • 

hbips* 

•  •  > ;  — • 

“bapFS 

'  ^ibtbpntf  ' 

*rbt?ptf 

SbipFS 

sibiprs 

s;baps 

r  :  ••  i :  — 

NDb&pm 

t  ;  —  *:  —  • 

btsprr 

bapp  . 

btpprr 

baprp 

bapF 

boppp 

btoppp 

bapF 

bappp 

■j'brapnn 

1'bapF 

■pbappp 

bapns 

(bapnx)  btSpfcS 

bapps 

—  v 

■pbQprr 

l*ap: 

■pbappr 

twr. 

IrTO 

■jJibapnp 

■j^bapF 

■pbappp 

■jbappp 

baprp 

bapra 

i®l?a 

sbapa 

bapra 

*^P"“  Sy^C..  ' 

bappa 

abtsprva 

t  ;  • 

sbapa 

sbapp-j 

t  :  -  • 

76  Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16. 

Suffixes. 

Sing.  1  com.  2  masc. 

2  fem. 

3  masc. 

3  fbio 

nbap 
nr, bap 

not  take 

.TFibap 
nnbap 
m bap 

t  : 

pij^nbap 

K“bap 

tt  :  —  f; 

Pe.  Pr.  3  m. 

3  f. 

2  m. 

2  f. 

1  c. 

PL  3  m. 

1  2  iu. 

1  c. 

typ. 

arbap  tjnbap  tjnbap 

afibap  &c.  Same  as  3  £  excej 

nbap 

nnbap 

>t  that  it  dots 
Trnbop 
nnbap 
Vfibap 

“33Flbdp 

••  :  — •: 

'“bap 

»T  •  mmf  • 

•  •  r  • 

4  <'1*  if 

tptbap 

M  T?-i? 

'ttbap  spbap 

-J 

•—  •  :  — 

b7,*iV'7Ain 

^S> 

I? 

Inf,. 

Inf,  with  ) 

3  epenth.  j 

*3—  'bapa  tjbapa 
asbapa  Tjsbapa 

T-  tPTi’P 

'ni  mbap  a 
rabapa 

“bapa 

robapa 

Fuf.  3  m. 

8  m.  with  ) 

3  epenth.  f 

PI.  3  m. 

T^i?r 

•  ••  •  ]••  •  • 

^  ‘rptep^ 

•  ••  j ••  j  j  j  * 

ribap' 

•«  •  1  •  • 

*  '  • 

F»2bt2ph 

••  •  •  i  •  • 

•  r  • 

ro^ibap' 

•  •  •  1  •  • 

•  • 

•::bap-  Tabap’1 
“’pinbtppp  t{|iibtapp 

piibap^ 

“3Jibap- 

r  :  > :  • 

Imp.  2  m. 

'5—  a-  'bap  - 

“bap  sr 

i-  fibfcp 

t  :  t  v: 

2  m.  with  ) 

3  epenth.  j 

asbap - 

fisbpp 

rebap 

2  f. 

a'bap - 

.  .  ..1; 

rrbap 

xrrbap 

PL  2  m. 

33  a>lbap  - 

Vfibap 

srrtbap 

t  v: 

2  f. 

"I33bt3p - 

•t  :  v : 

'“bap 

•t  :  v : 

arabap 

Pa.  Praet. 

^be  h'vp 

fibap 

ttbap 

Inf. 

■'Mbap  sjMbap 

^Mbap 

fiwbap 

»•  J 

rip-bap 

) 


Par.  II.  Regular  Verbs  with  suffixes.  §  16.  77 


Plur.  1  com. 

2  masc. 

2  fem. 

3  masc. 

3  fem. 

Mbttp 

■pbbap 

l^Pp 

l^PP 

SOPlbtip 

t  t  :  — 

■pbr&tap 

■psribap 

isnbtsp 

suffixes  of  the  second  person. 

WFibap  •  — ; -  - 

t  •  :  — 

pTibap 

FP*PP 

lisnb^p 

p~'r-P 

l^iSPibtpjp 

■pnbup 

It  •  :  —>: 

■jj  swbpp 

ftonbtsg 

l^bpp 

T3*i?E 

xjinbap 

r  t  t  :  —  1; 

T=*<3? 

l^inbtop 

l^pbEp 

PrPP 

SDbtspa 

t  t  :  f :  * 

•|iPb^p7j 

■jpbppT? 

linbupa 

in^pa 

sosbop-j 

t  t  •  ;  t :  • 

Tbsbqpa 

1  •  •  '  * 

pDbtipy 

xjsbtjp1 

liMbtjp1' 

i=?^p: 

l^btppr 

"b::p" 

It  •  :  > :  • 

S35lbt3p-' 

r  t  :  > :  • 

■pD^bppi 

Ipp^ibapi 

'  iis^bppi 

■?*pp' 

CSJv  UJ> 

p’ppp 

i?^p 

srbtsp 

l^irbap 

ir^p 

ambap 

■jwbap 

Mjbup 

■p^p 

■psbap 

Itt  :  v  2 

swbiap 

liPbc?g 

■$PP 

l^bbtpp 

T$«P 

aDrfibtDp 

t  t  r»- 

prfibap 

T5«?*?P 

linrvfeyp 

irirobisg 

78  Par.  III.  Verbs  Pe  Nun.  8  18. 


Peal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Praet. 

3  m. 

P|? 

pea 

pana 

3  f. 

rpana 

2  m. 

an  or  npss 

t  :  b 

npena 

2  f. 

~P?? 

npaa 

npena 

1  c. 

*T?s? 

npaa 

rpana 

PL 

3  m. 

^pl? 

pea 

pana 

3  f. 

aps: 

't  — : 

apena 

2  m. 

finpS? 

<  ■pnpea 

•pnpena 

2  f. 

"P?? 

•npaa 

■npena 

1  c. 

ape: 

a:pena 

Inf. 

pan 

apaa 

apana 

lr  t  —  • 

Imp. 

2  m. 

ps,  ps 

paa 

pana 

2  f . 

paa 

pi. 

2  m. 

pa 

pea 

pana 

2  f. 

a:pa 

t  1 :  \ 

a;paa 

apena 

Put. 

3  m. 

pi:,  pp: 

pap 

PIP? 

3  f. 

pan 

pen 

pann 

2  m. 

pan 

pen 

pann 

2  f. 

Vpsri 

TP*® 

Tpsnn 

1  c. 

ps« 

paa 

pana 

pi. 

3  m. 

l^ps: 

■jpsr 

l^PPP? 

3  f. 

VX 

}PX 

IPP^r 

2  m. 

■ppan 

Ipen 

■parn 

2  f. 

IP  an 

Ipsn 

pern 

1  c. 

PP? 

pap 

pep? 

1  Part.  m. 

pSD 

1  •*T 

paa 

f. 

ape: 

ape  a 

2  Part.  m. 

P'S? 

f. 

ap's? 

'  t  ;  — 

apena 

>t  ;  —  • 

Par.  IV.  Verbs  Ayin  doubled.  §  19. 


Peal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Praet.  3  m. 

PP 

P® 

ppp.x 

3  f. 

n]3i 

nppx 

nppnx 

2  m. 

pi  rp^ 

ripens 

2  f. 

rp>5 

nppx 
•  '  .  ** 

nppm 

1  c. 

np^ 

np'ns 

npprx 

PI.  3  m. 

pi 

3p|x 

>ip|nx 

3  f. 

JT  ••  — 

xp^nx 

2  ro. 

■pmp5 

■jwp'ns 

Top®*? 

2  f. 

■jnp5 

■jFiPpX 

■jnp^nx 

1  c. 

x3p|x 

xdp^fix 

Inf. 

P® 

XplX 

»T  T  — 

xpprn 

Imp.  2  m. 

pP 

pps 

pprx 

2  f. 

T5® 

■pirn 

PL  2  m. 

*lp|» 

Tipfnx 

2  f . 

xjptf 

x:p^x 

t  • :  — 

X3p?IFX 

Fut.  3  m. 

p't 

pp: 

p®: 

3  f. 

P® 

ppn 

P~nri 
*  • 

2  m. 

p® 

PPP! 

p“nn 

2  f. 

TP® 

TP® 

■pp^nri 

1  c. 

P® 

P® 

pppx 

PI.  3  m. 

TP?: 

TPPP 

Tppir 

3  f. 

IP  T 

IP?: 

ip®: 

2  m. 

TPPH 

TPpn 

Tpprm 

2  f. 

IP® 

IPP? 

■pprnn 

1  c. 

P'T 

P!= 

ppP3 

1  Part.  m. 

PP? 

ppa 

f. 

xpp^i 

>t  > :  it 

•t  :  — 

2  Part.  m. 

p'pp 

prq 

P5P7J 

f. 

«BT?7 

xpTO 

*t  :  — 

Xp^ITO 

lT  .  —  • 

Par.  V.  79 
Verbs  is.  §  20. 

Peal.  Pr. 

&c.  r eg. 

Inf.  “brs 
Imp.  “b 
(soli  nn) 
Fut.  "b^ 

1  Part. 

•*T 

2  Part,  Tb* 

• : 

Itbpeel.  ibpntf 

Pael.  Pr.  *ib^ 
Fut.  ~b“ 

Itbpaal.  i’l'T)# 

Apbel.  Tbitf 
Fut.  Tb*1 


Par.  VI. 


Verbs 

§20. 

Peal.  Pr. 

nir 

Fut. 

Pael.  Pr. 

Fut. 

• 

Apb.  Pr. 

•  •• 

Inf.  xntrx 

T  T 

Fut. 

"1 

80 

Par.  VII.  Verbs  Ayin  Vav.  §  22. 

Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Ithpaal. 

Praet.  3  m. 

DP 

Dpns 

Dsp 
•  • 

D'pns 

3  f. 

m 

nagps 

nasg 

ra-pns 

2  m. 

n  nag 

nap  ns 

nasP 

nappns 

2  f. 

nap 

napns 

nasp 

nappns 

1  c. 

nap  or  nap 

•  •It  V 

napns 

*1PSP 

na-pns 

Pl.  3  m. 

lapns 

idyp 

ia?gns 

3  f. 

sap 

T 

sapns 

tIt  :  • 

sa?p 

sa»pns 

t  —i—  :  • 

2  m. 

■pnag 

■jinapns 

|1F1P?P 

■pnaipns 

2  f. 

■nap 

■napns 

■nasp 

■jnasgns 

1  c. 

siao 

t  :  — 

siagns 

t  : 

Inf. 

(Dipa)  Dga 

sapns 

T<T  2  ' 

sa»p 

sappns 

Imp.  2  m. 

Dip 

Dpns 

*  t  ;  • 

a-p 

a-prs 

2  f . 

"aip 

■agns 

■a»pns 

Pl.  2  m. 

laip 

lagns 

ia»p 

laspns 

2  f. 

ssaip 

srapns 

sia?g 

sia^pns 

Fnt.  3  m. 

Wp? 

Dpn^ 

D*g' 

U‘  pP,. 

3  £ 

Dipn 

Dgnn 

Dspn 

D'prn 

2  m. 

Dipn 
*  • 

Dpnn 

D"pn 

• 

Dppnn 

2  f. 

■paipn 

pagnn 

TO*? 

■j^gnn 

1  c. 

Dips 

Dpns 

•  't  :  v 

D'pS 

ojpm 

Pl.  3  m. 

■palp? 

■pai'p' 

■p^prr 

3  f. 

i^p: 

im: 

m: 

I’priP1?: 

2  m. 

■jiaipn 

■pagnn 

■pa^pn 

■pa^gnn 

2  £ 

]aipn 

TOT 

TOT 

?r;P"P 

1  c. 

D'p? 

opnp 

PiPp? 

1  Part.  m. 

°‘p , 

=."■•? 

f. 

tticrp 

t  :  »r 

2  Part.  m. 

D'p 

Dpna 

D?pa 

P5gW3 

f. 

sapna 

t  it  :  • 

sa*pa 

t  ;  i—  ; 

saspna 

r  :  1  :  • 

Par. 

VII.  Verbs  Ayin  Vay.  § 

22.  81 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

Polel. 

Ithpolal. 

a'pN 

a-pm 

daip 

aaipns 

(B) 

narpm 

naaip 

naaipm 

Fi  Pa'pN 

T  •  •  "*! 

Pa'pPN 

pafiip 

paaipnx 

Pa'pN 

pa'pPN 

naaip 

naaipnN 

(1?)  na^ 

na'pPN 

naaip 

n:a-aiipn6« 

Pa'pN 

ia'pPN 

Pa?dip 

iaaipns 

8T/2'm 

T  >• 

Na'jjm 

Naaip 

aE&ipritf 

■ppapN 

"JiPa'pPN 

■ppgaip 

]ipaaipnN 

•(PapN 

■jiw'pris 

■jpaaip 

■jpaaipna 

saa'pPN 

Npaaip 

Npaaipnx 

flapH 

r  »t  -: 

xaprx 

saaip 

NaaipnN 

B'pN 

d*ppx 

aaip 

aaipPN 

•  \  •  ;  • 

'aaip 

'aaipnN 

Pa'pN 

ild'pPa 

iaaip 

iaaiptpN 

SMpS 

iOa'DPN 

t  :  >•  :  • 

Niaaip 

waaipnN 

oi?r 

d'prp 

aaip' 

atfiprf* 

D‘PF 

d’ppp 

aaipp 

• 

mipnn 

d'pp 

>•  : 

d'ppp 

aaipp 

aaipnp 

■pBT?*? 

■j'arpPP 

■j'aiaipp 

■paaiprp 

d'pm 

aaips 

aaipnN 

T*naT?: 

pa'ppp 

■paaipr 

^laaiptr 

ft?: 

tvtm?: 

rff'pr 

Vra'pF 

■pa'ppp 

■paaipn 

p*aa'p~p 

TTO 

TO*? 

TO1? 

•jaaipnn 

QT» 

d'ppp 

aaipp 

aaipnp 

d'pp 

aaipa 

N<3'pa 

saaipa 

Op* 

d'ppa 

aaipa 

aaipna 

aapa 

r  <r  : 

Nd'pPa 

n  aaipa 

Naaipna 

t  ;  •  :  • 

6 


82  Par.  VIII.  Verbs  Lameclli  Alepli.  §  23. 


Peal. 

Ithpeel. 

Pael. 

Praet. 

3  m. 

sba 

•  ••  t  ; 

■bana 
•  •  • 

hbs 

3  f. 

nba 

rrbana 
—  •  •  • 

na'_  nsba 

2  m. 

n*  _*  p'b a 

T  •  —  T  • 

rrbana 

y  ••  •  •  • 

rrba 

2  f. 

rr_  rrba 

rrbana 

•  •  •  j  t 

n*ba 
•  — 

1  c. 

-rr-  rrba 

•  ••  ; 

mbr»na 

••  •  j  i 

T"-  n^ba 
•  ••  • . _ 

pi. 

3  m. 

iba 

rbana 
•  •  •  • 

W'—  vba 
•  «  . 

3  f. 

nsb'a 

t  t  : 

K"b^n^ 

y  •  •  •  • 

a>b'a 

T  •  — 

2  m. 

■^rrba 

’jirv’bstis; 

ft)  T»fta 

2  f. 

■jtrb 

ft)  irft? 

1  c. 

xrba 

t  ••  : 

wbama 

t  :  :  • 

ft)  sjftft 

Inf. 

x-_  xbaa 

t  :  r  • 

nab  ana 

t  t  :  ;  • 

nab  a 

T  T  — 

Imp. 

2  m. 

S-  'ba 

a_  hbana 

a_  'ba 
•  •  •  — 

2  f. 

aba 

aba  a?  a 

aba 

PL 

2  m. 

ib$ 

•ibana 
•  • 

2  f. 

V-  a:b"a 

aabana 

r  t  :  :  • 

aaba 

T  T  — 

Fut. 

3  m. 

abah 

•  !•  •  • 

sharp 

•  ••  ;  ;  • 

'.^_aba? 

3  f. 

aban 
•  •  •  • 

abann 

aban 

2  m. 

aban 

abann 

aban 

2  f. 

■pbann 

1  c. 

abaa 

••  :  v 

abana 

abaa 

PL 

3  m. 

■jib?? 

■pb?ra? 

1*5“ 

3  f. 

rbr 

It  :  :  • 

]?ban? 

ll5? 

2  m. 

■  i*?1? 

■p'bann 

■j?bann 

■jiban 

2  f. 

■pban 

It:—  : 

• 

1  c. 

abai 

•  •  •  • 

• 

abana 

•  •  •  •  • 

•  • 

abaa 
•  •  —  • 

• 

1  Part. 

m. 

aba 

aba~a 

f. 

a^ba 

t  :  t 

a-ba- 

t  :  —  : 

2  Part. 

m. 

aba 

•  ••  • 

aban'a 

•  •  •  •  •  •  • 

'fea 

£ 

a'ba 

a’bantj 

a'baa 

Par.  VIII.  Verbs  Lamedh  Aleph.  §  23.  83 


Ithpaal. 

Aphel. 

Ittaphal. 

'bas 

'bars 
•  •  —  • 

trbarift 

rritftf. 

ns'—  n'bans 

n'bans 
•  —  • 

n'_  n'l  n'bas 

•  t  ••  t  •  ;  — 

rrbam 

tY'banat 
•  —  •  • 

n'bas 
»  •  — » 

n'bans 

rrbans 

■n-  n'bas 

•  ••  «•  •  — . 

n'bans 

Tbans 
•  —  :  • 

W’V  vbas 

Phans 
•  •  —  « 

ns'bans 

t  •  —  :  • 

arbaa 

s'bans 

t  •  :  —  • 

■^n'bans 

■pnbas 

■pn'bans 

Itvbans 

•in'bas 

■p'bans 

arbars 

r  •  —  :  • 

srbas 

t  •  :  — 

sa'bans 

t  *  :  —  • 

nsbans 

t  t  -  :  • 

nsbas 

r  t  :  — 

nsbans 

t  t  :  —  • 

••  •  —  •  • 

is_  'bas 
•  •  •  •  — 

s_  'bans 

sbans 

i —  : 

sbas 

t  :  — 

sbans 

t  :  —  o 

■fern:* 

ibas 

•bans 
:  —  * 

sabans 

r  r  —  :  • 

srbas 

T  ••  •  — 

srbors 

t  ••  :  —  • 

star;1 

h_  abrr 

abarr 

•  90  ..•—»« 

sbann 

shan 

sbann 

sbann 

sban 

•  •  *  MM 

sbann 

ybann 

r^n 

1'bann 

sbans 

sbas 

sbans 

■pbarr 

A: 

■pbarr 

■^barr 

T&: 

"ban? 

■pbann 

■pban 

■]ibann 

]T'bann 

■pbann 

sbana 

sba: 

sban? 

■'_  sba  a 

s'baa 

r  :  :  — 

sbarro 

'baa 

sbana 

s'bana  s'baa  s'bana 


84 

Par.  IX. 

Declension  of  Nouns  masculine. 

Sing.  Abs. 

Const. 

Emph. 

Suff.  3  s.  m. 

Suff.  2  pi.  m. 

Dec.  I.  Singular.  §  ; 

31. 

0) 

TO 

to 

a“fia 

T 

nnsa 

■pvia 

(0 

P*  T 

b'S  or  jra 

aab'a 

T  T  • 

n;b-a 

•*  T 

-p‘:b-a 

Dec.  II.  Singular.  § 

32. 

(a) 

nb? 

—  T 

Dbs 

—  T 

sabs 

t  ;  it 

nab? 

••  :  it 

■pah? 

(0 

ID? 

ID? 

Mm3 

T  -2  T 

nsra 

••  t 

Tbsra 

!  :  ••  t 

Dec.  III.  Singular.  § 

33. 

(«)  C~P  >  mP 

ssba 

t  :  — 

roba 
•  •  •  — 

• 

psba 

(«) 

H 

SMT 

t  ;  • 

nsat 

poaT 

(0 

obn 

•  •  •• 

• 

obn 

V  •• 

sabn 

T  •  •• 

nabn 
•  «  •  •• 

•  • 

pabn 

P) 

P 

r? 

ar? 

T  *• 

nr? 

•  •  •• 

pr? 

(«;:?) 

fa?’?) 

00 

pP 

Pp 

a®T]5 

nuhp 

••  :  It 

PPp 

(or  XttPp  etc.) 

(/) 

bapna 

bapna 

abapna 

t  :  i—  :  : 

nbnpna 

pbajsna 

Dec.  IY.  Singular.  § 

34. 

00 

23 

ass 

T  — 

nss 

PP 

(^) 

IV 
•  • 

IV 

•• 

T  * 

w? 

•  •  • 

Pf? 

00 

QX 

aaa 

T 

naa 

••  \ 

paa 

Dec.  Y.  Singular.  § 

35. 

00 

aba 

••  T 

abs 

••  T 

ahbs 

t  :  r 

n’bs 

••  :  t 

PP 

0 

“bra 

■baa 

<m  •  - 

• 

a'bsa 

T  •  •  — » 

•  •  • 

n’bsa 
••  •  •  ■■ 

•  • 

p’bsa 

Dec.  YI.  Singular.  § 

36. 

naaip 

t  t  : 

••  r  ; 

POT 

Par.  IX.  Declension  of  Xouns  masculine.  85 


Plur.  Abs. 

Const. 

Emph. 

Suff.  3.  s.  m. 

Sufi'.  2.  pi.  m. 

Dec.  I.  Plural. 

■jniB 

'“lilts 
•  • 

xs"!iia 

T  — 

Tri-fits 

• 

1*10710 

rab's 

|  •  T  • 

'ab'X 

••  T  • 

s*ab'K 

T - T  • 

Triab'K 

•  T  » 

lioab'S 

Dec.  II.  Plural. 

Tab* 

i  •  :  it 

'■±>2 

•• :  >t 

s'aba 

t  —  :  it 

Triab? 

•  :  it 

■rio'jobo 

)  :  it 

T?a? 

'3“3 

••  t 

sans 

t—  t 

Triara 

•  t 

•pD'ano 

Dec.  III.  Plural. 

'oba 
•  "" 

iraba 

T—  ;  — 

vrioba 

lio'obio 

ra? 

'3707 

•  •  •  • 

• 

t—  :  • 

'“13707 
•  •  • 

liO'3707 

1'abn 

I  •  :  v 

'iobn 
•  •  •  •  • 

•  • 

s'abn 

T  — .  •  •* 

Triabn 

•  :  v 

lio'7pbn 

r?;? 

'3'3> 

••  •• 

St'3'? 

T—  •• 

'nia'p 
•  •• 

liO'3'37 

(■pa^n?) 

to 

tWOTja 

'rnaip 

liO'tinp 

TOra 

'boptvo 

••  j  1—  •  • 

N'bopna 

t—  :  :  • 

'“ibapna 
.  : »—  :  • 

1*b'bppna 

Dec.  IV.  Plural. 

1*2 

•'M 

T - 

'ftiaa 

1*io'pa 

■fl? 

'•T2> 

•  •  • 

K'T3> 

T - - 

Trip? 

•  • 

■fto'W 

'SX 

“  \ 

ssas 

T  -  \ 

Trias 

• 

lio'as 

Dec.  V.  Plural. 

1*2 

••  T 

s'ba 

r  —  t 

Triba 

•  T 

TO 

TO 

'baa 

s'baa 

t—  ;  — 

Tribaa 
•  •  — • 

• 

T>TO 

Dec.  VI.  Plural. 

rro 

'tCO"ip 

••  t  : 

'«a~p 

••  t  ; 

'“iS70“p 

•  t  :  i— 

■p'O'saTja 

86 


Par.  X.  Declension  of  Xouns  feminine. 


Abs. 

Const. 

Emph. 

Suff.  3  s.  m. 

Suff.  2  pi.  m. 

Dec.  VII.  I 

Singular,  i 

5  37. 

O) 

nria 

t  •  : 

nano 
-  •  : 

sriria 

t  :  •  : 

nmma 
•  •  •  •  • 

•  • 

rfcnrTj 

1  •  « 

(0 

•  MB 

• 

rrnizja 

arr  “iTijE 

t  •  :  — 

ttrrTd/J 

t*  •  •  — • 

• 

pbrmina 

0) 

ifiba 

msba 

amaba 

r  :  — 

Finifiba 

pansba 

Plural. 

0) 

■jjna 

nma 

T  •  : 

xnma 

rr  •  ; 

Trircna 

•  t  •  : 

riartna 

1  :t  •  : 

(0 

yntia 

It  :  :  — 

murj 

t  :  :  — 

amtia 

tt  :  :  — 

■'fiimiaa 

•  t  :  :  — 

■pbn'iaa 

1  :t  :  ;  - 

(0 

ppba 

ni3ba 

t  :  :  — 

xnisba 

tt  :  :  — 

Trimsba 

•  T  *  •  — 

riamsba 

1  :t  :  :  — 

Dec.  YIII. 

Singular. 

§  38- 

(a) 

aba^x 

t  :  :  — 

nbaix 

srba_x 

t  :  —  :  — 

riFibaps 

■j'tonbaia 

(0 

s"ba 

t  :  t 

n'ba 

- :  t 

an'ba 

T  •  T 

wvba 
..  •  T 

riatvba 

I  :  •  t 

0) 

tot 

may 

snttT 

t  : 

nn^T 

•  •  • 

• 

fiantoT 

Plural. 

(a) 

ibaFx 

It  :  :  — 

nbaia 

t  :  :  — 

anbaia 

T  T  :  :  - 

hfiinba"tf 

•  T  ;  ;  — 

■pbnbapK 

(0 

IW? 

trbs 

t  :  t 

srrba 

tt  :  t 

■rr'r-ba 

•  t  :  t 

■riarrba 

'  :  t  :  t 

(0 

773T 

’t  :  — 

IVST 

t  :  — 

xr-" 

tt  :  - 

vriniaT 

•  t  :  — 

pan  ip7 

Dec.  IX.  Singular.  § 

39. 

nxaip 

naapp 

xrv'anp 

r :  r  :  i- 

nwaip 

Plural. 

F97E 

nsaip 

t  t  : 

sttvaip 

TT  t  ; 

Tiirl,£np 

•  t  t  :  *“■ 

Par.  XI.  Numerals. 


8T 


Par.  XI.  Numerals. 

A.  Cardinals  from  1  to  10. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 


No. 

Abs. 

Const. 

Abs. 

Const. 

1 

in 

in 

snn 

T  "• 

nin 

2 

"T 

■pirn 

Tin 

8 

nmbn 

t  r  : 

nnbn 

—  t  : 

nbn 

t  : 

"nbn 

••  r  : 

4 

n?ans 

t  :  :  — 

n?ons 

?pns 

"n?ons 

5 

si?  on 

t  :  — 

nizjgn 

■ran 

hnni?jn 

••  r  :  — 

6 

snizi 

T  • 

ns™ 

niii 

"nniD 

••  T 

i 

ronirS 

t  :  • 

r?oo 
—  •  • 

?DID 

"n?DiD 

*•  r  :  • 

8 

soon 

t  :  —  : 

noon 

••  •  — 

'noon 

••r :  —  : 

9 

n?iDn 

t  :  • 

r#uin 
—  :  • 

?‘dn 

Wife 

..  r  ;  • 

10 

SID? 

mo? 

IDS? 

"mo? 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 


JB.  Cardinals  from  1 1 
Masculine. 

id ?  "in 
("©■'“in)  "ID?  "in 

\  —  ••  •  /  ••  j 

"©"bn 
-ip'nbn 

("©"©"IS)  "ID?  n?”S 
ID?  SfflHn 

"©tub 


"©?  snbn 


t  t  : 


-©"  pit 


"id?  snir 


no?  TODTD 


(■mm)  j  “ 

V  — :  t:  —  : 

"id?  n?ion 


to  19. 

Feminine. 

"np?  xnn 
(""©"nnn)  ■no?  snnn 

\  •*  »  ••  •  m.  /  ••  •  mm  • 

•  •  •  F  .  _ 

("no  "bn)  *np?  nbn 

(■no^sm)  ^ios>  jsh* 
\  ••  •  ••  •  —  /  ..  .  —  _  *  __ 
•  •  •  • 

(■nonan)  •’"id?  iron 
\  •  ••  — •  /  ••  *  —  ••  — • 
v  •  •  •  • 

piomti)  ^ids  mz5 
("npoip)  "no?  ?Dia 


j  ^P1™  I 
l  '"Pn  f 


"id?  "*rn 


"ID?  ?1Z5F1 


88 


Par.  XI.  Numerals. 


C.  Ordinals  from  1  to  10. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 


No. 

Abs. 

Emph. 

Abs. 

Emph. 

1 

non  £ 

nxanp 

naanp 

inn 'Hip 

2 

nn 

It:  • 

warn 

tt  :  • 

N3'3n 

tt  :  • 

xnnn 

t  •• ;  • 

3 

(hnbFi)  Trbn 

nxn'bn 

t  t  •  : 

an 'bn 

t  •  : 

Krrrrbn 

t  ••  •  : 

4 

_)*w,an 

T  /  T  T  •  : 

*w:r i 

t  t  •  : 

t  :  t  •  : 

5 

"&m/2n 
—  •  — • 

nairan 

T  T  •  "I 

nsffl’an 

t  t  • 

annonai 

T  •  •  -j 

6 

('ctd)  hrrna 

narmiD 

t  t  •  ; 

nairna 

t  t  •  : 

an'n'rn: s 

t  ••  •  : 

7 

•'yam 
—  •  : 

ntfrau: 

t  t  •  : 

•wots 

t  t  •  : 

atrs'aizj 

t  ••  •  ; 

(anapar) 

8 

■anon 

nwram 

tt  •  : 

ns3-ar. 

tt  •  : 

swan 

i"  •  •  • 

9 

• 

nxyncn 

t  r  •  : 

rmncn 

t  t  •  : 

xr-rcn 

t  ••  •  : 

10 

hTD2 
•*>  • 

r>$r\T? 

T  T  •  -2 

HiO'D? 

T  T  •  "J 

sn'Tts 

T  ••  •  -2 

A 


CHALDEE  CHRESTOMATHY; 

CONSISTING  OF  EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS,  ACCOMPANIED  BY 
NOTES  ON  THEM,  AND  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE, 

WITH  A  YOCABULARY. 


There  are  ten  Targums*  or  Chaldee  translations  of  the  Scriptures  ex¬ 
tant.  No  one  of  them,  however,  includes  the  whole  of  the  Old  Testament, 
and  some  only  a  single  book  or  a  few  books.  Daniel,  Ezra,  and  Nehe- 
miah  have  never  been  translated  into  Chaldee.  At  least,  no  Targums  of 
these  books  are  now  extant. 

The  Targum  of  Onkelos  on  the  Pentateuch,  from  which  the  sen¬ 
tences  in  Part  I.  are  extracted,  is  the  most  esteemed  of  all  the  Targums, 
both  for  its  faithfulness,  and  for  the  purity  of  the  language  employed. 
It  is  so  literal  that,  being  set  to  the  same  musical  notes  as  the  Hebrew 
text,  it  was  read  or  cantilated  in  the  synagogues  on  the  Sabbath,  in  con¬ 
nection  with  the  Hebrew  lesson  appointed  for  the  day.  See  Prideaux, 
Conn.  Yol.  IY.  p.  623.  Respecting  Onkelos  little  is  known.  Prideaux 
places  him  before  or  about  the  time  of  our  Saviour.  Horne  (Introd. 
Yol.  II.  p.  158,)  gives  the  same  as  the  generally  received  opinion. 
Jahn  (Introd.  p.  65  of  the  English  transl.)  supposes  him  to  have  written 
in  the  second  century.  The  same  is  Prof.  Winer’s  opinion.  Compare 
his  dissertation  De  Onkeloso,  etc.  §  1.  But  Gesenius  maintains  very 
satisfactorily  the  former  opinion,  Einl.  zu  Jesa.  §11. 

The  Targum  next  in  value,  and  probably  also  in  time,  is  that  of 
Jonathan  the  son  of  Uzziel,  who  translated  the  books  of  Joshua,  Judges, 
I.  and  II.  Samuel,  I.  and  II.  Kings,  Isaiah,  Jeremiah,  Ezekiel,  and  the 
twelve  minor  prophets.  He  is  ge?ierally  thought  to  have  been  earlier 
than  Onkelos.  Prideaux  assigns  him  a  later  date,  for  the  very  probable 
reason,  that  he  would  not  have  commenced  his  translation  at  Joshua, 
unless  the  books  of  Moses  had  been  already  extant  in  Chaldee. 

There  are  two  other  Targums  of  the  Pentateuch,  both  of  a  late  date. 


*  The  word  is  Chaldee,  ,  (from  to  interpret ),  lit.  an  interpretation ,  a 

paraphrase.  Its  use  is  limited  however  to  the  Chaldee  versions  of  the  Scriptures. 


90 


CHALDEE  CHRESTOMATHY. 


To  the  unknown  author  of  one  of  these  the  name  Pseudo- Jonathan  has 
been  applied,  because  it  was  long  supposed  to  have  been  written  by  J on- 
athan  Ben-Uzziel.  The  following  literal  translation  of  Num.  24  :  24,  as 
it  stands  in  this  Targum,*  shows  how  little  care  the  author  took  to  give 
the  simple  sense  of  the  Hebrew  text ;  while  the  mention  of  Constanti¬ 
nople  and  the  Lombards  makes  it  certain  that  this  Targum  was  not  the 
work  of  Jonathan  Ben-Uzziel.  It  was  probably  composed  in  the  ninth 
century.  “  And  wings  (ships  ?)  shall  come  with  instruments  of  war,  and 
shall  go  forth  with  great  multitudes  from  Lombardy  and  from  the  land 
of  Italy,  and  shall  be  joined  with  the  legions  which  shall  come  from 
Constantinople ;  and  they  shall  afflict  the  Assyrians  and  enslave  all  the 
sons  of  Eber ;  but  the  end  of  these,  as  well  as  of  those,  shall  be  to  fall 
by  the  hand  of  king  Messiah  ;  and  they  shall  be  destroyed  forever.” 

The  Jerusalem  Targum,  so  called  from  the  dialect  in  which  it  was 
composed,  is  the  other  of  the  two  mentioned  above.  It  belongs  proba¬ 
bly  to  an  age  still  later  than  the  preceding.  It  is  very  imperfect,  omit¬ 
ting  many  verses,  and  so  loosely  rendering  the  rest,  that  it  hardly  deserves 
the  name  even  of  a  paraphrase.  It  abounds,  much  more  fhan  the  Tar¬ 
gum  of  the  Pseudo- Jonathan,  with  digressions  and  fables,  which  may  be 
traditions  of  some  antiquity.  No  IV.  of  Part  II.  may  serve  as  a 
specimen.  Both  these  Targums  abound  in  Greek  and  other  foreign 
words.  In  the  above  extract,  the  word  translated  multitudes  is 
plainly  nothing  but  a  Chaldee  plural  of  the  Greek  o^Aos,  and  the  word 
rendered  legions  ■pYiV, . 

These  four  are  the  longest  and  most  valuable  of  all  the  Targums. 
The  first  two  are  esteemed  most  highly  as  affording  critical  aid  to  the 
student  of  the  Hebrew  Scriptures,  and  (especially  that  of  Onkelos)  in¬ 
troducing  us  to  a  pure  Chaldee,  nearly  resembling  the  style  of  Daniel 
and  Ezra.  Being  extremely  literal,  they  also  serve  to  vindicate  the  He¬ 
brew  text,  as  it  has  come  down  to  us,  against  those  who  charge  the  Jews 
with  having  corrupted  it  for  the  sake  of  evading  the  arguments  of 
Christians.  The  other  two  mentioned  above,  and  indeed  all  the  Tar¬ 
gums,  are  valuable  as  affording  many  expositions,  particularly  of  passages 
relating  to  the  Messiah,  which  agree  with  those  given  in  the  New  Testa¬ 
ment.  These  passages  many  of  the  modern  Jews  attempt  to  explain 
away,  so  as  to  get  rid  of  the  evidence  that  Jesus  was  the  Messiah. 
Several  examples  of  this  kind  are  given  by  Prideaux  (Conn.  Pt.  II.  B. 
VIII.  p.  639,  seq.)  One  instance  will  suffice  here. 

*  The  English  translation  of  this  passage,  which  is  literal,  is  as  follows :  “  And 
ships  shall  come  from  the  coast  of  Chittim,  and  shall  afflict  Asshur,  and  shall  afflict 
Eber,  and  he  also  shall  perish  forever.” 


REMARKS  ON  THE  TARGUMS. 


91 


11  Micali  5  :  2.  And  thou  Bethlehem  JEphratah . out 

of  thee  shall  come  forth  unto  me  he  that  is  to  be  rider  in  Israel. 
This  is  the  true  translation  of  the  Hebrew  text,  and  this  all  Christians 
understand  of  the  Messiah ;  and  so  anciently  did  the  chief  priests  and 
scribes  of  the  people  of  the  Jews,  when  consulted  by  Herod.  But 
since  that  time,  in  opposition  to  the  gospel,  Jewish  writers  have  endeav¬ 
ored  to  give  this  text  another  meaning,  some  interpreting  it  of  Hezekiah, 
some  of  Zerubbabel,  and  some  otherwise.  But  Jonathan,  who  per¬ 
chance  was  one  among  those  scribes  whom  Herod  consulted,  gives  the 
true  meaning  of  it  by  interpreting  it  of  the  Messiah,  in  the  same  man¬ 
ner  as  Christians  do  :  for  his  version  of  the  text  is  :  Out  of  thee  shall 
come  forth  before  me  the  Messiah ,  who  shall  exercise  sovereign  ruU 
over  Israeli  (Id.  p.  612.) 

In  another  place  (p.  635)  Prideaux  remarks,  that  “  the  Targums  of 
Jonathan  and  Onkelos  are  in  so  great  esteem  among  the  Jews,  that  they 
hold  them  to  be  of  the  same  authority  with  the  original  sacred  text.” 

The  other  Targums  are,  one  on  the  Hagiographa;  one  on  the  Megil- 
loth  or  five  books  of  Ecclesiastes,  Song  of  Solomon,  Lamentations,  Buth 
and  Esther;  three  on  Esther  alone;  and  one  on  the  two  books  of  Chron¬ 
icles.  The  first  has  been  ascribed  to  Babbi  Joseph  the  blind,  who  lived 
in  the  third  century.  But  neither  the  dates  nor  authors  of  these 
Targums  are  known  with  certainty.  The  barbarous  style  in  which  they 
are  written,  is  considered  as  affording  sufficient  proof  that  they  are  com¬ 
paratively  modern ;  though  they  appear  to  have  been  compiled  from 
*  more  ancient  materials. 

For  a  full  account  of  the  Targums,  see  Prideaux,  Conn.  Yol.  IV. 
pp.  618 — 645.  Horne’s  Introd.  Yol.  II.  pp.  157 — 163.  Walton,  Pro¬ 
leg.  XII.  §§  4 — 20,  and  Winer,  De  Onkeloso  ejusque  paraphrasi  Chal- 
daica  Dissertatio.  Compare  also  Stackhouse’s  Hist,  of  the  Bible,  pre¬ 
lim.  discourse  p.  90,  seq.  Calmet’s  Diet,  of  the  Bible,  articles  Jonathan, 
Onkelos,  and  Targum.  Father  Simon’s  Crit.  Hist.  B.  II.  Ch.  18.  Eich- 
horn’s  Einleitung  §§  213 — 245.  De  Wette,  Einl.  §§  57 — 62.  Wolffii 
Bibliotheca  Hebraea  Yol.  II.  pp.  1*135 — 1189.  Allix,  Judgment  of  the 
ancient  Jewish  Church,  etc.  Ch.  YII.  Carpzov.  Critica  Sacra,  Part  II. 
Ch.  I.  Gresenius,  Comm,  liber  Jesa.  Einl.  §  11,  and  Jahn’s  Introd.  to 
the  0.  T.  pp.  64 — 68  of  the  English  translation. 


i 


iJ  A  R  T  1. 


SELECT  SENTENCES  FOR  GRAMMATICAL  EXERCISE. 


:  asns  m  k*bo  it *r&  raipa 

it;  —  /-:  t  -  :  7-  at:  jt  ;  I  i-  : 


NOTES. 

The  sentences  of  this  Part  are  all  taken  from  the  Targum  of  Onkelos 
on  the  Pentateuch.  They  stand  in  the  order  of  their  selection,  as  it  was 
thought  that  any  of  them  would  be  sufficiently  simple  for  grammatical 
analysis  by  those  already  familiar  with  Hebrew. 

The  reader  will  observe,  on  comparing  the  translation  with  the  He¬ 
brew  text,  that  the  same  train  of  accents  appears  in  both.  §  2.  9.  b.  This 
agreement  is  not  perfect  throughout.  Where  however  the  train  of  accents 
in  the  Targum  is  different  from  that  of  the  Hebrew  text,  the  accents  are 
still  similar.  For  the  sake  of  comparison  with  the  Hebrew,  the  accents 
are  inserted  in  these  sentences. 

1.  Gen.  1  :  1,  “pEpp ,  plur.  of  Dpp  Deck  III.  a.  comp.  §  33.  a.  S  prep,  is 
prefixed  regularly  with  -7  as  in  Hebrew.  Lit.  in  principiis. — p,  §  4.  note. 
This  is  strictly  an  abbreviation,  and  must  not  be  read  ysyd,  as  though  it 
were  a  distinct  name.  It  is  said  by  some  to  have  been  formed  by  prefixing 
th e  first  letter  of  nirn  to  the  last  of  ,  thus  combining  the  Q,«ri  with 
the  Kgthib  and  saving  the  trouble  of  marginal  notes.  Others  affirm  that 
its  original  form,  which  indeed  appears  in  some  editions,  was  ,  i.  e.  the 
initial  of  fiirp  repeated  three  times  ‘to  express  Trinity ;  and  that  later 
Jews,  rejecting  the  doctrine  of  the  Trinity,  have  preferred  the  other  form, 
and  given  it  the  other  explanation.  It  is  pronounced  Adho-nay.  As  here, 
it  is  generally  employed  in  the  Targums  to  render  ,  when  the  latter 

stands  alone  (i.  e.  without  any  other  name  of  God)  and  signifies  the  true 
God. — rp  ,  i.  q.  Heb.  rx  . — ,  emphatic  state  from  pBTD  3  not  used  in  the 
abs.  form.  See  §  29.  3.  c.  The  term  emphatic  seems  to  imply  more  than 
it  really  means  ;  and  the  reader  of  Chaldee  naturally  inquires  how  strong 


SELECT  SENTENCES. 


93 


:  Tb*nra  Tb^sra?1 2 3 4 5!  mizy  h2rp"rr  an  »b»*i  2 

rail  nara-pn  c^p  nab  '■’“M  's:»a  rpnir  ■wapT'’  3 

:  ana 

it  ;  - 

sw  waa  vri  Dsn  mati/aa  STPaaizs  ■nor  ns^b  tis1'  4 

rt  :  —  !-\- :  >••  •  a-  :  J“ :  :  —  :  /••:  •  :  >••:-:  v  v:  t: 

:  Tinb 

I  I  : 

:  sabri?  psabi  worn  tib.  in  nsr^  ansrba  "s  5 

it  :  —  —  Kr  :  •  :  at  •  :  v  Ijt  r  if-  •  -n  :  —  t  5- 


that,  emphasis  can  be,  which  falls  upon  three-fourths  of  the  nouns  with 
which  he  meets.  Perhaps  the  term  definite  would  be  preferable,  if  the 
other  were  not  in  use.  A  noun  in  the  emphatic  state  expresses  usually  the 
same  idea  which  would  be  expressed  in  Hebrew  by  the  noun  with  the 
article. — ,  emph.  state.  See  3HX  in  the  vocabulary. 

2.  Gen.  9:9,  §  7.  d.  1. — D*f?D  ,  do  establish ,  1st  Part.  Pael  from 

Dip,  §  22.  3. — from  “in2,  §  8.  3.  II.  Note  4. — The  first  two  accents 
in  this  sentence  differ  from  those  of  the  corresponding  Hebrew  words.  In 
stead  of  Rebhia  the  Hebrew  has  Zaqeph  Ghadhol,  and  instead  of  Merka, 
Darga.  The  two  former  are  both  large  disjunctives,  and  the  two  latter 
both  conjunctives,  and  of  course  might  easily  be  interchanged.  Perhaps 
however  the  accents  were  originally  transferred  to  the  Targum  from  a 
Hebrew  MS.  which  had  Rebhia  and  Merka.  The  remaining  accents  in 
this  sentence  are  the  same  as  in  the  Hebrew.  Similar  remarks  miorht  be 
repeated  on  the  other  sentences  ;  but  it  will  be  unnecessary. 


3.  Gen.  9:  13,  *,Pw5p ,  with  suff.  1.  p.  sing,  from  rriip ,  Dec.  III.  a. — 
,  1.  sing.  Pr.  Peal  from  ,  I  do  set ,  §  50.  1.  The  Hebrew  likewise 

has  the  Praeter  ‘’Pins . — ‘\pn  apoc.  for  JO  ft  ft  2  f.  sing.  Fut.  from  jnn  .  See 
the  note  at  ihe  close  of  §  23. — ,  const,  state,  —  being  immutable. — , 
pronounced  mem-ri.  §  2.  3.  In  sense  it  is  precisely  equivalent  to  the  He¬ 
brew  •»©B3 ,  myself  or  me.  See  in  the  vocabulary. 

4.  Gen.  9  :  27,  ipS?,  3  sing.  m.  Fut.  Aphel  from  Jins,  §  6.  d.  1. — b ,  sign 
of  the  Accusative  case,  §  60.  3. — And  shall  cause  his  glory  to  dwell ,  i.  e. 
and  he  [God]  shall  dwell. — <T—  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47.  2.  lit.  in  the  tents  of 
him,  (even)  of  Shem.  “n  ,  sign  of  the  Gen.  case,  §  60.  1. — Servant  to  them  ; 
Hebrew  iftb  ;  Sept.  7rat?  avrov  *  Vulg.  servus  ejus.  But  the  Syriac, 
Arabic,  and  Samaritan  versions  agree  with  our  Targumist  in  giving  a 
plural  rendering. 

5.  Gen.  13:15,  §  23.  1.  note. — ,  1  sing.  Fut.  from  “JH3 ; 


94 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART.  I. 


:wb  >rb  nntim  antraa,  wni  6 
:  jc-st  ioitsai  K»Hsh  xbtaa  Tib  -,rn  7 
Trrrinbsi  Kim  mb  ninK-nK  rtoH?  '“a  nin-Kb  8 

:  “iKfTOK 

i-  t  :  • 

:  D‘isab  hm  iirosn  riiinK  nci-1  sbs  nbsi  9 
mbamaa  ktsdi  mim  mara  tabus  m?  sb  10 
■prams’  mbi  sihttba  am  mb’-n  Kntaa  mm-is  scab r 

!  j  :  —  :  •  t  :  —  j*  j~  •  :  t  •  :  <••••:  — 


:  — 


:  scaas 

it  —  :  — 


:  Trb  nasi  win  -rasa  -raso 

I  it  It:  ;•:  •  :  at 


11 


ftp—  with  3  epenthetic,  i.  q.  ft— ;  §  16.  note  1. — 7}3nb ,  to  thy  sons. 
See  12.  * 

6.  Gen.  15  :  6,  'pJpft ,  Aphel  from  =  p2S< ,  (see  the  latter  word  in.  the 

lexicon).  §  20.  3.  b  and  §  12.  II.  5. — pft  atla*^  }  the  Lord ,  i.  q.  "Ofts*. ,  §  49. 

1.  c.  But  this  expression,  which  occurs  frequently  in  the  Targums  as  a 
translation  of  the  Hebrew  ftift"; ,  is  considered  by  some  critics  as  desig¬ 
nating  that  Word  which  was  afterwards  £<  made  flesh  and  dwelt  among 
us.” — ftadft ,  He  (the  Lord)  reckoned  it ,  §  16.  2.  a . — ^Dtb,  §  7.  d. 

7.  Gen.  27  : 28,  ft,  sign  of  the  Gen.  case,  §  60.  1. 

8.  Gen.  42 :  38,  n*irp ,  Fut.  of  ftfti  ,  Tseri  compensating  for  Daghesh 

forte,  omitted  on  account  of  the  guttural. — iaftt2fc<  ,  §  6.  b. 

9.  Gen.  45  :  4,  Tp  pft32fft  ,  §  48.  1.  *'rp  ,  pleonastic. 

10.  Gen.  49:  10,  “’ftSp,  for  30??,  §  6.  d.  1. — 132 ,  one  exercising 
sovereignty ,  a  ruler. — *'33,  irreg.  see  12. — ft^boi ,  (=Hebrew  ....  ITTN 
*).  to  whom ,  §  8.  3.  II.  n.  3. — &Oft,  the  pron.  used  for  the  substantive 
verb  in  the  present  tense.  See  §  47.  1. — p2afttip,  Ithpe.  from  2eu3,  §  6.  b. 
— DpBE? ,  irreg.  see  02  .  One  bearing  ride  shall  not  depart  from  (be  want¬ 
ing  to)  the  house  of  Judah ,  nor  a  scribe  from  the  posterity  of  his  sons  for¬ 
ever  ;  until  Messiah  shall  come,  whose  is  the  kingdom  ;  and  to  him  shall  the 
people  hearken ,  or,  him  shall  they  obey. 

11.  Ex.  33:  14,  ‘* 1 11ft3Dl2,  my  glory,  doubtless  equivalent  to  the  Hebrew 
"’SQ  ,  my  presence ,  i.  e.  a  mere  periphrasis  for  /,  used  of  course  only  in  rela¬ 
tion  to  God.  Comp.  nos.  4  and  13. — TjftPi ,  §  22.  1. — ftp:*,  Aph.  Fut.  1st 
pers.  sing,  from  rft3 ,  I  will  provide  a  resting  place ,  T|b  ,for  thee. 


SELECT  SENTENCES. 


95 


rbrn  rhn  rvab*i  ■p'nt on  -r-  a^iirw-rr  ]2 

vt -:  J  -»•  I  j  :  i*:*:  —  ;••:  I  :  •  -j*  •  jt —  ••  - 


♦  h*i 

♦ 

it; 


pnp  ■  Tinn  flnsi  rtbab  Tbb  “'ins'i  riiwn  Wjpia  •nmi  13 

:  DJ-'b 

it  : 

wsbx  rni:rnba_p"p“i"ntzj  ''  aw  “tas  •’“iioaa^  14 

:  bSTa'T 

i"  t  :  •  ; 

:  birr-  Tiara  tra  ipr  psns  satswa 

:  wa-ia  rnix  nba  pb  -Tr-ab  16 
:ti  a:nba  baoizr  to®  17 

it  /t:  t  vt t  v:  /t:  a-t  :  •  v-  : 

:  pa:rb:a'  paarbaa*  pab-baa  pnbx  --  n-  dfnrvi  is 
:  anaa"!  ansa  ppf^wri  rTTrx  sr-"-r-  womm  19 

•  it  :  •  :  jt  :  —  :  !  v.  ••  I  i*t  —  ••  *t  •  -  1  i.  : 


12.  Lev.  26  :  2,  ,  §  8.  3.  II.  note  3. — ‘pbn'i ;  1st  Part.  Pe.  from  bn1?. — 

■pbfH  p'nn ,  treat  the  house  of  my  sanctuary  with  habitual  reverence. 
Such  appears  to  be  the  force  of  this  combination.  See  §  51.  1. 

13.  Lev.  26  :  12,  "nnx,  1st  pers.  sing.  fut.  Pe.  from  K?n,  instead  of  the 
usual  form  50HX ,  §  23.  1.  b.  note.  For  the  plural  suff.  of  *p3  and  D^j?  see 
§  8.  3.  II.  note  4. 

14.  Num.  10  :  36,  *ini’H2:?3,  a  plural,  with  suffix  of  the  third  person  sing., 
formed  from  the  inf  Pe.  of  50d ,  §  35.  note  2.  In  its  restings ,  i.  e.  when¬ 
ever  it  rested. — The  frequent  repetition  of  Maqqeph  in  this  sentence  is  not 
occasioned  by  any  special  intimacy  of  connection  between  the  words  thus 
joined.  Its  cause  exists  in  the  train  of  accents,  which  is  the  same  as  in 
the  Hebrew.  Three  words  are  introduced  into  the  Targum  which  do  not 
appear  in  the  original — “  Dwell  in  thy  glory,  in  the  midst  of  ” — but  for  these 
there  is  no  accent.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  they  are  joined  by  Maqqeph 
to  the  next  word.  The  four  words  are,  in  cantillation,  theoretically  one. 

15.  Num.  24  :  5,  ,  thy  valley ,  if  we  derive  it  from  “nr? .  But 

perhaps  -nr-’E  should  be  regarded  as  a  verbal  from  n*vr,  and  then  we  may 
translate  it  dwelling ,  habitation. 

16.  Dent.  5:7. 

17.  Deut.  6:4. 

18.  Deut.  6  :  5. 

19.  Deut.  10  :  19. 


96 


CHKESTOMATHY.  PAIiT  I. 


rnpnn  rrnbmbi  rfen  Tiww  bmn  'nPiba  mm-pr  2o 

:  Dflpn 

:  to™  xrbx-;-b*E  sppnic  anTOns  ptoto  xs'prmbrn  21 
:  linsica  'p^na  too  to  ‘birca  siarsn  tes  22 
rrspTO  7p™z  NTOin  ptfosot  biCfoTOsttibiO  xnbx  rrb  2% 

:  ami 5 


20.  Deut.  10  :  20,  bmn,  §  15.  3. — nbsn,  Q,amets  for  Pattahh  on  account 
of  a  pause-accent. 

21.  Deut.  32  : 18,  rbn'n,  plur.  const,  from  fctbp'n .  Lit.  the  terrors  of  the 
Mighty  One  who  created  thee,  ihou  hast  forgotten;  i.  e.  the  terrible  and 
mighty  One ,  §  61.  1.  note  1. — §  26.  2.  a. — ,  §  23.  note  1. — 

§  12.  I.  note  2. — ,  §  16.  2.  a. — tpjrfi,  strong ,  mighty ,  occurs 
likewise  in  vs.  30,  31,  as  a  rendering  of  the  Heb.  *1*1  £ . 

22.  Deut.  32  :  29,  “plnsio,  plural  from  t|iO  with  suff.  3.  pi.  m.  defectively 
written,  §  6.  c.  (4.) 

23.  Deut.  33  :  26,  Npbx  ,  an  instance  in  which  the  emphatic  state ,  (as  is 
sometimes  the  case  with  the  Hebrew  article),  corresponds  to  our  indefinite 
article,  a  or  an. — FPPpSttj'n  ( scriptio  plena),  §  8.  3,  I.  note  1.  Lit.  who,  his 
glory,  i.  e.  whose  glory,  §  48,  1. 


) 


PART  II. 


A 

v. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


I.  History  of  the  Fall.  Gen.  3. — Onkelos. 

Iasi  s-nba  las  ■'i  ana  run  bba  on?  mb  s-im  1 

—  -7—  •  v;  T  :  —  •  T  T  —  ••  •  •  T  T  ”2  T  2  •  ; 

:  xn;s  ib’8  bb-j  nbm  xb  ■'  nas-ns  atMftpa  snnsb 
•n'BHii  C31  :  birr:  xP3"ib‘N  'Tea  K“"ifib  xrrx  maxi  2 
xbk,  R”‘3  wbs’n  xb  •"  tax  xro-rnanaxn  ^  x:b'x 

r  :  ••  •  I  ;  t  t  :  - :  t  :  •  •  :  •  •  t  t  • 


was  xb  xnrxb  x*in  -iexi  :  fimam  sab-  n-a  rnnpn  4 
innsm  naa  ribaw  kata  “nx  "-Dip  'ba  —s  :  rirflan  5 

1  t  :  —  ;  •  :  ••  •  I  :  :  t  :  t  :  r  »r;  ••  :  ••  )  : 


.A/ 


1.  .*£  D"n2 ,  comparative,  §  64.  1.  a.  more  cunning  than. — Va,  every. — 
^  .  So  the  London  Polyglott,  which  has  been  followed  in  the  text  of  the 
Chrestomathy.  Also  Buxtorf  Bibl.  Heb.  Basil.  1665.  The  Paris  and  Ant¬ 
werp  Polyglotts  read  ^  .  The  title  page  of  Munster’s  Bibl.  Heb.  Basil. 
1546  exhibits  the  form  ^  ? .  Compare  the  note  on  Part  I.  No.  I. — D^nfbx . 
Here  likewise  the  Polyglotts  differ,  Buxtorf  and  the  London  edition  giving 
constantly  the  Hebrew  form,  and  the  other  two  mentioned  above,  t<nbi< . — 
•p^n  ,  §  21.  a. 

2.  nncx.,  §  15.  note  2. — b^a^ ,  Fut.  expressing  the  sense  of  the  Eng. 
Potential  mood,  we  may  eat. 

3.  yianjrn .  Future  Pael  instead  of  “pan^n  ,  §  2.  7.  b.  Buxtorf  has  “iDbjan  ; 
the  Antwerp  and  Paris  Polyglotts,  fsa^pn  in  Peal. 

4.  firman  raa,  an  Inf.  with  a  finite  verb  to  denote  certainty,  as  in  He¬ 
brew. 

5.  *vba,  Part.  Peil  from  xba,  §  6.  d.  (1),  it  is  manifest  before  the  Lord. — 
•jnnen'n .  Use  of  )  instead  of  another  conjunction,  same  as  in  He¬ 
brew.  inner*,  Ithpaal  Fut.  3d  plur.  fern. — linn,  Fut.  Peal  2d  plur.  masc. 
frorp  Kin.— -paaan,  see  an  in  Lex.— ’paan,  1st  Part.  Peal  from  can  §  32. 

7 


OS 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


anna  nmi  :  strrs  raan  rmrra  Tinrvi  rbw  6 

sob-tf  m-?b  s“-“s  -“W  bp-ab  s:b-x  zts  ~x 

t  t  - :  !•:  —  ;  t  ••  -:—  —  ••  :  t  r  •  t  •• 

“53?  r-h'-':"rs  ram  nbpxi  ram*  ra*c:-  “-a  sbinrxb 

r  •  t  ;  |  —  :  •  at  :  —  :  .  —  ••;  ••  t  t  —  :  •  : 

1*1265  rsbii-o?  --s  si?ti  Tin-Tn  *;•;•  !$nnsnx5  :  b‘x-  7 

I  •  J  •  t  •  :  —  ••  —  •  !*  ••  :  —  ....  t  t  —  :  •  :  T 

bp-n-  Paw  :  "pm  pnb  pay  -p:xn  -s-a  pinb  mtarn  8 
="!$  mmi  s””  roab  xnara  irbnrra  -ribs  * — xmm 

t  t  :  t  -  :  •  t  :  •  :  !••—:•  •  v:  t  :  —  t  : 

-  xm  :  xma  ib-x  ij2  D-rrbx  -  nip  -73  trnnxi  9 
rwara  yra-irbpm  mx-  :  ns  is  mb  p-xi  msb  d-rrbx  10 
■n  72  T3si  smses!  x:x  -xba-m-nx  n-btm  xr:aa  r 

•  —  I  —  —  •—  .*  •  —  ••  T  — •  —  •  •  —  •  •  —  •  ••••  T  *  *  *  A  * 

I  •  •  •  •  *  •  • 

bs-ab-xbrnb-ia  imps  -1  xbb-xpsn  ns  -xbtn?  --x  pb 
-b  r:~-  sti  'py  ram  srrs  mx  -ax-  :  rbax  ma  12 
m2?  XTira  xnnxb  D-rrbx  -  pdx-i  :  max-  sab-xma  13 
D-rrbx  -  ms-  :  n-baxi  -:-?ux  x’-n  xrrx  r;r  u 


t  :  • 


note  2,  knowing  [ how  to  distinguish^  between ,  etc. — b  ....  “pa  For  this  use 
of  b  after  F?  comp.  Stuart’s  Hebrew  Chrestomathy,  p.  83.  Note  on  Gen. 
1  : 6. 

6.  ntn  .  3d  sing.  fem.  Praet.  Peal  from  Ntn  . — (a  medicine)  appears  to 

refer  to  the  effect  which  Eve  expected  the  eating  of  the  fruit  to  have,  in 
opening  her  eyes  to  a  clearer  vision.  But  all  the  other  ancient  versions 
agree  with  the  English  translation  in  rendering  >  pleasant  to 

the  eyes. — ,  2d  Part.  Pael.  a  [HE  expresses  the  idea  con¬ 

veyed.  according  to  the  other  translators,  in  the  previous  clause  ;  desirable 
to  behold.  fn-'n  is  pleonastic.— rSnG3 ,  §  12.  II.  1. — see  EX  in  the 
vocab. — nsniy  §  7.  d.  1. 

7.  xnnsnx  .  3d  pers.  plur.  fem.  Praet.  Ithpaal,  from  nns  . — F'rF'ptt,  §  42. 
1.  a.  note. — JiE-'En,  §  12.  I.  1.  b. — F?^  r  see  ^F2^  ,n  the  vocab. — FT^!?  a 
Hebrew  form.  But  Buxtorf  points  it  F?"1!  •  See  bis  lexicon. 

8.  pFx ,  collective.  For  the  pointing  see  §  31.  b.  note  1. 

10.  r-'Fnn  ,  §  13.  2.  For  the  insertion  of  **  quiescent  in  the  last  sylla¬ 
ble  of  this  word,  and  of  iV’sppiO,  see  §  12.  I.  1.  a. 

11.  FH  §  12.  I.  1.  b.  But  Buxtorf  points  it  here  .— ,  §  21.  a. 
Inf.  from  bax  . 

14.  Enb ,  2d.  Part,  from  lasib . — ,  Fut.  from  bix  ,  §  21.  a. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


99 


wn  birjn  KTja"bM  rrb  annb 

t  t  —  ••  •  r  •  ;  t  •  2  —  •  t  2:  — :  r  ;  •  ; 

ras  teai!)  ;  tpn  iambs  bns-m  sis?1)  bmn  ira-by  i5 

ib  tottp  snn  sn:a  ran  tea  ran  srns  ran  ira 

It  •  t  ••  :  tt  :  I  ••  It  :  I  :  t  :  •  |  ••  It 

snnsb  :  ssicb  irb'itimrin  rsn  rmpbmrrb  maPiTroTe 

T»  •  •  t  •  ••  •  •  T-  ••  •  •  —  •  1  •  •  !■>  •  •  ••  •  •  —  —  •  —  —  v 

•  •  •  •  I  •••/•  •  •  •  . 

r:a  ribn  -~2a  te^nten  mus  'sds  nsacs  us 

I  •  •  I  ♦  •  ••  —  •  •  •  •  —  •  •  •  •  —  — •  —  •  •  •  — 

I  •  I  •  •  •  •  ••  • 


T  T  ;  — 


"i as  msbn  :  Ts-abm  snm  i-nansn  mn  Tba-a~nnbn  n 
imps  ‘i  sbb'STa  nbssn  irrs  imab  nbap  “s 
rebmn  bara  ib'ia  sms  strb  pits  bns'n  sb  uiab 

T  •  2  T  T  :  1  r  •  2  T  2  —  T  ••  •  ••  T  —  2 

sacmrp  bna'rn  ib  naan  mpsn  ransn  :  tpn  ■'an-1  bs  is 
smsb  annm  u>  snmb  bnsTi  issi  sma  :  sbpm  19 
ms  sipn  :  annn  s-mbn  ms  sssmis  srmotns  rnsai  20 


T  2  — 


lam  :  saisma  bm  sax  nn 

--J-  TT  v:  ••  2  T  2  T  •  T 

Pi  ST!  'IS 

—  •  •  ••  — • 

n-ii  1 

T  — 

PiTiFlS  PIS  21 
••  2  * 

piumyamby  ipT-yonab 

n-rmsbn 

•  •  •  •  • 

•  • 

msb 

T  T  2 

mnbs  - 

•  v:  t  2 

-sabs  itt  m  ms  sn 

r  2“  2  •  *2  T  -2  TT  T 

a  mbs  " 

•  v:  t  2 

usn 

:  nnsmbsn  22 
*  •  •  • 

rs  ami  pit  mizjr'S'abl 

j  —  —  •  •  •••  •  T  •  • 

•  •  •  1  • 

;ysn  man 

ao 

T 

'JTlb  rTT2 
—  •  2  •*  * 

15.  1st  Part.  Peal,  from  ‘■op  §  12.  I.  1.  c.  He  will  remember 
against  thee  what  thou  hast  done  to  him. — i.  q.  ■papj?  “1  “ofrom  the 
beginn  ing — and  ently. 

16.  !"!N3t3X,  Inf.  Aphel.  See  the  paradigm. — “p^n  ,  Fat.  2d  sing,  fem. 
from  “ftp . — Tp3  .  prep.  3  with  suff.  2d  sing.  fern.  See  the  table. 

17.  Fut.  2d  sing.  masc.  from  box  with  fem.  suff.  3d  sing,  and  3 
epenthetic. 

19.  Knst,  defectively  written.  SeeXSfT. — ns^p  , from  which. 

21.  “pt^ob  ,  etc.  garments  of  honor  for  the  skin  of  their  flesh. 

22.  3‘pob  ,  Inf.  Peal  from  3H1?  ,  §  20.  4. — fT'20 ,  of  himself  independently. 
“  Adam  has  become  the  only  [being]  in  the  world  [able]  of  himself  to  distin¬ 
guish  good  and  evil .”  Onkelos  seems  to  have  considered  the  Hebrew 
!)2ro  singular,  as  indeed  it  is  capable  of  being;  and  this  probably  led  him 
to  render  “inX5.  {as  one,)  by  “H^rn  o?ily.  The  other  Targumist.s  agree 
with,  or  perhaps  rather  follow ,  Onkelos.  Nearly  all  the  ancient  versions, 


100 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


crttba  mrfeiDi  s  Db?b  m  btohhi  aw  ib^- 2  23 
diM-re  ?pm  :  rand  -nanOT  MhdiMTr  nbsdb  rm  24 
Md-n  we  rei  Mraiirarre  *1151  Mn::b  raTpbd 

:  M,sr:  ib'M  miM_re  ntsdb  MPEntran 

t - It  —  -  —  •  :  t  :  —  ;  •  : 


II.  The  same.  Gen.  3. — Pseudo-Jonathan. 

nm'bK  *ns“i  M~d  ni*n  bad  izrdb  drai  mn  mth 


T  T 


baa  vibpTi  Mb  dTibM  *'  “cmi  Mdwpij  Mdmb  “idMi 


-b*M  'tb  “sdd  Mdnb  MnriM  mdMi  :  unwa  ib-s  2 

reirsd  s:bx  *~*Ed!i  :  barab  nun  ib  n*M  Mndtra  3 

Mdbn  red  -.Udipn  Mb*  read  nba*n  Mb  **  ids  mkw 

t  :  •  ••?  : » —  :  t  :  •••!;••  r  t  :  —  t  t  • 

rend  by  nnobn  M*3*n  idM  Mnyo  m'“  ra  :  -preidFi  4 
ra  *:d  M3d!iM_ba  dra  nnran  read  Mb  MnmMb  ndMi 


—  r  ; 


however,  give  the  sense  expressed  in  the  English  translation. — 3&?1  Fut. 
of  30D  . 

23.  *]fiwq  .  .  .  .  “i ,  whence ,  §  48.  1. 

24.  ^""]Pi ,  Praeter  Pael,  merely  a  full  orthography  for  Tptt  • — NSBnnp; 
Part.  Ithpe.  fem.  sing,  agreeing  with  N3in  . — its  a,  Inf.  from  “23 . 

1.  1331 ,  for  the  pointing  see  below,  No.  III.  (7)  and  (9).  It  will  be  un¬ 
necessary  to  notice  such  cases  in  future. — 1  ficattjiipn,  is  it  true  that ,  etc.? 
rt  interrogative  with  Daghesli  forte  euphonic.  So  in  Hebrew  sometimes. 
Stuart’s  Heb.  Gram.  §  152.  a. 

2.  rn?sx  ,  §  15.  note  2.  The  Qamets  is  probably  the  result  of  a  pause 
in  pronunciation,  though  no  accents  have  been  appended  to  this  Targum. 

,  contraction  for  N3b  . 

3.  Njbx,  §  2.  6.  c. — 'O’n,  see  *’3  in  vocab, — Hhireq  is  short,  the 
11  being  a  mere  mater  lectionis ,  §  2.  1. 

4.  iax,  etc.,  the  serpent  spake ,  calumniating  his  Maker,  and  said. 
— 13,  (comp,  the  Heb.  yaizj  *3  yip. ,  a  fruitful  hill ,  etc.)  the 
thing  made ,  the  result  of  labor.  Every  workman  hates  the  work  of  his  own 
hands. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


101 


Ft-sa  iiba-m  sai-a  Dins  mp  hba  ors  :  rrnaaix 
:  a-ab  an  ra  yr:ab  raann  ranan  raxbaa  iiinni 

.  :  —  J  ••  — :  •  :  I  •  :  —  :  1  •  :  J  •  t  :  — :  I  v  : 

di~s  nym  nb-mi  xnia  nxba  bxao  rr  xnnx  nani 

—  :  - ;  —  •  :  t  J  — ;  —  ••  t  —  -  t  :  •  — t: 

y-nai  rrrn  sninib  sin  ics  omxi  ba-ab  x:b-x  an 

- :  !  •  :  — :  t  :  •  t  —  ••  :  t  t  •  — 

ns  ran"  nbaxi  Fra-xa  ra-::i  Fra  xbarc-xb  x:b-x 

I—  —  t  •  —  t  .  —  ••  tt  —  :  •  :  tt  • 

oms  irri  rinmn  -nr  rrenxi  :  baxi  nay  “by ab 

t  •  I  ••  :  —  ....  ]  T  —  t  :  r  •  t  — : 

wa  ix-rarsn  xnain  'Diab  in  ibnnynxn  in-s  rsbnny 

••  •  :  :  •  :  t  :  :  I  •  )  •  J  .  t  •  :  — 

mayi  r:n  hsnnn  rinb  m-nm  rintitira  ran  riim 

t  t  :  i  .  ..  ••  ;  —  •  )  :  •  — :  J  : - :  1-  :  —  ! 

b-sna  DTibs  "i  siara  bp  tr  lymci  s  imap  rinb 
Dip  ]a  n-nn:xi  dix  nan-xi  xar  roab  snai-aa 


8 


T  »1\2 


D-nbx  "  xnpi  :  smirn  nb-s  niy-aaa  D-nbx  -  9 
sarin  -n-p  -by  man  xaby  bb  xbn  n-b  nasi  n-xb 
xbn  -a-p  ra  xnatrxb  naba  nan  fix  rrrr  xninia 
:  Tjrn-psn  snips  m  ixi  nan  x;x  Fra  nana  nisi  ms 
-sbieny  Dnx  rrbmi  xti-nsra  n-yauj  rnaro  bp  rn  nasi  10 
:  sslc-a  ra  rmna-xi  ana  r — ays  annpsn  xr-uai 
x:b\x  -n-s  ra  sabn  rx  -xb-tsny  Dins  nb  -in  in  nas^  n 
xrrx  dis  nasi  :  nbas  Finn  ba-ab  sbn  rnn-pan  i2 
nasi  :  n-baxi  x:b-x  -n-s  ra  a  nan-  s-n  -as  nan-n  13 

—  —  •  j  —  •  _  J  7  •  ••••  I  •  •  —  —  •  mm  «  •  J  —  ■ 

y  -  

5.  •pa'ia'i  •psxba,  superior  angels . — ’pEarrn ,  who  know.  See  above 
No.  I.  (5). — ,  lo  discern ,  discriminate.  For  the  form,  see  §  20.  4. 
Comp.  §  2.  7.  a. 

6.  rvann ,  Praet.  Pe.  3.  s.  f.  §  23.  Note  1.  on  Par. — nb^rn  ,  ^  13.  2. 

7.  snB*ia  irsnb  ,  garments  of  the  color  of  the  ista ,  i.  e.  purple. — ;*|^n  ,  for 
5  see  ^  35,  and  below  on  v.  15. — ‘jinnnfis  see  . 

8.  ,  Ithpe.  from  ,  §  7.  a.  (2). — PT^r.tnSX ,  ^  6.  a.  note. 

9.  *^70,  ^  12.  I.  1.  c.  and  the  parallel  passage  in  the  Jer.  Targum. 

10.  rv|S*ri'^ ,  §  12.  I.  1.  a.  and  2. — rvnaJX,  Aph.  1.  s.  Praet.  from  } 

$  12.  I.  2.—  ya  ,/or  shame,  i.  e.  because  I  was  ashamed. 

12.  =*125,  §4.  b. 


102 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


ann  anm  rra&o  may  an  he  annab  dnba*  ^ 

t  :  •  t  :  •  —  r  t  :  —  t  t  —  t  :  •  :  •  v:  t: 

Wtfl  :  rrbaao  irrwizm  *ryD&0  FriTja^ra  14 

T«  «  —  •  |  f  —  .  M  •»  •  «  •  •  •  —  •  —  •  ••••  •  •  —  *  —  A  ■* 

•  ••  I  •«•••  •••  • 

trb  an  rray  armb  “152*0  amb  rirrnbn  trKba 

•  t  t  :  —  t  -:  t  :  •  :  —  t  :  t  •  :  !  ••  t  :  •  v: 

r;c”  mn  w-a  by  x-r.  nvn  b2-2T  ntss  b'»  ns 

••  —  :  ••  :  !—  ••  —  r  t  —  ••  t  •  t  •  :  t  •  :  — 

so’isi  r:i2  snn  nbwa  snn  ^ssprr  tibmi 

-mx  :  tpn  -ai-  bs  bi;-n  snssi  Tiasa  mrn  15 

-m  xnrs  n-yiT  ri:a  r— ;-t  ra  sms  rai  Tina 

...  tt  :  it  :  t  :  •  I  ••  it 

■•nra  fiTm  sn — fix-  srraa  vita  sms-  sr:a  '.in'  -2 
-m  srrn'si  xrvsa  npaia  -21  pa--  by  Tin-  r-ria* 1! 
pn  ‘as  sn-  -inb  am  -in-ap^a  linn-  man  r^na 


-ai*a  sapaa  srnsa  payab  nns  ■p-n?i  tcs  sn-  sb 
npsa  p-2!|j'c  -res  sres  -ax  snn:sb  :  sn-aa  srba  i6 
Tj-ina  -nn  ybya  rnbp  --;a  --ibn  nyaa  Ty-myi  "bina 


13.  ,  probably  an  incorrect  reading  for  ■'D‘i * *a'A'X  . — “OFF1 **  ,  seduced 
me,  Aphel  from  fi3?Z3  with  suffix.  §  26.  2.  a. 

14.  ■'n^X  ,  Aph.  from  XPX  .  For  the  pointing  see  §  4.  a.  and  §  2.  5.  b. 
— xfiri  ,  §  53.  1. — X'ln  ,  adverbially,  once. — xnio'n  XO^-ix  deadly 
poison,  §61.  1. 

15.  “1^'2‘1X  ,  1  sing.  Fut.  Pa.  from  .  The  lorra  is  perfectly  anomalous. 

Compare  iwx  instead  of  “lEX  . — rPSnf  ,  plur.  const,  from  F"!  . — F*F?  3 

1  Part,  from  -its 3  .  See  above  No.  II.  (7). — F5*T?  3  I  Part.  plur.  from  xno  . 

This  also  appears  to  be  a  masculine  form  like  F*!7?  3  §  35.  Schaaf  (Opus 

Aramaeum  p.  308,)  points  it  FD^  •  FFI  p.  q.  FF-  j  so  Schaaf  ibid.J  is 
understood,  making  it  future,  §  53.  1.  “  Operam  dabunt,  ut  percutiant.” 

They  shall  make  efforts  and  shall  bruise  thy  head,  i.  e.  they  shall  do  it  in¬ 

tently,  and  with  all  their  power  : — or,  they  shall  be  established,  etc.  taking 
the  act.  Part,  in  an  intransitive  sense.  Comp.  F.FrF  below,  and 

above  No.  II.  (15). — FI-Fn?  3  §  32.  note  2. — F.FF?  Kit!1!} ,  thou  shalt  be  es¬ 
tablished,  or,  perhaps,  thou  shalt  be  intent  upon  injuring  them. — r^D3*i  should 
probably  be  pointed  rP^F  .  See  No.  III.  v.  15. — ^3270,  this  use  of  Hha- 
teph  Pattahh  after  Seghol,  which  is  not  unfrequent  in  this  Targum,  is 
probably  the  result  of  mere  negligence  in  transcription. — xnp?F  i*  q-  ^PF  . 

16.  TFBW’p ,  for  ^B*iap  ;  and  ,  for  Tf'FF  •  For  the  pointing  of 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGTTMS. 


103 


dna  ma&i  :  wab  Tra,  trbir  mrr  am  n 

•  I  _  —  •  —  .  ••••••  ••  •  •  I  •  •  X  ••  I 

•  .  I  I  #  •••  •  •  •  *  1  •  • 

pmn-psn  s:b-s  -ts  ra  nbasi  prims  na-ab  nbap 
pb  rsnn  sbn  raa  sws  sr-b  n-sa  bwn  sb  narab 
naan  rnosi  raw  :  p-m  -ai-  ba  n-ba-n  bars  pain  is 
nas'  ons  -a  sra  -as  ban  sr-Py  r-  bia-ni  pb-na  -am- 
hiaw  sn-yaa  aPnra  sbn  -  panp  ra  ranna  iyaa 
bia-r  — t  niy-ba  -ybr  -a  Dip-3  s-a  -ssn  sac? 

•  •  •  -  •  ••  •  ••  •  *  •  I  —  •  I  ••  t  T  ••  —  *  T  *  • 

•  •  •  •  •  I  •  T  •»  •  I  • 

-:a  ra  panp  pa  pnasr-  pan  synsn  sfra  ra  fra 
ny  sr'ra  bia-m  p~-  ca  niy-ba  :  sn-ya  -:a  rap  sfrs  19 
snaybi  rn:s  s-®?  Dins  rs-pans  nrap  snsyb  ninn-rn 
ssaPini  srn  -,n-ab  Dip-ab  n-ny  ms  sw  ran  ainn 
dip  Dns  snpi  :  san  srn  Di-a  masn  na  ba  by  20 

nayi  :  sPs  -:a  ban  sa-s  r-n  s-rn  dps  “in  n-nres  21 

—  x*  — r  *  ••  •  x*  T  •  —  — •  •  — •  x  •  •  •  •  •  ** 

I*  I  •  •  I  •  I  •  •  I  •• 

srn  pPa  ra  -p-n  rpiab  n-nmsbi  onsb  D-fnbs  - 
inbmPsn  frrrsiP  Dbn  fn-nPa  pPa  by  naa  nbPsn 
fanp  rPaPa  -n  s-asbab  o-nbs  -  nasi  :  frP-absi  22 
-aPa  -n-n-  s;sn  saa-.n  synsa  -n-n-  mn  Dns  sn 

t  •  :  r  r  ;  t  ;  t  :  —  :  —  •  :  t  tt  t 

aa  ra  sPnsab  ryn-n  naa  Dip-ab  rn-nan  saina 
-b-sa  D-pi  -n  sin  n-s  n-nn-pa  sniSD  naa  ibs  P-ab 

)-  •  ;  -1— :  —  •  tt  :  •  — ;  •  •  : 


these  and  similar  forms,  see  §  7.  a.  (2). — Tpina,  contracted  from  , 

and  so  Buxtorf  points  it,  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  c. — 13*1  ,  an  obscure 

passage.  Lit.  he  shall  rule  over  thee,  to  do  justice  and  to  commit  sin ,  i.  e. 
as  I  understand  the  Targumist,  whether  he  does  right  or  wrong. 

17.  nbnp,  §  12.  II.  1. 

19.  ,  for  ,  §  6.  a.  note. 

21.  nb’iix'n,  which  he  (the  serpent)  put  off,  FTS 'O  from  himself. 

22.  ■htt?  ,  for  “’XT’rn  ' nu3  if  he  had  kept. — frrrrpQ  ,  1  s.  Pr.  Pe. 
with  suff.  3  m.  s.  §  16.  2.  a. — ,  §  12.  I.  2. — ,  for  behold. — , 
Praeter  in  a  future  sense;  or  rather  both  this  and  the  participle  are  to 


104 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


“m:o  xrvrpsi  rra  “ita  xbi  by  wot  ■rab yb  iy  xti 

D;ir  xb  TJ  Dip  itn  XD22  ID  (TWiOT  Tiiby 
ti  “'in  ma  sa  rrx  rx  s~  x™  ib’x  •'■rs  p  dp-i 
b;x‘  -{tj-  xn saa  DPbx  "  n-oim  :  rabsb  iy  d'OT  23 

—  T  *  !•••••  *f*  •  •  •»  •  T  •  ••  •  —  •  I  1  •  -  •  __  _  ^ 

1  •  I  •  •  *•  ••  |  •  •  r  » 

:  prp  ^Drxn  xnaix  ir  nbsab  rwria  "add  doti 

-'It—-  t  :  :  —  -  •  :  t  •  :  *t  : 

■e  lru/t‘4^  cmL"  U'  rf  ,QArt*»-u|N-  A^- (U4u cw  HJbJdkA 

y\  ya  yaipb  wn»«  ng**  ■nicxp  ya  dix  n;  tot  24 

HjOMC^  Olrt'Jb  hiA,  ti^.1  '  Unfcl^ 

xr-2  rppx  xr— x  x~d  xaby  x*o  xb  -y  dip  x-d-pp 

lEtStiJP-  .  W'"’ 


T  *  *  *  «  .1 — £  *  •  f.  T  •  ■  . ;  «• "™ .  •  •  * 

Lr^- y'v 4  y  CMi"  <*  ■*''•  -  .  OW*- i*(£«  yjbuX-^  n° 

- 

I  ••  •  J  ••  1  ••  J—  •  •••••  >  —  j  ••  •  •  I  •  j  -jr  ,  ■  —  • 

ctix-Ctt- ‘":rr  kaMC'  OidaM^  oaJ  -  LivulWc  (Uu- 

rap?  *nn  *6  \(t.  t_; 

!  f  twUX^uJ  .  ^  '  ■  . 

2r,bs  'i  bp  x:b*x  tb  p  "ppretri  pD^p  x‘p"kb  -pyi 

1  C«/Vw>«JX.  <Ur»V^dL  h&Mj-  L.O/jjAj  IvU-tl 

■ppriaj  ajnsips  wpi  fpn  adra  wrt«  ]sb^n  tfvprn 


?Vvu  fuvi 


'jjt 5 


»  .  '  -.vU  •  '  •  *  <V  ■*  .  ?  ,.'WU.,  J  %/U*t*vv 

ritto  nbj^  ^nnhb  drra 

j  •  •  •  )..;«.  x  i  X  x  *  2  X**#  “  *  T  •  ••  •  y  —  •  — ■  ;  y  •  •• 

r ..  ,  U’  HU  .  t<ruX\  ■{  CL  Wt  UrvUn^Aj 

m  pd?  m  rp^pht  TOd  rpn« 

Icaaap  iL  «a  Jaam  c*j£tj£^ 

ipb^pi  pn^nn  ipp-jp  *rrm? 

/}•••..  Wtwwl'u.'  -1V-' y-  '■; .  IV  ;  \ :  -.  ;,  >&jr**AXAf-  k  \  <Ay\' 

XiTflDib  "i  ia'a  xnrpnxt  xsn  ib-x  otb  p  nnbib 

X  •  —  •  y  j  —  —  ••  TX  '  l  *  —  j  t  *”  •  ••  ••  I  •  y  j  —  j 

VsaIa  ^\L  m  to  m  •  to  ^  '  \^uC 

:  'hxn  xabpb  ^ni  nnix  ■’baaa  b^aai  D-p  pw 

••  x  :  x  :  — :  ••  —  :  x:x  ••  •:•  ••  —  :  ••  • 


be  taken  as  we  use  the  Present  tense  in  English,  expressing  a  general 
truth  : — or,  still  differently,  both  may  be  regarded  as  Subjunctives,  (l  use 
the  term  in  the  general  sense  which  it  has  in  Latin  grammar,)  if  he  should 
eat ,  etc.,  he  would  live ,  etc. 

23.  btx  and  (§  12.  II.  1.)  are  both  Praeters. 

24.  Npnp'n  ,  2d  Part,  from  bria ,  which  is  like.  Tseri  is  inserted,  like 

Qamets  in  ,  etc.  on  account  of  the  prefix  with  Sheva,  §  7.  d.  note. — 

P!'3','n  .  i.  q.  §  60.  1.  b. — xnirx ,  an  unusual  pointing  of  or  fit n tax  , 

(§  2.  7.  c.)  emph.  state  from  xiax  . — ,  §  7.  d.  note.  ,  Inf.  of  ‘fi'n  . 
— yinn,  with  them ,  by  means  of  them. — Pnbsh,  1  Part.  Pe.  The  law  is 
better  to  him  who  observes  it. — ip ,  than ,  §  64.  1.  a. — ,  either  this  word 
should  be  pointed  or  it  may  be  considered  as  a  different  form  of  the 

adjective.  “  The  law  is  better,  to  him  who  observes  it,  than  the  fruits  of 
the  tree  of  life,  which  Jehovah  hath  prepared  for  him  who  keeps  it  [the 
law],  that  he  may  be  established,  and  may  walk  in  the  paths  of  the  way 
of  life,  in  the  future  world.” 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


105 


III.  The  same.  Gen.  3. — Jerusalem  Targum. 

:  arri  sspsirt  spdm  m  :  ribttsa  rinb  m?7  7 

T  ,  *  T  ‘  *  •  T  •  •  •  "  “  •  \  '  |T  •  •  *  I  •  T  T  * 

rrm  iwbs  an  srb  imi  mxb  ombx  “i  «iara  sow  s 

••  t  :  t  :  —  t  ••  - t  t  ;  •  v:  t  :  —  t  :  •*  t  * : 

rrbi  -qd  ns  its;  raiD  sis'ba  siinn  tolicrt  "dip  -ba 
:  lor  r—p"  sr-j;”  s~  in  m:a  rm  sms  'aip  •:; 
s*nps  ■nasi  am’sa  r?b  snnsi  s"ii  i-tp  -d  m  15 
■ppaui’  id;  Tpv1  ■j’bpp'i  tjio'jb  ■jma;  ■p-sa  •pin; 

inn  snips  i-n t  sbi  sn'iisn  sr’aa  snnsi  sna 
in;  Dm  ■jinn;  jnaa;  ■pnppm  ;inn;  rip;;  psna 
liny  Dm  i;s  in-1  sb  snn  nbi  srnsi  sn:ab  ;os 

I  •  •  :  t  ••  v:v  t  t:  •  It  :  t  :  •  :  tt  ;  •  t 

ami  app  Cjicd  topm  snneo  msab  pbsb  pbs  -;:n 


7.  *11251  instead  of  the  regular  form  11251 .  The  almost  entire  confu- 
sion  of  Pattahh  and  Garnets  and  even  Hhateph  Pattahh,  which  prevails  in 
this  Targum  and  that  of  the  Pseudo-Jonathan,  appears  here.  It  will  not 
be  necessary  to  notice  it  in  every  instance.  See  §  2.  2.  The  reader  will 
also  observe  the  singular  character  of  this,  so  called,  Targum.  It  is  evi¬ 
dently  rather  a  collection  of  Rabbinical  and  traditionary  remarks  on  the 
text,  than  a  translation  of  it. —  They  made,  etc.  This  perhaps  implies  the 
author’s  opinion  that  Adam  and  Eve  made  them  by  divine  direction.  He¬ 
brew.  The  Lord  God  made,  etc. 

3.  In  the  strength  of  the  day — probably  incorrect,  although  the 
Hebrew  nil  has  sometimes  a  signification  analogous  to  this.  See  Josh. 
2:11. 

9.  n*n21 ,  which  I  have  created.  Regularly  Fni2l .  So,  especially  in 
the  Targum  of  the  Pseudo-Jonathan,  133 $ ,  with  the  prefix  1 ,  becomes  ia»1 . 
The  punctuators  probably  had  in  mind  the  analogous  Hebrew  form,  §  7.  d. 
note. — *'b.a  ,  Pass.  Part.  Pe.,  §  23.  1.  note,  is  manifest  before  me. — ^2D  ,  1st 
Part.  Peal. 

15.  ‘TPI,  And  it  shall  come  to  pass.  The  Yav  conversive  does  not  ap¬ 
pear  in  Chaldee. — y^ana,  Part.  Ithpa.  from  J12 ,  full  orthography,  §  12.  II. 
4. — *£n  a ,  masc.  pi.  Act.  Part,  from  6tna,  §  35.  But  Schaaf  (Op.  Aram.  p. 
333,)  points  it  regularly,  “piia  . — rP23,  §  12,  I.  1.  c. — 5iaa,  1st  Part.  Aph. 


106 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


Tib  ■pTmi  rmw  :  arrm  a3bw  ■nat'S i  is 
Trip  ra  parra  w=a  iasi  ms  '3?  sis  'ssm  sub?  tv 
“ssm  ssb?  rv  bmab  st?s  ra  Trip  aianro  sb  " 

sms  'tb  T-3  vir-  bttm  t  mrba  ^br,  ws  mp3  s~? 

t  :  —  ••••!•  |  T  :  — :  . 1  :  t  t 


t  : 


n  wa  mp3 

fcTQ 

T  T 

■3  ‘’TP  1 

-  ••  v:  v  | 

‘“am 

i  sra*a 

—  t  ; 

“CISC  22 

IT  u  A  taws  OB  rru ua 

»  )  J  71  ij 

J 

to  aata 

rms  rrn?  aava  rzwz  ttt  s:s~  “a  irn 

I  I  •  •  r  :  ••  :  •  •  •  :  t  —  I 

rs  air-sab  sm  na^is  mpn  trsa  rrsa  apab  rs'ac 
n?  Dip  ran  sr:r.  ra  trrp  -intOT  aa  lira b  aa 
btoh'T  a:b"tf *  *ts  ?a  “inb  ottst  ao 


t - : 


from  35*^73  . — xri33b;  suffix  pleonastic,  §  47.  2. — *pb£<b  *pbx  ,  £/iese  to  those,  i.  e. 

one  to  another. — xnps’ij,  “  Prave  utputo,”  says  Buxtorf  Lex.  art.  xnosd  . 

But  whether  the  reading  £<n*PS'3j  (or  xnOBd)  be  admitted  or  not.  the 

meaning  is  still  doubtful.  Buxtorf  renders  it  a  trampling  under  foot,  con- 

culcatio.  Walton  gives  incolumitas ,  (probably  deriving  it  from  sXEUi  in  the 

Rabbinical  sense,  to  he  quiet ,  at  peace  ;)  which  the  connection  seems  to  fa- 

* 

vor. — “iE*P,  suff.  pleon.  §47.  2. — '‘And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  when  the 
descendants  of  the  woman  shall  diligently  study  the  law  and  do  the  com¬ 
mandments,  they  shall  be  established,  bruising  thy  head  and  killing  thee  ; 
but  when  the  posterity  of  the  woman  shall  desert  the  precepts  of  the  law 
and  not  obey  the  commandments,  thou  shalt  be  established,  biting  them  in 
their  heels  and  afflicting  them  with  sickness.  Nevertheless,  there  shall  be 
a  remedy  for  the  sons  of  the  woman;  but  for  thee,  O  serpent,  there  shall 
be  no  remedy.  Moreover  they  shall  apply  remedies  (?)  to  the  heels  of  one 
another  in  the  end  of  the  last  days,  in  the  days  of  king  Messiah.” 

18.  5  i-  e.  fctsnj* ,  the  earth  shall  bring  forth  abundantly. — £03  “'SXS'n , 

which  is  upon  the  surface  of  the  feld ,  i.  e.  the  grass. — ,  Part,  used  for 
the  Praeter.  Adam  answered ,  §  53.  1.  note. — see  the  notes  on  vs.  7 
and  9  of  this  chapter.  frO^a  ,  Let  us  not  be  regarded  as  though  we 
were  of  the  cattle ,  i.  e.  cattle.  Comp,  the  French  des  betes ,  etc. — ^sbs,  for 
fcobs  §  23.  1.  note. 

22.  n?a  adds  nothing  to  the  sense. — pEllX ,  see  XEX  in  Lex. — XttOS’ab, 

»  F-  r-, 

evidently  an  Infinitive  form.  Perhaps  it  should  be  pointed  £t!333’a,  §  12.  I 
4. — £ib  13?  ,  before  he  shall,  etc.,  or  while  he  does  not ,  etc. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TAEGEMS. 


10T 


■psigb  yg  irripDir  ^  hiiEKi  t™  rr  tid^i  :  Db?b  iri  24 
Kin:  Kb  13?  Dip  K-'irt-D  rm  ^brD  TOl  Krri  romn 


—  t  *t: 


xnsvi  osira  rpnxi  xtr-rix  x*z  73a  rsbx  ■pm  X-b? 

t  :  •  :  t  •  ••  I  !•  :  — :  t:  —  t:  !•:  )•:—  )••:  r  ;  — 


r  :  — 

■  D«U 

1 


pB  "ja  ■ppSBtr'!  pjp  N;]p?b  xn?3  ij3t}X 

D2“s  *,pnx  7“  xiibys  xmixn  xrvsa  «sn  b y  x:b\x 
mao  pna  “box  X3'3ia  xannb  x"oto  xrn  x-mi-b 
jnsnnb  xppb  pjoa  frap  xp~  f  p>ipj  w|cs  *(pnx 
xaboo.  xtvPn  xnpsa  na  xb^  bo  snxi  xabob  rinsa 

t  :  —  :  t:—  :  tt  :  •  — :  t:  —  ••  t  :  t  :  — :  |  :• 

xaboo  nb  ^a:n  bo  xrriix  xti  x,am  ib'X  nrx  pn 
“nbsb  xrvnix  x-n  xoa  x:b-xo  Dpi  7“  pn 
:  ‘nxi  xobob  xs,m  ib-x  -■■©  t“  pn  xabya 

••  t  ;  t  :  — :  t :  |t  •  ;  !  )  ••  t  t  :  —  : 


24.  The  glory  of  his  presence ,  i.  e.  his  glorious  presence. — ‘p 
■p^ppb ,  these  two  expressions  are  doubtless  synonymous,  the  second  being 
explanatory  of  the  first,  which  sometimes  has  a  different  sense.  On  the  east, 
towards  the  sun-rising.  This  I  think  is  better  in  the  present  instance  than 
to  consider  “pp^ipb  ip  as  relating  to  time;  although  it  is  evident,  from 
other  places,  that  both  the  author  of  this  Targum  and  the  Pseudo-Jona¬ 
than  supposed  the  garden  of  Eden  to  have  been  planted  before  the  crea¬ 
tion  of  the  world.  See  the  next  clause.  Also  Gen.  2:  15,  Jeru.  T.  Gen. 
2  :  8,  Pseudo-Jon. — i:n  xb  *1$  □‘ijs  ,  two  thousand  years  b'fore  the  world  was 
created ,  he  made  the  law,  etc.  See  above  (22). — inpD'n  by ,  because  they 
kept. — JOppp  ,  1st  Part.  Pa.  fem.  sing,  from  .  §  12. 1.  3. — ,  plural, 
contracted  for  ;  ttppp  plpp  xbsx  ,  lit.  a  sword ,  destroying  from  both 

sides,  i.  e.  a  two-edged  sword. — 'p’nsi'a  ,  1st  Part.  Pa.  from  “i32. — ■’PiO , 
(Part,  from  xrx)  the  world  which  is  coming,  or,  as  we  more  commonly 
say.  the  world  to  come. — XT} ,  §  47.  1.  the  tree  of  life  is,  i.  e.  represents 
the  law. — pn ,  a  form  of  the  Praeter  (§  23.  2.  note,)  here  used  in  the  sense 
of  a  present  tense,  or  as  expressing  a  general  affirmation. — cp£ ,  §  4.  a. 
This  double  11  originated  with  an  unpointed  text,  and  should  not  have  been 
retained  when  the  points  were  affixed,  ttlbsb  for  innbsb,  see  above  (7) 
to  him  who  obeys  it. 


108 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


IV.  Story  of  a  dispute  between  Cain  and  Abel.  Gen.  4 :  8. — Jerusalem 

Targum. 

toe:  -d  nvn  x“o  'sxb  pissi  xnx  'ins  bn“b  rp  “tax'! 
■p  rrb  'ins  bnnb  Taxi  rp  '3?  x-z  'exb  rim-T! 
x'p'izb  nts  -os  -jnab  xbv  rrrix  oby  rrbi  p  rrbi 
xbi  xaby  “nanx  rams  xbr  swish  ia  y~srxb  xbi 


t  :  — 


ana  tpa  ipznp  bapnx  na  bbya  ia  “ana  swn  rama 
rrxi  p  rrx  rpb  naxi  ban  ay  xiyna  bap  ns  xb  aai 
nsnxbi  x'p'izb  au  pax  ma  r*xi  prix  oby  n*xi  an 
a-Q  nana  xn  ramai  xaby  'nans  rar-ai  x^ripa 

—  :  - :  !  •  :  t  :  —  •  ;  :  ■  I  :  t  —  •  —  •• 

■ja  ]apn  *naiy  ;i;tj  by  nana  xin  yaa  paly  •psa 
sa~a  bapns  sb  tpai  siyna  aa  aa-p  bapns  -n-n 
bap}  pix  ban  by  yp  Dpi  s-a  *asa  rasa  iirrrr  iim 


,  Inf.  for  Fut.  “  no  reward  shall  be  given  to  the  righteous  nor  ven¬ 
geance  taken  of  the  wicked.  The  world  was  not  created  in  mercy,  neither 
in  mercy  is  it  governed.  Why  was  your  offering  accepted  from  you  with 
favor,  but  [mine]  was  not  accepted  from  me  with  favor?  Abel  answered 
and  said  to  Cain  ;  There  is  a  judgment,  and  there  is  a  Judge,  and  there  is 
a  future  world,  and  a  reward  shall  be  bestowed  upon  the  righteous  [lit. 
there  is  the  giving  of  a  good  reward  to  the  righteous.]  and  vengeance 
shall  be  taken  upon  the  wicked;  and  the  world  was  created  in  mercy,  and 
in  mercy  it  is  governed.  But  it  is  governed  according  to  ihe  fruit  of  good 
works.  Because  my  works  were  more  upright  than  yours,  my  offering  was 
accepted  with  favor,  but  yours  was  not  accepted  with  favor.  And  they 
were  both  contending  in  the  open  field;  and  Cain  rose  up  against  Abel  his 
brother,  and  killed  him.” 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


109 


f 


V.  Marriage  of  Samson.  Judg*.  14. — Jonathan. 


:  'snabs  naa  rears  snns  STm  reanb  Tiaaa  nn;i  i 
reana  wn  snns  nasi  n'asbi  vnasb  'im  p'bci  2 

T*  I  •  •  ••  T  *  •  —  •  •  •  •  •  — •  —  •  ••  •  |  •  w 

•  •  ■  «  •  •  •  •  •• 

■ni~s  n'b  nasi  :  insb  'b  nr-  120  ispi  'snabs  reaa  3 
b'TS  rsn  snns  'as  baai  Tins  reaa  reb  sn  (nasi 

••  t  ;  —  ;  T  :  •  •  —  t  :  It-;  tj*  ••  t  ••  •  j 

nr-  -nasi  litiaiD  nasi  st-s  'smibsa  snns  asab 

tt  •  —  1  :  •  - t—  ••  t  :  •  :  •  t  :  •  -  •  ; 

rsT  sb  n'asi  'ffiasi  :  ana  nnap  s'n  'is  'b  20  4 

?  •  :t  t  ••  *  :  •  t  ••  :  v  v  :  •  ••  — 

nsnansb  'sa  sin  sspcin  'ns  sin  "  Dip  ia  'ns 
mu  :  bsnizra  "aba  'snabs  s'nn  sinsai  'snabsa  5 
s'ns  sni  nan  'anp  ns  insi  reanb  n'asi  masi  viaaa 

t  :  —  t  t  ;  •  r  :  •  :  ••  •  :  •  -  !  :  • 

ia  smap  nin  'nibs  nnai  :  n-nianpb  D'ni  Tins  ^2  a 
sbi  Pi'Ta  n'b  osnai  sna  rannan  sap  nnanni  "  anp 
mri'DH  annau  b^'Jrt  n ra  :  nh  rrtea b^i  b  7 

T*  •  •  •  •  — »  •  x  — •  —  •»  •  •  •  •  •  —  •  —  •  •  —  * 

•  •••  •  •  •  • 

re  'jnab  noi  napab  raT  laib  are  iriaaia  apa  s 
:  saain  real  s-nsn  snpsa  s; — ann  ssp  sni  s*_sn  sres 

t*'  t:  r  2  -  2  r  :  • 


tt  : - 


nibi  'nias  rib  bjsi  b'Psi  bra  bisi  rerea  renrei  9 
s*nsn  sn;ea  'ns  ilnb  'in  sbi  lips'  rinb  an"  reas  • 

t  ;  •  •  ••  -2  1  :  •  —  t  :  - I  :  —  •  ••  • 


t  :  —  : 


■(an  nasi  snns  pcs  bs  *nias  rn;i  :  saain  rro?  10 
n'r'  in  np  re  re  s  snpbis  rnas  p  'ns  Sanaa  liaaa  u 

••  t  —  t  t  —  !  •  :  t  |  v  r  ;  ;  •  |  :  • 


1.  ran,  see  ra  in  Lex. 

1  :  > 

2.  p^D,  §  12.  I.  1.  and  II.  1. — *120 ,  Imp.  from  253 ,  §  12.  II.  1.  a. — iiPX, 
see  Xfix . 

3.  rvnttjs  ,  3  sing.  fern,  from  *^2,  §  15.  note  2. 

5.  IPX,  3  m.  pi.  Pr.  from  XPX  . — Pn^ppb  ,  Buxtorf  gives  the  pointing 
nsiE'ip,  which  analogy  demands. 

6.  ,  •pianha,  Pael  forms  without  Daghesh,  §  12.  II.  3. 

8.  ,  Inf.  from  2D3  with  prefix  and  suffix. 

9.  Vra ,  §  21.  a. 


no 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


■pirgir  ]inb  :  rrw  ii ni  ■p?n  "j^snbn  *nsT.  12 

n^nizS  hb  nrr  n^n  arrwi  "ri-b  73  irra 
■(*nbm  ronbs  rnbn  vbb  inxi  -prosm  xTraa  rat1 


pnx  lannl  'b  nxmb  pbpin  xb  dxi  :  xaiabn  pbaax  13 


tt  —  : 


pi*  ICS 

mn  mb  maxi  xa'"b~  pbazx  mnbni  mcnbs  nrbn  'b 
kstbpeii  xbma  psa  xbaxa  tinb  nasi  :  nsrrtfr  inrn  14 
mm  :  pat1  xnbn  xnmin  nxmb  ib-m  xbi  x'brni  psa  15 
mbsa  m  'bmiti  rraftwj  mxb  maxi  nxraiD  xaim 

i  •  —  -  •  •  —  I  :•  —  •  :  - :  -  t  t  •  :  t  ; 

x*nz  max  rrs  m  pn'  mpi:  xabi  xmmn  m  x:b  'mi 
•nib?  TiioaiD  nnx  real  :  x:bn  xarr  prrm  x:m 


t  : 


T  :  —  T  T  T 


cabin  16 


srm  xmrni  anam  xbi  nrxrizi  ainb  maxi 

•  •  •  •  T  *  ~  T  *  •  •—  •  ••  •  T  *  •  —  ••  •  —  —  -■  — 

•  I  •  ■  •  •  •  • 

Trim  xb  xaxbi  xnxb  xr  nb  naxi  xmn  xb  *bi  'ay 

•  ••  —  t  t  •  :  t  — ;  t  t  —  “i  -  t  ••  —  t  •  ;  •  — 

■jinb  mm  x*ai'  xyni 5  Tiiby  roni  :  pnx  pnpx  ipb)  17 
nx'im  mnpm  mx  nb  pm  nxyaio  xara  mm  xTira 

—  •  — :  ••  •:  t  •  — :  tt*:  t  :  t  -  t  :  :  • 

s 

fixyans  xarn  xmp  max  mb  maxi  :  nay  nab  xmmn  is 
naxi  x'^xa  trpn  mm  xizhma  'bn  na  xaaa  bya  xb  ny 


t  ;  — 


19 


mail  :  -min  iinnstix  xb  tfxz  pnpna  risbibx  ii'nb 
lima  bapi  ilbpaxb  nnm  "  trip.  ia  xrnna  nm  miby 
ixpmb  xmazx  ami  limm  n'  mcr  x™  rnbn 


12.  ‘Jibtaxx  ;  Buxtorf  points  it  “pbuxx  . 

13.  (HSISOiaa .  Fut..  1  pi.  with  suff. 

15.  ta|VvniH  ,  Imperative  Pael.  §  12.  I.  1. — that  he  may  tell. — T’pia , 

Aphel  from  . — xansiasDTsbn  ,  is  it  to  try  (perplex)  as  ?  For  the  ending 

n*i  see  §  16.  2.  c.  and  for  the  prefix  73  ,  §  12.  I.  4. 

16.  X7PITJ }  while ,  etc. 

17.  f^npnii ,  3.  sing.  fern.  Praet.,  with  suffix,  from  pn^i . 

IS.  Nrnj5,  see  in  Lex. — bra  Inf.  from  bbs? . 

19.  ‘j'irp’nt ,  contrary  to  the  analogy  of  Chaldee,  but  according  to  that 
of  Hebrew. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


Ill 


liirria  nrs  nra  :  'ton  rrnb  p-bp^  rmri  pj'prri  xrryin  20 

:  rrrnaiia  rrm  mamb 


t  -:  — 


VI.  Prediction  of  Messiah's  kingdom.  Ps.  2. 

■j'22-p  (2)  :  sMp’nc  paia  K^aa?  y'OSina  nab  i 

•’Slab!)  '■  Dip  anab  Nina  tt-snrr  xaiDbizr,  xy-s  "aba 
:  Tinnibiobid  sssa  pfetsyi  lirrmox  tr  mro  :  srrrtfc  by  3 
bba-  ri'p]  (5)  :  rinb  wrr  "i  snarg  ihv  s-aaa  a-n-?  4 
•aba  'tvai  asi  :  res  bna*  rrjjrai  trspw*?  rinb  6 
ids  a-an  ~as  "i  xa'p  -yrax  :  'uiipa  “fits  by  nraa*  7 
msi  aa  'ra  :  Tima  ri  aar  texa  nssT  rax  -b  xaxb  8 

i  ••  v  :  •  •  :  4  1  t  ••  :  J  ••  t  •  ;  t  t-  ;  :  —  •  t  — : 

Vfiisnn  :  xr~x  '5*0  aiabis  irmnxi  iraonx  x-aar  a::  9 
jvaba  ris^i  ;  rsyinn  irsi  1a  irn  xbnsi  xitnna  ten  10 
xbnia  *•  Dip  ribs  :  xyix  hTj“  snffa  iib'ap  “barax  u 
riiainm  ra-r  xabi  x:sb7X  7b-ap  :  xnavo  ibn  12 
■paci  bsb  rrnva  man  Ty-s  lirrr  bwa  xmix 

I  •  1  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  •  T  • 


20.  srnairib,  to  the  person  who  was  his  companion. 


2.  *pg*?p,  1st  Part.  plur.  from  Dip.  See  the  Par. — X'rna,  Inf.  Pa. — 
^dtq  ,  Inf.  Pe.  from  x:£3,  §  18.  note  1, 

4.  by  ellipsis  of  the  pers.  pron.,  he  who  sittelh. 

7.  ,  Vocative;  O  thou  beloved,  etc. — i”iX3T ,  emph.  masc.  “  Tu  mihi 

purus  es Buxtorf. 

9.  ‘i’9 .  see  1X72  in  the  vocabulary. 

11.  i^SE  Imp.  Pa.  2.  pi.  from  . 

12.  xnpx  “j'HDinril ,  “  et  amiltatis  viamf  Walton.  Bnt,  the  words  are 
certainly  susceptible  of  the  sense  expressed  in  Hebrew.  Buxtorf,  (Lex. 
under  the  word  'idx),  cites  several  examples  in  which  Tpiri  has  evidently 
the  intransitive  sense  to  perish. — lin-H ,  Fut.  from  -nil. — fT>3lB5  suffix 
pleonastic,  §  47.  2.  Comp.  Heb.  "HUTX . 


112 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


VII.  The  praises  of  Jehovah.  Ps.  8. 

xnnattisin  ras  antes  by  arnsnsb 

•TJ  TJ-J  *  •  ••  5  -  S  T  •  -  TT-; 

xyx  xbisa  naira*!  wjts  b-bn  nas  xssiai  xnbx  “  2 
SFiDPiES  xmim  xpabw  ffisa  :  tom  to  b'p  pit  sr_r-p  3 
b*iaa  :  aaiwi  t«3P  bpn  xbmb  Tpm  bb:.a  xa  tetiw  4 
:  xro-prix  m  toasbi  torro  pnsasx  *nai?  Tara  ransp 
“iron  bwra  twi3  *2>i  'rai?  -bin  bwa  xra]  ^2  na 

—  :  •  :  tt  —  r  : • •  :  tt  —  — 

tnirnrai  top-to  tosxbaa  b'bp  rrim  xmsm  :  mb s 
rrinn  xnmra  xbis  pt  maim  wnabrax  s  rrsbban 

:  t  •  -  t  It:  ••  t  ;  •••::  — 

xmm  mas  (9)  :  xbpn  mpm  tinbi  rinbm  mirm  tx?  :  mb:n  8 

srtn  x.mbx  ■■  :  xa-1  ms  srbrrc  Ttrmbi  xa-  aai  10 

tt  •  tt  v:  t  :  t-  ••  t  :  •  I  ••  t  :  !  tt:  •  :  t-  ••  : 

:  xsnx  xbwa  pm  raraai  b'bn  naa 

T2—  t  :  ir;  —  —  :  •:  t; 


VIII.  Parable  of  the  vineyard.  Isa.  5  :  1 — 7. — Jonathan. 


prrrt  xa*ob 
bxmr*  "‘an 

••  t  :  •  •  • 


b-nap  bxmzrb  wa  rrnarax  bra:  “ax  1 

•  •  •  •«  T  *  •  *  I  •*  •  ••  •  —  — •  x  •  *  —  -  •  4 

•  •  •  •  f  •  •»  1  •  • 

'as  sra-ob  am  nrarain  pan  ormaxp 


t 


Title.  ‘Y'Vpb  ,  b  auetoris,  as  in  Hebrew.  The  mode  of  writing  this  name 
with  11 ,  which  belongs  in  Hebrew  to  the  later  writings,  is  in  Chaldee  the 
usual  orthography. 

2.  Tjte  ,  for  the  ordinary  form  !p'T ,  §  2.  6.  c. 

3.  .  Part.  Aph.  from  £*13? ,  enemies. 

4.  ’n  b^'Q  ,  probably  this  rendering  originated  in  the  false  supposition 
that  the  Hebrew  *>S  is  necessarily  a  causal  conjunction.  It  should  evi¬ 
dently  be  considered  here  as  an  adverb  of  time,  when. 

8.  nin,  const,  for  emph.  §  60.  1.  note  3. 


Instead  of  the  fine  poetical  allegory  of  Isaiah,  we  are  here  presented 
with  an  interpretation.  The  Targumist  has  not  simply  translated  the 
words  of  the  prophet  into  Chaldee,  as  he  has  generally  done,  but  has  trans- 


■EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


113 


acnasi  D~i  n^n  arena  rinb  rrnrr 
rirrm  "ohpa  xmai  x-ma  isa  asaa  ■psna-pi  iwtj" 
frari  maxi  Tirrxuri  by  xnsab  rrnrr  Taia  &xi 
“iax  x-z:  :  Timmy  iimxax  rexi  imp  raa  Tim'y 
znab  pa  xbi  xmix  ia  vna  bx-r-  n-a  xn  rinb 
ia  imp  xi'i  pa  m  ifflfi'  raxi  Dbiaim  urr  pa 
rinb  may  xbi  ^ayb  n'y  layab  max  xza  na  :  ray 

!  :  ••  — :  t  ;  •  — :  —  :  v  :  - - :  t  t  —  •  — 

:  Timaiy  imxax  iisxi  rau  p-ap  inayii  max  -m  xa 

••  t  •  :  —  I  •  :  1  •  t  I  •  t  I  :  :  -  :  - - :  I  ••  — 


2 


lated  the  allegory  into  plain  language  Still,  the  extract  is  curious,  and 
worthy  of  a  perusal.  As  it  differs  so  considerably  from  the  original,  I  sub¬ 
join  the  Latin  translation  of  the  London  Polyglott. 

11  Dixit  propheta  •  Cantabo  nunc  Israeli,  qui  comparatus  est  vineae, 
semini  Abrahae  dilecti  mei,  canticum  dilecti  mei,  vineae  suae.  Populus 
meus,  dilectus  meus  Israel,  dedi  eis  haereditatem  in  monte  excelso,  in  terra 
pingui.  2.  Et  sanctificavi  eos,  et  honorificavi  eos,  et  sustentavi  eos,  sicut 
plantationem  vitis  electae;  etaedificavi  sanctuarium  ineum  in  medio  eorum, 
Altare  quoque  meum  dedi  ad  propitiandum  super  peccata  eorum  :  et  pree- 
cepi  eis  ut.  facerent  opera  bona  in  conspectu  meo,  et  ipsi  inique  egerunt  in 
operibus  suis.  3.  Propheta,  die  eis  :  Ecce  domus  Israel  recesserunt  a  lege 
et  nolunt  converti.  Nunc  habitatores  Hierusalem  et  viri  Juda,  judicate 
nunc  judicium  inter  me  et  populum  meum.  4.  Q,uod  bonum  dixi  utfacerem 
populo  meo  quod  non  fecerim  eis?  et  cum  praeciperem  eis  ut  facerent  ope 
ra  bona,  quare  ipsi  fecerunt  opera  mala  ?  5.  Nunc  autem  annunciabo  vobis 

quod  ego  facturus  sum  populo  meo.  Tollam  majestatem  meam  ab  eis,  et 
erunt  in  direptionem  :  conteram  domum  sanctuarii  eorum,  et  erunt  in  con- 
culcationem.  6.  Et  ponam  eos  derelictos:  non  erit  eis  sustentaculum  nec 
fulcimentum  ;  et  erunt  transmigrantes  et  derelicti.  Prophetis  quoque  man- 
dabo,  ne  prophetizent  super  eos  prophetiam.  7.  Quia  populus  Domini  ex- 
ercituum  Israel  est,  et  viri  Juda  plantatio  laetitiae  ejus.  Et  dixi  ut  face- 
rent  judicium  et  ecce  facti  sunt  calumniatores ;  dixi  ut  facerent  justitiam, 
et  ecce  ipsi  multiplicant  peccata.” 

1.  Fpnauix  and  pleonastic  suffixes,  §47.2. — "’Elnn ,  my  beloved , 

1st  Part,  from  on*y. 

3.  .  contracted  form  of  the  act.  part.  m.  pi.  from  ,  §  35. — SHE 

Inf  from  U*n. 


8 


114 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


-’235b  'is&xb  tw  mot  rr  rtob  753  'T>&  wssi 

•  •  •••  I  •  I  •  •  I  • 

:  iir-ib  pirn  •rimc’ipa  n-z  nnx  izzb  pirn  Tinsa  ti»® 
■j-babza  'p'rr'.  pano?  sbi  -jSnzrios  sb  -piiptn  ■jsejKjsn 
-s  :  rs-z:  p-'bz  pa:rr  sbi  -pss  x~z:  bzi  pp'otzP 
srrvnm  xzz:  mrr  zar  bsrz-  n-z  nisza  maz 

••:  :  v  :  t  :  •  t  :  t  v:v  **t  :  •  ••  t  :  t  :  —  — 

pizzn  : — ax  peas  was  sm  iiw  rmaxi 

:  "pain  “japE  arn 


6 

7 


IX.  Extract  from  Isaiah’s  prediction  of  the  Messiah.  Isa.  52  :  13. — 

53  :  2. — Jonathan. 

»»?  (M)  :  snnb  dipnp  nop  m-r  smcia  nzz  nbz^  an  13 

T  #  \  y  T  !“  I  "  •  *  •  **•*•  •  T  *  •  *  •  - 


z-z  t]sn  nvn  , 


rxzc  pav  bx-r-  rrz  ~-b  -.-zzz 


pxzc  razz  -raz1'  iz  :  xAx  zza  pnvn  rinpn  x-zaz  15 
abn  px  ‘irate  bz  finpr  pzbz  ppnzr  'nibz 
I'a-ri  “z  :  sibsrca  vao  ab-ri  iin  -pnb  sia'rntia  1 
:  ra-bsna  r-  vra  ""  xrrfiari  zm  ciipni  a*r  armfcob 

— !  :t:—  t:  :  — :  M  :  t  tt:  :• 


5.  Inf.  from  7T3.  See  the  Par.  It  is  treated  as  a  noun,  plunder , 
and  the  corresponding  word  in  the  parallel  passage,  is  a  noun. 

6.  ■pbttbuE ,  Pass.  Part.  Palpel  from  . 

7.  '|wDt3,  Aph.  1st  Part.  plur.  from  S<jb ,  §  35. 

13.  efinb  ,  see  in  the  vocabulary. 

15.  iiiOSnsja,  they  have  told ,  for  has  been  told,  or  rather,  in  the  present 
instance,  had  been  told ,  §  56.  2.  b. — lin  itn  ,  what  had  not  been  told  them 
they  have  seen ,  etc.  The  Latin  Vulgate  and  Syriac  versions  agree  with 
our  Targumist  in  rendering  these  verbs  in  past  time,  they  have  seen ,  they 
have  considered ;  the  LXX  and  the  Arabic  version  give  the  Future  tense, 
as  does  our  common  English  translation.  The  Hebrew  verbs  are  both  in 
the  Praeter  tense. 

1.  •p’a^n  ,  see  t]*ipn*i ,  lit.  and  the  strength  of  the  arm  of  Jeho¬ 

vah’s  power.  Comp.  §  61.  1.  and  note  1. 


EXTRACTS  FROM  THE  TARGUMS. 


115 


nbiriai  ib'iOl  irrsi  rzbzbi  xn  'm'aip  xp"::  iOim  2 
syiiu  sirup  rnbin  Ti:*C'  is  ns  vira  b 9  '“iuhiiB 
na'S  rrnira  sb'  nmn  abih  irn  sb  rrb  sd,-s  iystt 

-  ••  ;  t  :  ••;•••  t  ••  r  *  t  •  :  t 

:  ira  banc'  rram  bsi  sim  xurnp  tt  m  cinn 

- - ;  •  •••:-:  t  :  ••  •  r  :  »  •  ••  •  :  v 


X.  Aphorisms  of  Solomon.  Prov.  10  : 1 — 12. 


sb  (2)  :  srmb  yana  sbac  ansi  nas  'in:  sa'an  -a 
;  siD'3  stria  1a  s'asa  snpia:  icnsn  'iris  rima 
:  wna  •y&n  sr;pi  sp'iai  si'issa  snbs  -spa  sb 

I  :  •  ••  •  —  ;  tt:  ••  :  >r  •  —  :  r  r  v:  1  —  t 


:  rinb  sinsa  siissi  sin  s'ai  sraab  s::aa  snaaca 

1  :  t  :  —  :  t  ••  r  :  t  •  t:—  t;-:  t  :  —  ;  t 

sa  sisna  Irani  sin  s:nbsio  s”  sa'pn  rrbsi 

t:  t  :  -  :  l  ••  t  :  tt::  t:  t  :  :  —  ••  t  : 


1 


3 

4 

5 


2.  xn-in-1,  §  23.  Note  2. — ,  §  33.  h. — in  the  land  which  was 
in  need  of  him ,  i.  e.  of  the  mentioned  above,  the  Messiah.  But  the 

passage  is  quite  obscure,  and  the  more  so  as  there  is  nothing  in  the  origi¬ 
nal  corresponding  to  this  phrase. — bD’n ,  so  that  every  one  who  sees  him  shall 
attentively  consider  him. 

In  the  remainder  of  this  chapter,  so  beautiful  in  the  original,  we  are 
presented  by  the  Targumist  rather  with  his  own  views  than  with  a  trans¬ 
lation  of  Isaiah,  and  those  too,  expressed,  for  the  most  part,  in  a  dull  and 
sometimes  quite  obscure  manner. 

Title,  ‘’ibnp  ,  pleonastic  suffix,  §  47.  2. 

1.  “inns ,  instead  of  ‘HH1! ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  fcOH  ,  §  12.  I.  3. — 5<b30  for 
§  32.  note  2. 

2.  ■p“|pcpi ,  Part.  Pa.  from  "in1}. — Buxtorf  points  the  construct 
form  of  this  word  regularly  *nxix  .  — ,  §  60.  1.  note  2.— Part. 
Pa.  fern.  sing,  from  Fi2B  ,  §  2.  7.  c. 

3.  C)*inD3,  Fut.  Pe.  3d  p.  sing.  §  12.  I.  3. 

4.  Part.  Pa.  without  Daghesh  forte,  §  2.  7.  c. 

5.  rpbs'n  Part,  with  full  orthography,  §  12.  I.  He  who  cultivates,  viz.  the 
earth. 


116 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  II. 


Tin^sn^i  bs  ■pjmn  a  nra  :  awrraa  e 

T&n  saw  sro“Q  ■'p'^cn  wow  :  xsion  '©53  on&w  7 
:  "irona  trmsbz  xbrc*  twip©  bop'  »wab  oom  :  sra  3 
:  rrna  irnmia  lapsati  bra  swa-ana  tibna^  9 

w*iaa  an  !  “mwa  tri-iiaisa  srbei  xzx:  air  vria-sa  t aw  i8 
antno  :  xs'itari  'soa  finnasa  ■pws"  aa^ia  ,sm  12 

•  «  T.  •  •  I  •  r  •  •  • 

:  !(Mrm  sssoa  am©  rinba  ba'i  ■nan  aian 

t  t  -  :  ••  r  :  I  :  \  — :  •• :  *  — t  ; 


6.  j  §  23.  note.— ,  §  60.  1.  note  3. 

8.  imsb  D^n,  §  63.  5. — PPn'Bbn ,  plur.  from  MBb ,  §  39.  note  1. 

9.  Vrs ,  for  bn? ,  Fut.  of  b_Ttf  . 


PART  III. 


NOTES  ON  THE  CHALDEE  PORTIONS  OE  JEREMIAH 

DANIEL  AND  EZRA. 


No.  I.  Jer.  10  :  11. 

an  adv.  of  manner,  compounded  of  3  and  NJ'n  (dem.  pron.,  this ,) 
after  this  (manner.) — emph.  of  .  This  commutation  of  3?  and 
p  resulted  probably  from  a  pronunciation  of  5  in  this  word  like  the  Arabic 
£  or  nearly  like  our  g  hard. — *Pnx?,  for  “p — .  §  12.  3.  Pattahh  is  restored 
by  Darga,  a  conjunctive  accent.  This  is  not  usual,  although,  I  believe, 
similar  cases  are  not  wholly  wanting  in  Hebrew. — tilbx,  probably  in  appo¬ 
sition  with  x*nbx,  and  giving  emphasis  to  the  declaration,  u  they  shall 
perish.”  So  Yenema,  C.  B.  Michaelis,  Rosenmiiller,  etc. 

In  respect  to  the  authenticity  of  this  verse,  three  things  may  be  ob¬ 
served. 

1.  It  would  be  remarkable  that  any  author  should,  in  the  midst  of  a  dis¬ 
course,  insert  a  single  sentence  in  a  language  different  from  that  which  he 
generally  employed. 

2.  All  agree  that  this  part  of  Jeremiah’s  prophecy  was  composed  seve¬ 
ral  years  before  the  captivity,  and  consequently  before  the  Chaldee  lan¬ 
guage  came  into  use  among  the  Jews. 

3.  This  verse  interrupts  the  connection  of  the  preceding  and  following 
verses.  Verse  12  commences  with  a  participle,  iitos,  which  must  be  read 
in  close  connection  with  the  noun  with  which  it  agrees  in  verse  10. 
tinb  also,  in  v.  11,  has  no  antecedent  expressed.  “  Thus  shall  ye  say  to 
them,  etc.”  To  whom?  The  text  does  not  inform  us. 

u  Non  sine  ratione,  aut  temere,  stat.ueretur,  additamentum  esse  ab  alia 
manu,  tempore  morae  in  exilio,  profectum,”  says  Venema  ;  and  this  Ro¬ 
senmiiller  quotes  with  approbation. 

I  will  merely  subjoin  two  extracts  from  writers  of  different  opinions  on 
this  point. 

“  This  verse  is  omitted  in  one  *  MS.  ...  It  seems  probable  to  me  that 


*  526  Kennicott. 


118 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  III. 


some  public  teacher  during  the  captivity  .  .  .  had  it  inserted  in  the  margin^ 
and  perhaps  usually  read  together  with  this  section  of  the  prophecy  in  the 
assemblies  of  the  people,  in  order  that  the  common  people  might  have 
their  answer  always  ready  whenever  they  were  molested  on  the  point  of 
religion,  or  importuned  to  join  in  the  idolatrous  worship  of  the  Chaldeans.” 
— Dr.  Blayney  on  Jeremiah. 

“  This  verse  is  writ  in  the  Chaldean  tongue,  and  not  in  the  Hebrew, 
that  when  they  came  among  those  that  did 'worship  their  idols,  they  might 
openly  and  plainly  profess  the  true  God  in  that  language  which  the  ene¬ 
mies  understood  better  than  they  did  the  Hebrew,  and  that  in  such  kind  of 
language  as  this  ;  Let  all  thos.e  gods  perish  from  off  the  earth,  and  under 
the  heavens,  that  were  not  able  to  make  either.  It  is  an  imprecation 
upon  their  idols.” — Matthew  Poole ,  Annotations. 


No.  II.  Dan.  2  :  4 — 7  :  28. 

Ch.  II.  v.  4.  ■ytt  ,  Imp.  from  *on;.  See  the  Par. — "iex  ,  Imp.  Pattahh, 
§  15.  4. 

5.  and  “iBSt,  participles  used  instead  of  the  Praeter,  §  53.  1.  note. 
So  ‘iex  and  its  plural  frequently. — JO'nbDb ,  the  pointing  is  intended 

for  the  marginal  reading,  "'iS'nbs ,  the  regular  form  of  Dec.  VI.  The  Ke- 
thib  is  generally  pointed  by  Lexicographers  .  Perhaps  it  should 

rather  be  N^bS  in  analogy  with  the  other  declensions. — N'n'TK.  a  peculiar 
form.  It  is  probably  fern,  from  "HX  ,  2d  part.  Peal  from  “HN  ,  §  12.  I.  1.  d. 
The  —  would  regularly  be  impure  and  immutable.  It  is  here  treated  as 
if  pure  and  mutable,  and  the  Part,  is  varied  according  to  Dec.  III.  a. — 
*'D2!lS|tajiiin ,  Fut.  Aph.  from  3H?,  §  12.  II.  5.  For  the  suffix  see  §  16.  2.  b. 
and  Par.  II. — PI.  of  r-1?  with  suff.  2d  pers.  pi. — ‘pabPP,  3.  pi.  m. 
Fut.  Ithpe.  from  D*ib,  see  Par.  VII. 

6-  yinntt,  2.  pi.  Fut.  Aph.  from  wn ,  §  12.  II.  5. 

7.  ,  Emph.  H  instead  of  X  ,  a  substitution  very  common  in  the 

Biblical  Chaldee,  Intr.  3.  note ;  unless  this  word  should  have  been  pointed 
nnbs-i . 

y.  ‘pnsjajn ,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Keri  ynSB’n'rn ,  2.  pi.  m.  Pr. 
Ithpa.  from  *]ET .  The  Kethib  should  be  read  in  Aphel,  VnSETfi,  or 
like  the  Heb.  Hiph.  yinratrj 3HDS ,  1  sing.  Fut.  from  2H^,  §  20.  4.  and 
§  2.  7  .a. 

10.  ,  see  above  on  verse  5. 


NOTES  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE. 


119 


12.  tj  2)5*1  D52,  synonymous  terms,  used  to  heighten  the  idea.  Perhaps 
however  t)2£p  may  be  understood  as  expressing  more  violent  anger  than 
0:2  . — nininb  ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  13$  ,  perhaps  derived  from  an  obsolete  verb 
Pe  Yodh. 

14.  “,'p,13nb ,  Accusative,  §  60.  3. 

16.  ^rn3“7 ,  Fut.  of  ‘jns  with  the  force  of  a  Subjunctive  in  consequence 
of  the  *1‘n,  that  he  would  give.  For  the  form  see  §  18.  note  2.  and  §  12.  I.  1. 

19.  ib a ,  Praeter  Pa-ssive,  §  13.  2. — Tp2  ,  Pael,  §  12.  I.  1.  h. — ttbxb,  Accu¬ 
sative,  §  60.  3. 

20.  fctliib,  for  N'llpb,  Fut.  with  b  and  an  optative  sense,  §  50.  2. 

'  22.  ,  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  ,  deep,  inscrutable  things ,  §  41. 

note. — iininpp,  Pass.  Part.  Pa.  fem.  pi.  emph.  from  inp  . 

23.  "qnsnin ,  2.  m.  sing.  Praet.  Aph.  from  31?  with  suff.  1  p.  sing,  see 

Par.  II. 

25.  b3Dp  ,  Aph.  from  bb3  ,  §  12.  II.  5,  and  §  2.  7.  a. — bi^Dlb  ,  this  Accu¬ 
sative  with  b  is  of  frequent  occurrence.  It  will  perhaps  be  unnecessary 
to  notice  it  again. — ■'I  in  the  beginning  of  a  speech  superfluous  like  the 
Greek  on  . — rnspfi ,  §  15.  4. 

26.  Tprnish  ,  art  thou ?  compounded  of  the  interrogative  fi,  “’rpx  and 
the  suffix  Tp— . — “pnsiiiib ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  31?  with  suffix,  §  16.  2.f 

27.  irninrib,  Inf.  Aph.  from  sjti,  §  23.  Notes  on  the  Par.  4. 

28.  K?nb,  must  take  place ,  §  50.  2. 

,  29.  *ipbp  ,  comp,  the  English  expression  “  thoughts  come  up ,  arise  in 
the  mind.” 

31.  in,  indef.  art.  §  29.  1.  note. 

32.  1?iin  ,  a  plur.  form,  see  "pin  in  the  vocabulary. 

33.  pnsp ,  part  of  them.  So  the  French  distributive  article  du,  de  la, 
etc.  The  punctuators  seem  to  have  considered  by?  as  necessarily  feminine. 
The  writer  doubtless  understood  it  to  be  common. 

34.  ,  Aph.  from  ppl,  3.  s.  f.  Pr.  segholate  form. 

35.  ropiirn*  Ithpe.  from  npd .— rntt  ,  §  23,  Notes  on  the  Par.  1. 

38.  or  (Keri)  1st  Part,  from  1*11. 

39.  X3ix  ,  here,  as  in  all  such  cases,  the  pointing  is  that  of  the  Keri. 
may  have  been  used  in  the  same  sense.  See  3ix  in  the  vocabulary. 

40.  31  n ,  3.  s.  f.  Fut.  Pe.  from  331,  Hhireq  of  the  regular  form  being 
lengthened  to  Tseri,  on  account  of  the  Resh. 

Ch.  III.  2.  The  best  critics  are  uncertain  as  to  the  precise  meaning 
rtf  several  of  these  words.  Neither  etymology  nor  usage  sheds  much 


120 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  III. 


light  on  them.  Those  meanings  which  are  considered  most  probable  are 
given  in  the  vocabulary. 

4.  ynaK ,  it  is  spoken ,  lit.  they  speak ,  §  56.  2.  d. 

6.  xrn "'p?  ,  lem.  Part,  from  "ip?  ,  burning. 

8.  *,irr>3“ip  sib?!K,lit.  ate  or  devoured  the  pieces  of  them ,  of  the  Jews. 
The  sense  unquestionably  is,  calumniated,  or  accused  the  Jews.  The  Sy¬ 
riac  usage  is  the  same.  The  Arabians  also  employ  the  phrase  to  eat  th 
fiesh  of  a  person,  in  the  same  sense. 

12.  ,  this  word  is  connected  with  snob ,  and  the  phrase  signifies,  as 
explained  in  the  vocabulary,  (see  under  D5I3 ,)  to  show  regard. 

13.  P?r?Pb  ,  Inf.  Aph.  from  fctn&t!  . — iprpn  ,  a  kind  of  irregular  Hophal  or 
passive  of  Aphel.  See  i<r$  in  the  vocabulary. 

14.  nappP. ,  the  regular  pointing  would  be  pa-'pp  .  Comp.  §  12.  I.  1. 
where  Tseri  and  Hhireq  seem  to  be  employed  almost  indifferently.  But 
the  changes  of  vowels  in  Chaldee  seem  hardly  capable  of  being  reduced 
to  rule. 

16.  iri  xb  ,  the  shade  of  meaning  seems  to  be,  C£  We  do  not  think  it  ne¬ 
cessary  to  return  a  favorable  answer ,  to  comply  with  thy  wish.” 

18-  ,  Optative,  §  50.  2. 

19-  P?.P  i  2  Part.  Pe.  from  Ktn  ,  literally  seven  times  more  than  it  had 
been  seen,  or  known ,  etc. 

21.  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2. 

24.  ,  Plur.  Part,  from  X35 .  See  Par.  IX.  Dec.  V.  a. 

% 

Ch.  IV.  3.  nb?3Pb .  Inf.  Aph.  from  bb? ,  §  2.  7.  a. 

4.  rbb?  ,  so  the  Kethib  should  evidently  be  pointed.  The  Keri,  'pb?  is 
a  contracted  form  of  the  same.  Comp,  nbb?,  Keri  rib?,  Dan.  5  :  10. 

9.  "HP?  ?  Ittaphal  Fut.  3.  sing.  m.  from  pT .  Here,  as  frequently  in  the 
poetical  style  of  the  orientals,  the  Future  is  employed  as  an  Aorist,  §  50.  1 

10.  PP3 ,  1  Part.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

11.  ,  Aph.  from  PP3 . 

12.  5313  3?  ,  Fut.  Ithpa.  from  533. 

13.  arrn? ,  §  12.  I.  1. 

14.  ,  Hebraism,  Intr.  3.  note  1. — bsd,  in  the  construct  state,  the 
base  of  men,  i.  e.  the  basest. 

16.  ,  from  KPta  ,  Keri  “na  from  “ia . 

19.  P“l3‘i ,  the  Keri  is  anomalous.  The  Kethib,  pointed  PP3P ,  would 
be  the  regular  2d  p.  sing.  m.  Praet.  from  nap  . 

28.  pnax  ,  see  above  on  3  :  4. 


NOTES  ON  THE  BIBLICAL  CHALDEE. 


121 


30.  PE&,  Praet.  3.  s.  f.  from  t)10. 

Ch.  V.  6.  ^ n  1 3 ti3 , 3  pi.  Pr.  from  with  pleonastic  suffix  in  the  Da¬ 
tive,  compare  v.  9. — ,  Part.  pi.  Ithpa.  from  Kid  No.  II. 

8.  Kldfil,  the  pointing  is  that  of  ttldsi. 

15.  sibsJi  ,  Hophal,  a  Hebraism  not  of  frequent  occurrence,  Introd.  3. 
note  1.  See  bbs1.  The  marginal  reading-,  without  Daghesh.  seems  to  be 
required  by  the  analogy  of  Aphel,  though  Peal  receives  Daghesh. 

16.  b3‘p,  point  the  Kethib  basin  .  This  and  the  Keri  bisn  are  both  in 
use  as  Futures  of  bay,  q.  v. 

20.  an,  Praet.  pass.  §  13.  2. — “PISfi ,  3.  m.  pi.  Pr.  Aph.  from  K15. 

25.  ibl  8333  ,  These  are  passive  participles  Peal,  the  third  and  fourth  in 
a  contracted  form.  §  12.  I.  1.  d. 

27.  KPib*>pn,  Praet.  Pass.  2.  sing.  m.  §  13.  2. 

28.  no*HQ  and  ,  Praeters  Passive  3.  sing.  f. 

30.  ip  id  3,  according  to  the  pointing,  and  to  the  marginal  reading,  thia 
word  is  an  adjective  in  the  emph.  sing,  agreeing  with  K3b?3 . 

Ch.  VI.  1.  ■pnan,  fem.  of  *piPi,  see  Par.  XI. 

2.  *p>ib  ^l ,  who  were  to  he,  should  he,  §  50.  2. 

3.  pi 3 ,  1  Part.  Pe.  §  12.  I.  1.  c. 

14.  ini  bK*3l  “p ,  as  "’1  occurs  so  frequently,  its  several  uses  should  be 
carefully  distinguished.  It  occurs  four  times  in  this  verse.  In  the  first  in 
stance  it  is  a  conjunction,  equivalent  to  the  Greek  on,  and,  like  that  parti¬ 
cle,  in  the  beginning  of  a  speech,  need  not  be  translated  into  English  ;  in 
the  third  it  is  the  preposition  of,  or  a  sign  of  the  Genitive  case  ;  and  in  the 
second  and  fourth,  it  is  a  relative  pronoun,  in  the  former  case  Nominative, 
in  the  latter,  Objective. 

15.  “’nibs?,  the  suffix  is  reflexive,  §  49.  1.  h. — Lit.  the  king  was  displeas¬ 
ing  to  himself  better  in  English,  was  displeased  with  himself 

18.  riril ,  an  irregular  Hophal  3.  sing.  fem.  Pr.  from  KPK  . — P33d  ,  Pr. 
pass.  3.  sing.  fem.  from  UW ,  §  22.  1.  note,  and  §  13.  2. 

19.  ‘’pibs;,  so  in  Latin,  verbs  of  taking  away  are  construed  with  a  Da¬ 
tive  of  the  person. 

24.*bx*:ib,  Accusative,  §  60.  3.  It  is  governed  by  fipostib . 

Ch.  VII.  3.  *p3d,  1  Part.  pi.  fem.  from  K3d. 

4.  Praet.  pass,  from  131-33  . 

5.  it3dbl,  113d,  the  Keri,  is  doubtless  the  true  reading.  The  Targuma 
employ  iup . 


122 


CHRESTOMATHY.  PART  III. 


\ 

15.  rv^anx,  §  12.  II.  2. 

20.  ,  §  12.  I.  1. — ■)£  '2'~\ ,  comparative,  as  in  Heb.  §  64.  1.  a. 


No.  III.  Ezra  4  :  8 — 6  :  18. 

Chap.  IV.  v.  10.  FI33>!3!I,  according  to  Gesenius,  equivalent  to  the  com¬ 
mon  expression  and  so  forth.  His  different  etymologies  do  not  however 
appear  entirely  satisfactory. 

12.  these  forms  are  both  feminines  in  the  emphatic 

state  from  ‘Tift  and  125*1X3 .  §  41.  note. 

14.  Nanba  ,  prob.  lit.  “  we  eat  our  salt  from  the  palacef  i.  e.  we  derive 
our  sustenance  from  the  royal  bounty.  If  the  sense  proposed  by  Buxtorf 
and  some  others  be  admissible,  xbaif]  must  be  taken  as  referring  to  the 
temple.  Seenb’a. 

18.  *njD  ,  Praet.  pass.  The  composite  Sheva  is  occasioned  by  the  *i . 

Ch.  V.  1.  ,  in  this  and  similar  forms  of  the  same  word,  N,  with 

the  pointing  of  the  text,  must  be  considered  otiant.  It  might  be  treated 
as  a  consonant,  and  receive  the  pointing  ttfcOas ,  K*i<‘ia3,  etc.  See  K'OS  in 
the  vocabulary. 

3.  nns,  const,  st.  from  nna  . — ftbbsiBb ,  Shaph.  from  bba  No.  I. 

8.  ,  Part.  Ithpe.  from  . — fYiaanE ,  Part.  Ithpe.  fem.  sing,  of 

the  same  form  with  the  absol.  masc.  Dec.  Ill.y. 

11.  vua,  §  26.  2.  a. 

13.  fctsab,  §  50.  2.  The  pointing  of  the  Keri,  (without  Daghesh,)  is 
doubtless  the  correct  one. 

15.  xia  ,  Imp.  of  xa3 ,  §  18.  2. 

Ch.  VI.  5.  Fut.  of  . 

15.  ,  Pass.  Part.  Shaph.  or  Praet.  Passive  from  . 

No.  IV.  Ezra  7  :  12 — 26. 

12.  ‘■PBS,  perfect  (peace),  according  to  the  common  Eng.  version.  Ge¬ 
senius  explains  it  as  a  term  of  respect  applied  to  the  person  addressed, 
and  renders  it  learned,. 

14.  '’fibs?  ,  for  ,  pi.  Part,  from  I33n  .  The  frequent  substitution 

of  Pattahh  for  Garnets  has  been  mentioned  before . 

24.  ,  strictly  2d  Part.  pi.  from  "jn3  ,  consecrated  persons,  hence, 

those  devoted  to  the  service  of  the  sanctuary,  Nethmim. 


VOCABULARY. 


•  »  * 


SX ,  nX  m.  a  father ,  irreg.  emph. 
X3X ,  with  suff.  it  takes  the  form 
SQX  ;  e.  g.  7p2X  thy  father ,  ‘Wax  , 
"»siax  his  father ,  xrnax  her  father , 
XM3X.  our  father ,  ■)13*I3N  your 
(masc.)  father ,  ‘jasiax  yozzr  (fem.) 
father ,  etc.  Instead  of  ‘’EX  my 
father .,  which  occurs  only  Dan. 
5  :  13,  the  emph.  X3X  is  elsewhere 
universally  employed.  Plur.  “inax 
const.  nnax,  emph.  xnnax  with 

T  T  -S  3  X  T  T  T  -I 

suff.  “’nnax  or  ■’nnax  my  fathers, 
etc.  with  the  suff.  of  either  sing, 
or  plur.  nouns. 

nx  emph.  xnx .  xn-’X  and  X33X  m. 
Dec.  IV.  b.  fruit. 

nnx  to  'perish. — Aph.  “nix  and  ‘lain 
to  destroy;  also  intrans.  to  perish. 
— Hoph.  “inin  to  be  destroyed. 

■jax  and  “|nx  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stone. 
nsx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  reward. 

X“iax  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  and 

r  j  * 

rnax  Dec.  III.  a.  an  epistle,  a  letter. 
“,PX  adv.  then.  With  a  prefixed, 
“pTX2 ,  idem. 
cnx  m.  pr.  .n.  Adam. 

Dpx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  also 
o^x  and  ct-'X  Dec.  II.  a.  also 
cnx  and  D'PX  Dec.  I.  b.  i.  q.  E'n 
blood. 

XEpx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  the  ground ,  the 
earth. 

“nx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  month  Adar , 
part  of  February  and  March. 

“nx  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  threshing-floor. 


m-  (l'ourid  only  in  the  plu¬ 
ral),  chief  judges,  senat  ors. 

X^n'iX  adv.  (i.  q.  aSpacrra)  carefully , 
exactly. 

snnx  c.  g.  Dec.  II.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb.  Sint 
with  X  prosthetic.)  an  arm. 

“jnnix  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  other,  another. 

■|Sb‘X  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  doctrine,  instruc¬ 
tion. 

*|E?ix  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  an  artificer ,  work¬ 
man;  a  maker. 

^SE^X  and  WEix  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  the 

T  T 

making  or  doing  any  thing ;  the 
thing  made  or  done. 

"isix  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  treasure;  place  of 
deposit. 

rnix  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  way ,  access. 

XPix  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  law. 

XtX  and  HTX  ,  2d  Part,  xtx ,  to  light , 
kindle. 

“nx  i-  q.  btx  . 

btX;  Fut.  b^P^,  Imp.  btx  ,  b^PX  and 
Ippx  ,  to  go  ;  to  depart. 

nx  m.  a  brother ,  irreg.  emph.  xnx, 
with  suff.  “’nx  or  nf]X  my  brother ; 
Tpnx.  thy  brother,  irnnx  (PHX 
Gen.  4  :  8,  Jer.  T.)  his  brother ,  etc. 
Plur.  with  suff.  ’’nx  my 

brothers ,  Tpnx  and  Tjnx  thy  broth¬ 
er  s,  "'ninx  his  brothers.  This  form 
is  distinguished  from  the  sing,  by 
Hholem  while  the  latter  has  Shu- 
req.  “pn^nx  ,  etc. 

"inx  to  lay  hold  of  take,  take  posses¬ 
sion  of  Ithpe.  pass. 


124 


lbs 


X'Tinx  and  X*nnx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a 

r  t  •  -: 

taking  possession ,  possession. 
iTnnx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  (verbal  from 
ffln  to  announce ,  to  explain ),  e.z> 
planation. 

f-Hviit  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  an  enigma. 
x:onx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  possession ;  in¬ 
heritance. 
prep,  after. 

‘’inx  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and  *pnx  Dec.  I. 

*  t:  t  »t  t:it 

b.  adj.  other ,  another. 

^inx  f  Dec.  VIII.  c.  that  which  is 
last;  extremity,  end. 
ynn&$  adv.  pinx  ‘is  at  last. 
‘piBi'nirnx  m.  pi.  Dec.  II.  (from  the 

o  ^-° 

Persian  a  satrap ,  perhaps 

with  the  prefix  excellence ,) 

p rinc ipal  governors. 

1I3X  m.  (in  the  sing,  like  Dec.  I.  pi. 
pHBX)  brier  ;  especially  the  haw¬ 
thorn. 

adv.  how?  ■p‘i3'1X [idem. 

•J^x  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  tree. 

X3^x  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  terror ;  fear. 
pX  conj.  =  Heb.  ex  if. 
i£?X  and  i.  q.  q.  v. 

nnX  or  ’’rpx  adv.  of  affirmation  (  = 
Heb.  123^  .)  there  is,  there  are  ;  there 
exists,  nr‘1x  I  have.  It  takes 
the  suffixes  of  plural  nouns.  Dan. 
2:11,  3:  14. 
pH=X  i.  q.  TpX  q.  V. 

53X  to  eat ;  to  consume. 

^X  adv.  not ,  especially  before  the  fu¬ 
ture  tense,  expressing  a  prohibi¬ 
tion,  etc. 

i*(K  eri  Ez.  5  :  15,)  and 

nibx  dem.  pron.  these. 

ttbx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  God.  PL  excel. 

▼  vs 

sometimes  as  in  Hebrew  D^fpbx . 
*l>X  interj.  i.  q.  *PX  ,  behold  ! 

^X  conj.  if;  interj.  oh  that,  utinam! 
*&X3  as  if. 

•b&x  and  pis*^>&X  or  psbifex  unless , 
comp,  of  *&X  ,  xb  ,  and  the  enclitic 
syllable  pS  ;  i.  q.  ,  if. 


and  *]^X  ,  or  fully  written  ppibx 
and  p£>X ,  dem.  pron.  plur.  masc. 
these  ;  those. 

f]^X  and  P)bx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  thou¬ 
sand. 

DX  f.  irreg.  emph.  XEX ;  with  suff. 
“EX  ,  etc. ;  plur.  'jfi'QX  ;  with  suff. 
■jinnnax,  (and  with  masc.  form 
pimax .)  a  mother. 

DX  conj.  if. 

X?3X;  f.  irreg.  (in  the  sing,  like  Dec. 
VIII.  a.  but  in  pause  *in73X ;  in  the 
plur.  piEX ,  rfniax,  etc.)  a  nurse; 
a  maid. 

X53X  and  ruax  fern.  Dec.  VII.  a.  in 

T  -  T  - 

sing. ;  plur.  pax  Dec.  IV.  a.  a 
cubit. 

X33X  f.  plur.  pEX ,  a  people,  nation. 

*jEX;  Aph.  pE"p  1°  believe ;  with  3  to 
confde  in,  trust  in.  Pass.  part. 
■jtprjE  certain ,  true  ;  faithful. 

*1EX  to  speak,  say  ;  to  command. 

Tax  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  lamb. 

"'DPWX  adj.  Dec.  VII.  b.  strong. 

“X  adv.  where  ?  whither  ?  “jaa  whence  ? 

X3X  ,  less  frequently  «13X  and  "'2XJ 
pers.  pron.  com.  gen.  I. — PI.  X3H3X 
we. 

p3X  pers.  pron.  3d  pi.  m.  they ;  them. 

Disx  and  W3X  adj.  and  sub.  Dec.  I. 
a.  violent ;  a  violent  person  ;  a 
robber. 

D3X  to  constrain,  compel ;  to  oppress 
the  mind,  occasion  anxiety. 

5]3X  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  C)X ,  face , 
countenance.  Dual  and  Plural 
idem. 

1233X,  (iT3X,  and  by  Aphaeresis  1233) 
m.  irreg.  emph.  XT233X ,  X123  Gen. 
3:20,  Pseudo-Jon.;  plur.  p!233X 
and  p!223  ;  const.  ‘'133X ;  man. — 
123  3X  13  idem. 

Pi3X. ,  (in  Bibl.  Chal.  !"tp3X ,  pointed 
like  the  other  form  which  is  em¬ 
ployed  in  the  Targums,  with  n 
in  otio.  The  writers  doubtless 
pronounced  it,  in  analogy  with  the 


125 


Heb  rew,  nrqx  .)  pers.  pron.  com. 
gen.  tfiou. 

frpX ,  i.  q.  fPX  ,  ye. 

nox  and  nDX  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  medi- 

T  - 

cine,  something  salutary. 

inox  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  band,  fetter. 

“IDX  m.  irreg.  emph.  X^DX;  pi.  fax, 
XiVtpX  ,  etc. ;  a  physician. 

133DX  m.  pi.  n.  Asnapper ,  perhaps 
the  same  with  Esarhaddon,  or  an 
officer  under  him.  He  collected 
the  Samaritans  from  different  na¬ 
tions  and  settled  them  in  the  land 
of  the  ten  tribes.  Ez.  4  :  10. 
Comp.  v.  2. 

X3“Qdx  (milel)  adv.  speedily. 

ipx  m.  Dec.  1.  a.  prohibition  ;  obli¬ 
gation. 

xiDx  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  chain,  band. 

T  T  Vi  ' 

■pin — ipx  m.  pi.  n.  Esarhaddon ,  son 
of  Sennacherib  and  king  of  Assyria. 

Diox  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (from  the  Latin 
strata ,)  street ,  way ,  path. 

SX  (by  a  double  commutation  i.  q. 
Heb.  VS .)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  wood. 

I.  C]X  conj.  also. 

II.  D|X  (contr.  from  £]3X)  m.  Dec.  IV. 
a.  face ,  countenance. — Xip  ipx 
surface  of  the  field,  i.  e.  simply  the 
field. 

XiplSX  m.  pi.  pr.  n.  of  a  people  set¬ 
tled  in  Samaria  and  subject  to  the 
Assyrians,  perhaps  the  Parrhasii. 

XippiSX  m.  pi.  and 

xipnoisx  m.  pi.  proper  names  of 
nations,  now  unknown,  settled  in 
Samaria  and  subject  to  the  Assy¬ 
rians.  Ez.  4 :  9. 

Dnsx  (only  Ez.  4  13,)  according  to 
Buxtorf,  treasury.  So  modern 
critics  generally.  Aben  Ezra  ex¬ 
plains  it  by  PixsiP,  expenses ; 
R.  Sol.  Jarchi  by  Dp,  tribute. 

S32X  f.  Dec.  II.  a.  (PI.  *j—  and  J— -) 
finger  ;  with  ,  toe. 

•’bppx  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  (Greek  c rroXf) 
pi.  ‘(ibppx,  robe ,  garment. 


S21X  f.  PS31X  m.  num.  adj.  Dec.  II. 
a.  four. 

■)ly“iX  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  purple.  Heb. 
“jO-HX,  Syriac  Arabic 

M  '  ,  * 

nix  interj.  lo  !  behold,  ! 

□mx  conj.  because  ;  that;  i.  q.  ilX  . 
nix  f.  Dec.  III.  d.  (pi.  generally 
“]nix.)  journey  ;  way,  path. 
iix  and  rnix  m.  irreg.  emph.  XilX  ; 

plur.  fnix ,  emph.  xrvix  ,  a  lion. 
ilX  conj.  because;  that. 

TplX  adj.  Dec.  I.  a  .fit,  suitable,  pro¬ 
per,  verbal  from  “IX.  to  be  pro¬ 
longed,  to  be  long;  in  Talm.  to  pre¬ 
pare,  adapt. 

nsix  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  prolongation , 
continuation. 

nansix  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  knee. 

t  •  — 

XD1X  and  XOilX  f.  Dec.  VII.  a. 

t  :  t  •  •• 

poison. 

SIX  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  the  earth ,  i.  q. 

Heb.  fix ,  Gr.  Introd.  4.  note  2. 

SIX  adv.  below;  with  “|P ,  inferior , 
Dan.  2  :  39.  Hence 
1S1X  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  what  is  lowest , 
bottom. 

pix  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  SIX.) 
earth.  In  the  biblical  Chaldee 
only  Jer.  10  :  11,  but  frequent  in 
the  Targums. 

ttix  ,  X1SX  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  and 
X125X  f.  Dec.  VII.  a  .fire. 
ttix  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  foundation. 
plpx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 
ptbx  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer.  He¬ 
brew  and  Syriac  idem. 

‘ilSX  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  wall. 

XPpX  with  prosthetic  X,  i.  q.  XPttj 
to  drink. 

ininpx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellion. 
nx  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sign. 

PX  pers.  pron.  2d  p.  sing.  m.  thou. 
xnx  Fut.  ipii ,  *pip ,  etc.  to  come. 
Aph.  ipix  and  in  the  bibl.  Chal¬ 
dee  "'rnn  to  cause  to  come ,  bring. 


126 


Pass,  of  a  peculiar  form,  (a  kind 
of  Hophal,)  *’n“P  to  be  brought , 
Dan.  3:13,  6:  18.' 

XPX  f.  (In  sing.  Dec.  VII.  a.  but  in 
pause  IPX ;  PL  *pd3  Dec.  H.  a.) 
a  woman ;  a  wife. 

I.  pnx  pers.  pron.  2  pi.  m.  ye  ;  you. 

II.  1*IPX  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  a. furnace,  oven . 
“inx  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  place. — ip  PPX. 

where. 

n 

5  prep,  in;  by ;  with. 

adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  xdlX5  Dec. 
VII.  a.  evil,  wicked. 
dxa  to  be  bad.  ba  dxa  to  displease. 
Aph.  to  do  in  a  bad  or  disagree¬ 
able  manner. 

ppxa  prep.  i.  q.  PPa  after. 

"pi  a  prep,  on  account  of.  ‘n  ■pia  conj. 
because. 

bbna  idem,  P  bbria  15  because;  so 
that,  n? a  bb:a  173  why? 
bpa  idem,  P  bpa  so  that ;  that,  ut. 
P55  to  inquire,  investigate. 

PPa  Pa.  to  scatter,  disperse. 

Siberia  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  haste,  quickness. 
Jibipaa  quickly. 

I.  bpa  Pa.  to  terrify.  Ithpa.  pass. 

II.  bpa  Pa.  to  hasten.  Ithpe.  Inf. 

pbparp  ,  as  a  noun,  haste. 

xrPa  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  and 
▼  *!  “ 

XPPa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  shame ;  modesty. 
n*3  to  lodge ,  pass  a  night. 

1T3  to  spoil ,  plunder  ;  to  depopulate. 
“PH  a  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  choice ,  excellent. 
boa  to  cease.  Pa.  to  cause  to  cease. 
■’S  sep.  prep.  i.  q.  a  in,  etc.  See  also 
under  rpa . 

*pa  and  p3na  prep,  between,  among. 
It  takes  the  suffixes  of  both  sinmi- 

<z> 

lar  and  plural  nouns. 

Ppa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  understanding, 
intelligence. 

X'pa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  palace. 
d^a  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  bad,  evil. 


rpa  m.  irreg.  Emph.  xrpa ,  Xlpa 
(•’a  Ex.  7  :  21,  Pseudo-Jon.);  const, 
rna  ;  plur.  "pna  etc.  like  Dec.  IV. 
a  house;  the  place  in  which  any 
thing  is  contained  or  kept ;  e.  g. 
x*T3a  ma  treasury,  X^PSp  PPa  ar 
chives. 
xaa  to  weep. 
ba  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  heart. 
xba  to  wear  out ;  met.  to  afflict,  op¬ 
press.  Pa.  idem. 

iba  verbal  from  xba ,  excise,  tax  on 
articles  consumed. 

15  (In  the  Targums  found  only  in 
the  plural),  see  “ia . 

P35  to  build ;  to  rebuild,  restore.  Ith¬ 
pe.  pass. 

“p?a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  building ,  structure , 
verbal  from  P33  . 

t  : 

033  to  be  angry. 

XPioa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  message,  annun¬ 
ciation. 

PS5  to  seek  ;  to  ask,  request. 
w  a  f.  D  ec.  VII.  c.  request,  petition. 
sisaa  is  taken  as  an  adv.  or  interj. 
I  entreat ,  quaes o  ;  often  followed 
by  *ja  ;  as  Ipa  ^saa ,  I  beseech  thee. 
■V'Sa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  brute  ;  cattle  ; 
beasts  of  burden. 

bsa  or  baa  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  lord,  mas - 
ter  ;  husband. 

“IS a  and  Pa.  isa  to  burn  ;  to  consume. 
PSpa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  valley. 
ipa  Pa.  to  seek,  search.  Ithpa.  idem. 
na  or  ^a  m.  a  son,  irreg.  emph.  X’na  , 
with  suff.  T|P3 ,  P*na ;  plur.  “psa 
(from  15),  emph.  X*:a ,  (with  pros¬ 
thetic  X,  XD3X ,)  const.  *’35;  with 
suff.  \3a,  rpsa  or  T|3a,  I'ia-'pa.  In 
various  combinations  it  has  the 
force  of  the  Heb.  *,a  q.  v.  in  Lex 
Heb. 

pa,  XP3  without,  (/oras,  =  He b. 
pip);  15  P5  prep,  besides ,  except , 
as  a  subst.  that  which  is  without 
the  field. 

XP3  to  create.  Ithpe.  pass. 


127 


a*n 


nr  3 


Tp2  kneel.  Pa.  1T12  £o  bless ,  praise. 
7p2  and  7p.?  f.  Dec.  III.  b.  knee. 

Kob2  and  K312  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  bless- 

t  ▼  •  r  j  • 

ing,  benediction. 

tna  adv.  certainly ;  indeed ;  also , 
moreover  ;  conj.  yet ,  but. 

*1122  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  flesh. 

H2  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  bath ,  a  liquid 
measure,  equal  to  seven  and  a  half 
gallons. 

in  a  f.  a  daughter ,  irreg.  Emph. 

7 

(comp.  Syr.  Zra) ,  const.  rn2,  with 

suff.  qnna ;  pi.  132 ,  (from  N32  ;) 
const.  n32  ;  emph.  xn32  . 

•pbwz  pi.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  virginity. 
nn2  prep,  after.  With  suff.  it  takes 
a  plur.  form  ;  as  *Hna  . 

J 

2a  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  back ;  surface.  ba> 
2a  and  n2S  b'S  upon. 

2a  and  ■’aa ,  (with  suff.  "’aa,  ”2a) 
prep,  ivilh;  subject  to.  penes. 

2a  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  pit,  den ;  pit  for 
water ,  cistern. 

Nn^aa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  courage ; 
strength  ;  power. 

naa  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (PI.  I’nsa  and 
“pnaa  as  if  from  nia.)  a  man;  a 
male. 

“pnana  (with  the  flat  pronunciation), 
i.  q.  ynata . 

nna  to  cut  off ;  to  cut  down  a  tree. 

“,na  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  PI.  yna  and 
V"ia,  a  kid. 

“a  or  la  m.  irreg.  const,  ia ;  with  suff 
'^a,  rm-,  midst,  “iaa  among ;  in. 
,<ia  idem. 

7ia  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  pride. 
n=ia  and  Aph.  to  go  forth;  to 

burst  or  break  forth. 

Nn^a  (not  found  in  abs.  sing.)  m. 
Dec.  II.  a.  a  coal. 

nata  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  treasurer.  PI. 
ynata  and  rna-fa. 

9  *  * :  *  *  •  I-  • 


oita  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  threatener;  avenger. 
it  a  to  cut  off;  to  decree.  Ithpe.  to  be 
cut  off,  detached. 

nta  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  astrologer,  diviner , 
lit.  Part,  from  nta,  one  who  utters 
a  decree .  Comp,  also  NiiJ  ,fate. 
xnta  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  decree  ;  thing  ac- 
creed  ;  in  Rab  .fate,  destiny. 

~na  to  laugh  ;  to  deride. 
ioa  or  ■’a  m.  irreg.  (pi.  tvpioa)  a  val- 
ley. 

orrpa  or  csna ,  (compounded  of  “'a  a 
valley,  and  027  prop,  n.)  the  valley 
of  Hinnom ,  where  children  were 
passed  through  the  fire  to  Moloch ; 
hence,  met.,  hell,  the  place  of  future 
and  eternal  punish  ment. 
nVa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  stranger ,  a 
foreigner. 

n^a  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chalk ,  lime  ;  plas¬ 
tering  of  a  wall. 

ttba  ,  nba  and'^ba  to  emigrate,  go  into 
captivity  ;  to  reveal ,  make  mani¬ 
fest.  Praet.  Pass,  "’ba  and  ’’ba  Dan. 
2:19,  30.  Aph.  “'ban  to  carry  cap¬ 
tive. 

baba  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  wheel.  • 

:iba  f.  D  ec.  VII.  c.  captivity. 
bba  m.  found  only  in  the  phrase  “2i$ 
bba,  prob.  lapis  devolutionis ,  a 
stone  which  cannot  be  carried,  but 
must  be  rolled,  on  account  of  its 
great  size.  LXX,  choice  stones. 
“Paa  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perfect. 
ia  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and 
N2a  f.  irreg.  (emph.  NP2a  and  X73a  t 
frequently  in  Targ.  Pseudo-Jon. 
an^siaa  or  ,  const,  nsa ;  pi. 

*|2a) ;  a  garden. 

TDa  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  treasure. 

T\ a  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  wing. 
is  a  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vine  ;  a  vine¬ 
yard. 

a^a  and  Pa.  a^a  excite,  stir  up. 

■'“ia  Pa.  to  rouse ,  excite.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  pass,  and  refl. 

DPa  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bone. 


128 


DO  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  c.  body. 
na  f  pr.  n.  of  a  principal  city  among 
the  Philistines,  Gath. 

n 

■n  rel.  pron.  =  Heb.  w/10,  etc.; 

conj.  that ,  so  that;  because ,  etc.; 
sign  of  the  Possessive  or  Genitive 
case. 

f.  demonst.  pron.  hV/s;  that. 
dn  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  a  bear. 

Dpn  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  enmity.  JXDD'n  bsa 

an  enemy. 

siDD'n  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  enmity. 

rQ'n  (comp.  Gram.  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 

offer  sacrifices. 

rn'n  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  sacrifice. 

pn^  to  adhere ,  cleave  to. 

‘in'n  and  Pa.  to  lead ,  conduct  ; 

to  govern  ;  to  take,  receive. 

fcOD’n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  cause,  mni 
▼  :  *  **  :  ' 

^  so  that. 

&na*j  and  anh^i  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  bee. 

▼  t  -  r  : 

m.  Dec.  III.  a.  gold. 

“rn  to  deride. 

TSnsi'n  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and  Dec.  III. 

—  ”  • 

b.  honey. 

Tp'n  m.  pr.  n.  David. 
pDW  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  memory ;  a  me¬ 
morial. 

p'n  and  p*^  to  judge  ;  to  adjudge  ;  to 
contend. 

pW  to  be  broken  in  pieces, 
to  dwell. 

Dura ,  a  plain  in  Babylonia, 
Dan.  3:1. 

to  tread  underfoot ,  trample  upon  ; 

■  to  crush. 

fi  Dec.  VIII.  a.  found  only  Dan. 
6  :  19,  according  to  Buxtorf  and 
the  Hebrew  interpreters  generally, 
an  instrument  of  music ,  from  nrn 
to  strike.  Gesenius  renders  it  a 

concubine ,  comparing  the  Ar. 
subegit  feminam ,  and  the  old  ver¬ 
sions  food,  conjecturally. 


V*1 


bn'n  to  fear.  It  refers  both  to  rever¬ 
ence  toward  God,  and  to  dread ,  as 
of  an  enemy,  etc.  Pa.  brp  to  ter¬ 
rify. 

&6rn  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  fear  j  terror. 

prn  to  press,  urge. 

*vn  =  p  which  see;  also  as  a  disjunc¬ 
tive,  but ;  it  is  sometimes  redun¬ 
dant  like  the  Greek  on  in  the  be¬ 
ginning  of  an  address,  as  Dan. 
2  :  25. 

“Vn  and  signs  of  the  Genitive 

case,  contracted  from  "  “’p  and  b  . 

i-  q-  q- v- 

‘p'n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  judgment ;  justice, 
righteousness ;  judicial  trial;  the 
reckoning  or  account,  given  by  men 
of  their  actions  in  the  day  of  judg¬ 
ment,  ,Gen.  3  :  18,  Pseudo-Jon.  ; 
punishment. 

*jpj  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  judge. 

£03^  m.  pi.  Dinaites,  one  of  the  na¬ 
tions  which  settled  Samaria.  Ez. 
4  :  9. 

m.  Dec.  I.  an  inhabitant ;  a  so- 
journer,  stranger. 

'ip'n  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  treading  under 
foot. 

tn  m.  f.  and  ‘jD'n  c.  g.  demon, 
pron.  this. 

“iD’n  (Heb.  “0$ ,  Intr.  4.  note  2.)  to 

remember. 

“iD'n  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  ram. 

nsiiD'H  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 
▼  :  •  * 

1‘iD'n  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  record ,  memorial , 
history. 

or  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (Lat. 

delator,)  calumniator ;  accuser. 

XDP'n  adv.  that  not,  lest.  comp.  KDb . 

pb'n  to  bum.;  intrans. 

Cn  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  blood. 

ND'n  to  resemble.  Pa.  id. ;  to  think. 

‘rjr'n  to  sleep. 

yn,  p*n  dem.  pron.  m.  this  j  that. 

Nj'n  and  rp'n  dem.  pr.  c.  g.  this  ;  that. 
m.  pr.  n.  Daniel. 

to  go  out ,  be  extinguished . 


129 


to  be  broken  in  pieces.  Aph.  p7K 
and  in  the  biblical  Chaldee  p^n  to 
break  in  pieces. 
m.  Dec.  I.  a.  age ,  generation. 

-tl  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  thistle. 

T  2  “ 

tt’pn'n  m.  pr.  n.  Darius. 
snn  i.  q.  Heb.  3>‘nt ,  m.  Dec.  III.  a. 
and  3n7  Dec.  I.  a.  an  arm. 

r  • 

m  f  Dec.  I.  law  ;  decree  ;  purpose  ; 

xnbtt  rvn  religion,  Dan.  6  :  6. 
xni  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  young  tender 
herb. 

•nnrvn  m.  pi.  ,  juris consultus, 

a  person  skilled  in  law ,  judge,  a 
Persian  word. 

n 

H  interrogative  prefix,  as  in  Hebrew, 
xn  and  xn  interj.  behold  ! 

-p-ja-nn  m.  pi.  minister  of  state ,  a  Per¬ 
sian  word. 

BVnn  (Gr.  ISuurrjs,)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a 
low  person ,  plebeian. — As  an  adj. 
low,  vulgar. 

nnn  Pa.  to  tear  in  pieces  ;  to  divide. 
cnn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  piece,  fragment. 
pin  i.  q.  *,7  ;  adv.  then. 

■Yin  Pa.  “ttn  to  honor. 
xin  ,  rnn  and  pti,  to  be.  Fut.  xttr;, 
apoc.  w ,  ^nn ,  ■'nx  .  etc.  Fut.  with 
b  prefixed  drops  its  prefbrmative 
and  is  employed  in  an  optative 
or  subjunctive  sense;  e.  g.  pnb , 
that  they  might  be,  Dan.  6  :  2,  3. 
See  Gram.  §  23,  note,  and  §  50.  2. 
X^n  pron.  pers.  and  demonst.  m.  he  ; 

this;  that. 

Tpn  fut.  7|ro  to  go. 

ion  pron.  pers.  and  demonst.  f.  she  ; 
it  ;  this  ;  that. 

*j“H*in  dem.  pron.  i.  q.  -in  ;  adv.  then. 
adv.  and  con],  as;  as  if.  XEHOn 
and  K3:on  id. 

byn  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  temple  ;  palace. 

,  see  -pax. 

Tjbn  to  walk.  Pael  and  Ithpaal,  id. 

9 


))21 


T^n  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  toll  paid  by  passen¬ 
gers,  verbal  from  Tjbn . 

XsbTi  and  xrbn  adv.  hither. 

t  •  -  t  :  r 

ian  and  pan  m.  pi.  pers.  pron.  3d 
pers.  they. 

rp^n  or  Tpsatt  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  chain 
for  the  neck  or  arm.  Syr.  idem. 

■jn  adv.  i.  q.  *]X  where  ? 

“|H  conj.  and  adv.  if;  sign  of  a  ques¬ 
tion  (=  n)  an,  num ;  ‘jn  .  .  .  .  *jfi 
whether  .  ...  or. 

7(3 n  to  turn.  Ithpe.  refl. 

Srnfi  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  thought ,  musing, 
cogitation. 
mnionn,  see  ma . 

1 

)  conj.  and;  but ;  &c.  as  in  Hebrew. 
But  Vav  conversive  does  not  ap¬ 
pear  in  Chaldee. 

T 

•jnt  to  buy;  to  gain  ;  Pa.  "|St  to  sell ; 
Ithpa.  ]27lx  to  be  sold;  to  be 
bought. 

“Opl  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prudent,  cautious. 
Lit.  enlightened ,  2d  part.  Peal 
from  “iHT  to  shine. 

pT  to  feed,  to  nourish.  Ittaph.  pass. 
2pT  to  tremble ,  be  afraid. 

"OT  Aph.  Y’tft  to  be  proud,  to  act 
proudly. 

OT  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  splendor ,  brightness. 
■'niot  Dan.  5:6,  9,  lit.  his  splen¬ 
dors,  i.  e.  the  bright  and  cheerful 
appearance  of  his  countenance, 
nst  to  be  clean,  pure  ;  to  be  just,  inno¬ 
cent. 

f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  *13T  Dec.  VIII. 

T  • 

c.  purity  ;  justice  ;  righteousness. 
“OT ,  ‘1X3T  adj.  Dec.  VI.  pure,  inno¬ 
cent. 

Kyi  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  sweat. 

r  •• 

jwi  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  time,  period  of 
time. 


r.in 


130 


“J /3t  Pa.  to  appoint ,  prepare.  Ithpa. 

to  concert ,  agree  together. 
Apli.  ‘jETn  idem ,  Dan.  2  :  9,  Kethib. 
“i 'Of  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  music. 

r  : 

“i32T  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  singer ,  musician. 

*]t  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  species .  sor£. 

“nsf  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  adv.  little ,  a 
little. 

pST  to  cry  out. 

m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  spark. 

PPA  to  elevate  ;  to  suspend ,  as  a  mal¬ 
efactor  on  a  gallows  or  cross, 
fit  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  girdle  ;  a  girded 
apron. 

Snt  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
n2"iT  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  seed ;  posterity  ; 
famil y  ;  pi  u  v.  families. 

n 

nbiun  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  injury ,  hurt. 
anpn  and  adj.  Dec.  I.  beloved. 
ban  Pa.  to  injure ;  to  destroy ,  waste , 
overthrow.  Ithpa.  to  be  destroyed, . 
ban  m.  pr.  n.  Abel. 
ban  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

t  : 

ban  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  hurt ,  injury. 
nan  arid  “Cn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  com¬ 
panion. 

nan  to  associate ,  unite ;  to  put  to¬ 
gether,  compose.  Ithpa.  to  associate 
themselves,  join  together. 
nnan  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  fern,  of  nan  .  fe¬ 
male  companion. 

nn ,  in  pause  nn,  fern,  Jtnn i,  num. 
adj.  one;  first;  before  numerals, 
time ,  times ;  e.  g.  ba  naaia  nn , 
seven  times  more  than ,  lit.  seven 
times  above,  Dan.  3:19. 

I.  xnn  adv.  once,  xnna  together,  xnnb 
very  much,  exceedingly. 

II.  5<nn  to  rejoice ,  be  joyful.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  rejoice ,  to  please,  gratify. 

ninn  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  joy,  glad?iess. 
ynn  m.  plur.  Dec.  II.  b.  breast. 
nnn  adj.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i.  q.  Heb.  uinn) 
new. 


Xltn  and  ^n  to  tell ,  declare;  to  make 
manifest.  Aph.  idem. 
am  in  Dec.  I.  a.  and 
,xain  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  guilt ,  crime ; 
debt. 

nin  to  speak  in  enigmas  ;  to  propose 
(a  riddle). 

xnw  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 
▼ 

“nm  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  riddle,  an  enig¬ 
ma. 

nin  f  pr.  n.  Eve. 

I3*in  to  sew.  Aph.  to  repair ;  e.  g.  a 
wall,  Ez.  4:  12. 

nam  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  a  staff,  a  rod. 
join  and  JOin  m.  irreg.  PI.  ;  a 
serpent. 

bin  and  bin  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  profane  ; 
common. 

JObin  m.  emph.  (found  only  in  this 
form  and  with  sufi’.  “pbin);  sweet¬ 
ness. 

nin  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  white. 

pwn  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  and 

*i2ipin  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  act  of  thinking ; 

reckoning  ;  account. 

60  n  to  see. 

itn  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  vision  ;  aspect ,  ap¬ 
pearance. 

ion  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  and  On  Dec.  VIII. 
c.  (with  suff.  nnitn  Dan.  4  :  8.) 
idem. 

Npn  m.  (pi.  ‘ptfEH ,  const.  “’Xpn  ,  with 
suff.  Tj^n  ,  '|iaij<un.  a  sin. 

Kisn  to  err,  to  sin. 
nxpn  f.  Dec.  IX.  a  sin-offering. 
piisn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  violence  ;  plunder, 
rapine. 

1313  n  to  sew,  Pa.  idem. 

^ n  adj.  Dec.  IV.  a.  living. 

60tn  and  n^n  to  live.  Aph.  part,  xnia 
preserving  alive. 

Xpn  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  beast ,  animal. 
■p?n  pi.  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (But  D^n  and 
h^n  occur  instead  of  the  regular 
absolide  form,)  life . 
bT!  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  strength ;  a 
host. 


[ 


131 


adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  wise  ;  as  a  noun, 
wise  man ,  Magian. 
oqn  and  Pael  con  and  D*>3n  to  be 
wise  ;  to  understand. 
xoon  or  (pron.  hhukhma,)  f. 

Dec.  VII.  a.  wisdom. 

■’bn  and  “'bn  adj.  Dec.  III.  sweet. 
cbn  m.  Dec.  III.  c.  a  dream. 
qbn  to  change  ;  to  be  changed ;  to 
pass  through ;  to  pass,  spoken  of 
time. 

qbn ,  qbn  ,  (in  the  Jerusalem  dialect 
qibn  and  qbin)  prep,  instead  of. 
pbn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  part ,  lot. 
on  m.  a  father-in-law ,  irreg.  with 
suff.  n*i72n  ,  7p73n  . 

Xon  to  contemplate  ;  to  see. 

and  !xon  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  heat: 

T  !  T  *.n  * 

anger. 

p73n  to  vex  ;  to  grieve. 

2720  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  wine. 

V'qjn  m.  pi.  wheat. 

H23n  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  dedication,  conse- 

T  \  —.  > 

oration. 

pn  to  compassionate,  show  favor  to. 

Ithpa.  to  pray ,  make  supplication. 
■n&n  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  defective. 

“ipn.  and  Aph.  j&nx  to  possess,  to  have 
in  possession. 

“jOn  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  power,  might. 
qqn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  clay ;  potter's 
work. 

non  to  be  deficient  or  lacking.  Pa.  to 
diminish  ;  to  depress. 

*iqn;  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  harvest. 

qqn.  and  Aph.  to  urge,  hasten.  Part. 

Aph.  q^nnq  urgent,  hasty. 
bpn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  afield. 

22  n  to  devastate.  Hoph.  pass. 

2*in  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  sword. 

Tjatnn  m.  pi.  Dec.  IV.  c.  di¬ 
viners,  Magians,  from  the  Persian 

o  ^  o 

a  wise  man ;  or  from 

Heb.  22  n  ,  persons  skilled  in  hie¬ 
roglyphics. 

Tpn  to  singe,  burn.  Ithpa.  Pass. 


pqn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  loin,  thigh. 

22  n  to  burn ;  to  be  hot. 
qicn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  darkness. 

Tp'^n  and  Ipttjn.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  poor , 
indigent. 

nttin  to  think  necessary ,  with  b  and 
Inf.;  to  be  necessary. 

I.  biqn  to  be  thin ;  to  make  thin  or 
small ;  to  crush.  Pa.  idem. 

II.  bqn  to  think  ;  to  reckon  to  the  ac¬ 
count  of  any  one,  to  impute.  Pa. 
to  regard.  Ithpa.  pass. 

onn  to  seal. 

t5 

2x2  to  be  glad,  joyful. 

22  adi.  Dec.  I.  a.  fern.  N32  Dec.  VII. 

T  J  T  ▼ 

a.  good  ;  beautiful. 
n22  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  executioner ,  armed 
attendant. 

rffla  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  goodness,  excellence  ; 
h  appi.ness. 

m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  mountain;  a  rock. 
Heb.  2*ix . 

rnq  adj.  fasting.  Ar.  to  fast. 

b*2  Pa.  to  go  out;  to" walk  abroad. 

Palpel  bqbq  to  cast  out ;  to  remove. 
*pl3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clay. 
bi:  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  dew. 

“•bra  m.  irreg.  emph.  fcObq ;  plur. 
^bi3 ,  pnb 2 ;  emph.  ,  iabq  ; 
with  suff.  ■'i‘1bq  Gen.  22  :  3,  Pseudo- 
Jon.  ;  a  boy,  a  servant. 
bbu  to  hide.  Aph.  to  recline  for  rest 
under  the  shade. 
pbq  to  throw  away. 

Tap  and  Pa.  2732  to  hide.  Ithpe. 
2722X  and2722*ix  ,  and  Ithpa.  *TO2X 
to  hide  one's  self. 

n22  to  err,  to  wander.  Aph.  to  cause 
to  err,  to  seduce. 

022  to  taste ;  to  eat.  Pa.  to  give  to 
eat,  to  feed. 

022  and  022  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  taste , 
particularly  pleasant  taste;  wis¬ 
dom,  Dan.  2 :  14  ;  command,  edict ; 


/ 


132 


Tih 


cawse  for  trial,  Ez.  5:5;  reckon¬ 
ings  account ,  Dan.  6:3;  regard , 
respect ;  by  DSD  D*ito  ,  to  regard , 
Dan.  3  :  12.  DSD  bsa ,  chancellor , 
lit.  master  of  decrees. 

I.  ibd  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  wai7,  of  a  hu¬ 
man  finger  or  toe  ;  claw. 

II.  ")ED  m.  Dec.  III.  emph. 

the  blatta ,  a  shell-fish  of  a  purple 
color. 

"HD  to  expel ,  dri’ye  ozJ. 

ppp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  leaf. 

frpbsDD  m.  plur.  emph.  proper  name 
of  a  nation  settled  in  Samaria, 
origin  unknown,  Ez.  4 :  9.  LXX. 
Tapcf>a\cuoL. 

bp7  Aph.  bD^n  to  bring. 

niS27  f.  Dec.  III.  c.  the  dry  land. 

“p  f.  a  hand,  irreg.  Emph.  and 
with  N  prosthetic  i<77^  5  with  suff. 
“77 ,  fT'77  (TPi*  Prov.  21:1.) 
■irrn .  *jiD77 ;  (dual  “J777 ;)  plur. 

XP  Aph.  Part.  aoirra  and  ania 
praying ,  praising. 

277  to  know ;  to  understand.  Aph. 
37 in  to  show ,  declare ,  make  known. 

D77  1°  give ;  hence  to  set ,  place. 
Ithpe.  pass.  ;  to  6e  given  up. 

Prr  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  Jewish  people , 
toe  Jews. 

m.  proper  name,  Judah. 

“Hirn  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Jew.  PI.  emph. 

sppm . 

••  r  ; 

Dr  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  day.  PI.  const, 
fem.  nap  and  masc.  . 

t  ••  • 

P.^  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  sucking  child, 
suckling. 

D)pP  m.  proper  name,  Joseph. 

*7“rp  Dec.  1.  or  TxPrn  adj.  Dec.  VI. 
only,  alone. 

DD7  Fut.  DD^  to  be  good;  to  seem, 
good,  by .  to  any  one,  to  be  pleas- 
ing. 


^  an  abbreviation.  See  Chrestoma- 
thy,  p.  92. 

b:P  and  brp .  Fut.  b*!37  (and  like  the 
Heb.  bDP  Jud.  14 :  13.)  to  be  able  ; 
to  prevail. 

nb?  to  bear ,  bring  forth  ;  sometimes 
to  beget. 

D7  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  sea ,  the  sea. 

to  add.  Hoph.  Heb.  form,  C]D*in 
to  be  added. 

DSP  to  advise,  counsel.  Part,  a,  conn - 
sellor.  Ithpa.  to  consult  together. 
DpS7  m-  proper  name,  Jacob. 
rsn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  proper  name,  Ja- 
pheth. 

N2P  Shaphel  £CPtS  and  ’’2P125  tofnish. 
DIP  to  be  certain ,  true.  Pa.  to  tell 
the  truth. 

D^IP  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  true ,  certain ;  con¬ 
firmed,  valid.  PSP  “jd  certainly ,  of 
a  truth. 

to  burn  (neut.),  be  consumed. 
Aph.  to  burn  (act.),  consume. 
i“i7P7  £  Dec.  VII.  a.  burning. 

“p|z>7  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  hard,  dijjicult ; 

honored,  honorable,  noble. 
njp  to  be  or  be  esteemed  honorable  or 
valuable  ;  i.  q.  Pa.  to  honor.  Aph. 
idem. 

m-  Dec.  I.  b.  honor ;  splendor; 
glory.  Sometimes  it  has  5t  pros¬ 
thetic. 

obdP7  and  obllpP  Jerusalem. 
rvp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  month. 

7j“!7  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  pi.  *777 ,  thigh. 
banizP  m.  proper  name,  Israel;  the 
people  of  Israel. 

DUP  in  Peal  not  used.  Aph.  IPTTix 
to  stretch  forth,  reach  out. 
n7 ,  Heb.  nx,  sign  of  the  Objective 
or  Accusative  case. 

DrP  or  DTP  to  sit;  to  reside ,  stay. 
Aph.  D^nin  to  place ,  cause  to 
dwell. 

-PIP  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  abundant ,  great , 
eminent ;  adv.  TIP  and  aPPPP  * 

•  -  T  *  - 

very ,  exceedingly. 


133 


IDS 


31^'  to  remain ,  be  left.  Pa.  “iPV)  to 
make  to  abound ,  to  cause  abund¬ 
ance. 

D 

3  prep,  and  conj. ;  like ;  as ,  as 
though. 

350.  350, 30  and  33  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 

grief  sorrow. 

30  adj.  Dec.  III.  b.  (i.  q.  Heb. 

3T3 ,)  false. 

•j133,  133  and  133  adv.  (  =  Heb.  X3) 
now.  *}1331  now  therefore. 

•po  adv.  so.  thus,  ynaa  id.  ynoi 
now  therefore. 

20  adv.  now.  H3  32)  hitherto. 

▼  r  “  . 

bro  to  be  able.  Const,  with  b  and 
Inf. 

13  f.  Dec.  IV.  a.  window. 

“,013  (only  in.  pi.)  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 
thorns. 

3313,  (sometimes  written  330,)  m. 
Dec.  II.  a.  a  star. 

■J13  Pa.  to  confirm ,  establish  ;  to  make 
vigorous  efforts.  Ithpa.  pass. ;  also, 
as  Pa.  to  endeavor  earnestly. 

313  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  cor ,  a  measure  for 
things  liquid  or  dry,  equal  to  the 
homer  or  to  ten  ephahs,  supposed 
to  contain  about  eight  bushels. 
3)100,  see  3)03. 

333  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  talent. 

333  Kethib  Ez.  7  :  22,  idem. 

Vs,  bs,  xb'o,  xb3,  “’bo,  adj.  =  Heb. 
33  ,  all ,  the  whole ,  every. 

I.  ViO  Shaph.  bbob  to  complete,  fin¬ 
ish.  Ishtaph.  bbondx  pass. 

II.  bbo  and  Aph.  bbox  to  crown; 
met.  to  adorn. 

X33.  no3  and  03  conj.  and  adv. 

how  !  quam  !  as;  3  Xo3  like. 

"|3 ,  V?  adv.  rightly;  thus.  *j33 
then  ;  therefore  ;  thus. 

*ji:3  m.  pi.  with  fem.  form,  Dec.  VII. 

a.  colleagues.  LXX.  ctvvSovXol. 
3123  and  333  m.  Dec.  I.  a  harp.  Gr. 
KLvvpa,  Lat.  cinyra. 


b 


XOD3  adv.  i.  q.  *|3  thus. 

‘333  m.  proper  name,  Canaan. 

3233  to  collect ,  act.  Ithpe.  to  assemble , 
to  m.eet. 

•'303  m.  Dec.  VI.  i.  q.  OiiO  a  Chal¬ 
dean. 

X03,  H03  and  03  to  lie  hid ,  to  be 
concealed.  Pa.  to  hide ,  conceal; 
i.  q.  Peal. 

3)03  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  feeling  of  shame  ; 
ignominy. 

3)03  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  silver. 

*]33  adv.  now.  jS3  33  until  now. 

3)3  c .  g.  Dec.  IV.  a.  a  hollow;  the 
palm  of  the  hand  ;  the  sole  of  the 
foot. 

*,53  to  hunger.  Aph.  to  cause  or  suf¬ 
fer  another  to  be  hungry ! 

353  Pa.  to  wash ;  to  purify  ceremo¬ 
nially ;  to  atone ,  make  expiation. 

P53  to  bind.  Pa.  idem. 

X33  to  be  grieved.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa. 
idem. 

xbo33  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  mantle ,  cloak. 

3133  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cherub. 

TIO  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  herald. 

T 

T33  to  proclaim ,  make  proclamation. 
Aph.  idem. 

033  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  vineyard. 

X0*O  m.  Dec.  V.  a.  a  throne.  Pi. 
•|io33  . 

Obs  m.  Dec.  VI.  pi.  XOto3,  a  Chal¬ 
dean;  as  astrology  flourished  prin¬ 
cipally  in  Chaldea,  an  astrologer. 

312,3  to  be  right;  to  be  fit;  to  be 
agreeable ,  to  please. 

33)3  and  33)3  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  II. 
a.  right ;  just,  upright ;  fit ;  legiti¬ 
mate. 

320  to  write. 

320  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  writing ;  prescrip¬ 
tion,  limitation ,  Ez.  7  :  22. 

bn3  and  bro  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  a  wall. 

b 

b  prep,  as  in  Hebrew,  to  ;  for  /  of  / 
b  .  .  .  .  yo  between — and. 


I 


134 


k  ni2 


$12 


xb  adv.  not ;  nothing ,  Dan.  4:32. 

xbfi  and  X'bn  nonne  ?  also,  ecce  / 

lo  !  Gram.  §  68.  3. 

Pixb  and  six**b .  see  XS*b  and  I3^b . 

T .  ...  T . 

0?  or  005  m.  the  heart ,  irreg.  Emph. 
xob ;  with  suff.  iob,  712b,  xsob , 
etc. ;  plur.  emph.  X^oob  ;  with  suff. 

yirrob. 

301  ob  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  clothing  ;  a  gar¬ 
ment. 

*pobob  f.  plur.  plants  ;  flowers. 

30  ob  to  clothe  one's  self.  Aph.  to 
clothe. 


“jnb  conj.  therefore ,  with  prosthetic  X , 
5  comp,  of  xb  and  *jfi ,  except 
(comp.  Lat.  nisi  ;)  hut.  sed. 

Bib  to  curse. 

nb  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Levite.  Plur.  X“nb  . 

•  ,  "T  : 

“r)“i5  m.  a  sea-monster,  leviathan. 
Mb  prep,  to;  toward;  with. 
b^b  and  xbib  m.  irreg.  emph.  Xib^b  ; 
plur.  *jlbib ;  night. 

mb  a  contraction  for  mx  xb ,  there 

••  •  r  > 

is  not ;  there  are  not. 

Tinb  adv.  and  prep,  alone;  only; 
also.  It  is  strictly  a  noun,  loneli¬ 
ness ;  hence  with  3,  irminbo,  in 
his  loneliness ,  i.  e.  he  alone. 
cnb  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  bread. 


cnb  m.  a  feast,  Dan.  5  :  1. 
nsnb  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  concubine. 

X32b  and  rnab  (as  a  noun,  nothing ,) 
adv.  not ;  lest.  X32bl  that  not : 
lest. 


xob  or  nxb  to  labor ,  toil ;  to  be  fa¬ 
tigued  with  labor. 

12  ib  or  IX^b  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  labor ;  fa¬ 
tigue. 

obob  ad  v.  forever. 

“i^b  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  tongue. 


12 

•32  and  before  gutturals  32 ,  prefix,  i.  q. 
the  sep.  prep.  *)32  . 

X32 ,  H32  or  ”n32  (with  Daghesh  forte 


euphonic  in  the  first  letter  of  the 
next  word,)  interrog.  pron.  what  ? 
It  is  sometimes  used  adverbially, 
how  ?  also  in  exclamations  how ! 
qudm !  X320  as ;  how !  X32b  and 
X3ab  whither?  why ?  *i“i  X32  that 
which. 

HX32  fem.  num.  a  hundred.  Dual 

t  : 

V 32X32  . 

V3TX32  m.  dual,  scales ,  balance. 

“132  X  32  ,  more  common  orthography, 
132*132  ,  q.  V. 

*JX32  and  “32  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  vessel;  an 
instrument ;  a  garment ,  (  =  Heb. 
nb3.) 

*,nrtj32  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  shameful; 
ashamed. 

531032  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fountain. 
nb232  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  roll ,  book. 

1232  Pa.  to  throw  down,  destroy. 
no*i32  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  an  altar. 

•TH32  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  tax ,  tribute.  By 
a  resolution  of  Daghesh  forte  into 
Nun,  it  is  sometimes  written  rn332  , 
Ez.  4  :  13. 

“1*1*132  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  residence. 

*1*132  m.  pr.  n.  Dec.  VI.  Media;  a 
Mede. 

•“13*1*132  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  province  ;  land , 
country. 

Fi3*i32  or  n:“i32  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  the  east , 
(lit.  the  rising ,  viz.  of  the  sun.) 

053 -132  (found  only  in  this  form)  indef. 
pron.  any  thing. 

“1*132  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  dwelling ,  residence , 

i.  q.  nra . 
ri32  see  X32 . 

t  r 

ni“ii32  f.  pr.  n.  Moriah ,  a  hill  in  Jeru¬ 
salem. 

ni32  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  death ;  a.  deadly 
pestilence. 

M32  or  ni32  to  die. 

“,1132,  emph.  X31T32 food;  sustenance. 
Xfi32  and  i“iri32  to  strike;  to  wound. 
Pa.  XH33  idem;  also  to  restrain. 
Ithpe.  to  be  fastened  or  nailed 
Ez.  6 : 11. 


135 


-in  a 


■ja 


Npbn^a  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  course  or 
class  of  the  priests  or  Levites. 
2<aa  and  naa  to  come ,  arrive:  to 

t  j  r  ;  /  / 

reach  ;  with  by  .  to  come  upon ,  be¬ 
fall ;  happen  to  a  person, 
b^iaa  prep,  on  account  of  ;  'n  b^aa 
because,  since. 
ba^a  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  food. 
laia  or  ”iaxa  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  word , 
speech ;  command.  With  suif.  it 
sometimes  signifies  self  like  the 
Heb.  1T23 .  So  also  ^  fina^a  the 

V/  T  :  -  T  • 

Lord ,  Jehovah. 

*pa  pi.  m.  irreg.,  emph.  iOa ,  const, 
"•a  and  sometimes  “‘a-'a,  water , 
waters. 

“lara  m.  Dec.  II.  a  verbal  from  , 
a  plain ,  a.  valley. 

Tj?a  depress,  humble  ;  to  crush. 
Pa.  idem. 

tfba  to fll.  Ithpe.  pass. 

7|5<ba  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  an  angel. 
nba  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  PI.  *p^a ,  word , 
speech  ;  thing. 
nba  m.  D  ec.  III.  b.  salt. 
nba  denom.  from  the  preceding,  in 
the  Targums,  to  salt ,  to  season  with 
salt ,  in  bibl.  Chaldee  only  Ez. 
4:  14,  prob.  to  eat  salt ,  to  derive 
support.  According  to  the  He¬ 
brew  commentators  to  devastate , 
destroy ,  derived  from  the  fact  that 
salt  land  is  generally  waste,  bar¬ 
ren  ;  or  from  the  custom  of  spwing 
the  site  of  a  devastated  city  with 
salt. 

"ba  or  “ba  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  king. 
7|ba  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  advice ,  counsel. 
roba  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  queen. 

JlSba  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  a  kingdom  ;  do¬ 
minion,  reign. 
bba  Pa.  to  speak. 

•ja  and  ^a  interrog.  pron.  who ?  what? 
*,a  whoever. 

•ja  prep,  from  ;  of  out  of;  some  of 
(comp,  the  French  du)  ;  because 
of;  rather  than,  in  preference  to; 


after  an  adjective,  than. — '(a  fre¬ 
quently  takes  after  it  the  charac¬ 
teristic  prefix  of  the  Gen.  or  Dat. 
case,  which  is  then  pleonastic  ;  as 
nwa ,  Gen.  49  :  10,  i.  q.  maa  ; 
■paqjsb  “ja  ,  Gen.  3  :  24,  Jer.  Targ. 
F  q-  :pa"i£  I*?.—1 ^  “ja  because , 
since.  —  2‘,2P~-ja  truly.  —  (a 
idem.  With  suffixes  "ja  takes  Da- 
ghesh  forte  ;  as  •’Sa  . 

K2a  to  number ,  reckon.  Pa.  75  a  ,  “'Sa 
and  "'Sa  to  constitute ,  appoint. 
n^a  i.  q.  rrna ,  q.  v. 

S’naa  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  verbal  from  3H?, 
(i.  q.  Heb.  3Ha  ,  the  Daghesh  forte 
being  resolved  into  Nun.  SJ'na  al¬ 
so  occurs  in  the  Targums,  e.  g. 
Jer.  3: 15.)  knowledge ,  intelligence  ; 
the  understanding,  the  mind. 
nsa  i.  q.  Kia . 

ma  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  rest;  quietness,  si¬ 
lence. 

nraa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  gift ,  offering ; 
tribute. 

■p3a  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  number. 
i|330a  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  poverty,  want. 
X5>a  c.  g.  irreg.  (with  suff.  Tj^a ,  pi. 
'pra  or  ‘jsa  .)  the  belly,  venter.  PI. 
idem. 

b$a  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  (verbal  from  bbs  to 
enter,)  setting  of  the  sun.  PI  .idem. 
tinsa  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  distinction  ;  di¬ 
vision. 

nxa  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  planting. 
aoxa  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  command,  in- 
junction. 

*l3Hxa  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  middle ,  midst. 
Q^xa  pr.  n.  Egypt. 
ttS’npa  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  sanctuary ,  holy 
place. 

la  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and 

r 

K7a  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  lord.  Syr.  and 
Arab.  idem. 

*na  to  rebel,  to  be  rebellious. 

*na  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  rebellious. 

Tnna  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  correction;  in¬ 
struction. 


* 


136 


cirp  m.  Dec.  I.  a  height ,  eleva¬ 
tion. 

Dr  a  to  pluck  off. 
rnra  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  oil. 
rpaja  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  (strictly  2d  Part, 
from  nda  to  anoint ,)  anointed’ 
Messiah. 

m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  skin. 

33130  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bed. 

‘233a  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  dwelling ;  a 
lent. 

xnda  m.  Dec.  V.  a.  (strictly  Inf! 

from  3<rpj)  a  resting. 

■'piraja  £  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  flute ,  musi¬ 
cal  reed. 

nn^a  in  the  biblical  Chaldee,  i.  q. 
"ir&a  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  feast ;  a  ban¬ 
quet. 

nira  f.  Dec.  V.  a.  desire  •  appetite. 
bna  to  compare  /  to  use  similitudes. 
Heb.  biaa  . 

bra  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  parable ,  simili¬ 
tude  ’  a  sententious  remark ,  a  pro¬ 
verb. 

*)na  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  and  *]na  Dec.  II.  a. 

a  gift /  a  reward,  rax  'na  a  gift 
of  a  reward ,  i.  e.  the  giving  of  a 
reward. 

£On33  f  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (fem.  of  the 
preceding,)  a  present ,  gift. 

3 

$33  Ithpa.  ‘pspx  to  prophesy  /  to  ut¬ 
ter  (a  prophecy). 

nx^S  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  prophecy  ’  pre¬ 
diction. 

nstps  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  a  present ,  gift  • 
coll,  gifts  ’  plur.  *p3T33 . 
tOpa  and  X“’33  m.  irreg.  emph.  X*33 ; 
plur.  ,pX‘133  ;  emph.  X*X*'23  and 
;  with  suff.  71^33  ,  ; 

a  prophet. 

$13133  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  candlestick. 

133  to  flovn 

13?  prep,  over  against ;  toward. 


•pnaa  (found  only  in  the  plur.  abs.) 
streams ,  rivers. 

PI53  m.  Dec.  III.  d.  brightness ,  light, 
of  the  morning. 

1133 ,  -P33  and  T133  m.  Dec.  I.  a. 

leader ,  chief,  prince. 

313  Ithpa.  3l3nx  to  be  willing  ’  to 
do  willingly  j  to  give  voluntarily. 
Inf.  tVOiann  as  a  noun,  that  which 
is  given  voluntarily ,  a  free-will-of- 
ring. 

q3l3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  row  of  stones ; 

structure wall. 

113  to  flee. 

"ji3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  with  n  parago- 
gic,  W5,  sheath  ’  met.  body,  q.  d. 
sheath  of  the  soul. 

■vina  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  light. 

Jnvja  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  illumination , 
wisdom. 

cn?  to  roar  /  to  bellow  •  to  groan. 
ins  to  shine  brightly.  Pa.  rp3  to  en¬ 
lighten.  Ithpa.  pass. 
rn3  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  stream, 
to  flee. 

n^a  to  rest  ’  Aphel  n^ax  to  cause  to 
rest ,  to  give  rest. 

^bia  f!  Dec.  VII.  c.  and 

r  ; 

->bl3  f.  Dec.  VII.  b.  a  dunghill. 

"pa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fish. 

“1*13  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  fire. 
pT3  to  suffer  injury.  Aph.  pT2fi<  or 
pT3n  to  injure. 
ajns  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  brass. 

t  : 

nri3  to  descend ,  go  down.  Aph.  rns  } 
Fut.  nni ,  Imp.  nnx  ,  to  bring 
down ,  carry  down  •  to  deposit. 
Hoph.  Jinan  to  be  brought  down , 
deposed. 

rioa  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  observer ,  one 
who  keeps  (e.  g.  a  law.) 
bp3  to  lift  up.  elevate. 

103  to  keep ,  preserve  ’  to  observe ,  re¬ 
gard. 

rin*l3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  sweet  odor , 

hence  an  acceptable  sacrifice. 

033,  033  in.  Dec.  III.  b.  wealth 
“  1  '  •  • 


tain3 


137 


2ft  22  D 


power',  strength ,  of  body  or  mind. 
PI.  riches. 
ns:  to  bite. 

ns 3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  leopard. 

2D:  to  take ;  to  receive. 
no:  to  take  away ,  remove  ;  to  pull 
asunder.  Ithpe.  pass. 

T|p?  and  Pa.  to  pour  out ;  to  offer. 

“|C3  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  libation,  drink-of¬ 
fering. 

pp:  to  ascend.  Aph.  p^pn  to  take  up, 
cause  to  ascend.  Hoph.  ppn  pass, 
of  Aph. 

bp:  Fut.  bp?  to  fall ;  to  fall  down  ; 
to  be  thrown  down ;  to  fall  out,  hap¬ 
pen. 

pp:  to  go  out ,  to  depart ;  to  come 
forth. 

Nps:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  expense,  cost. 
bp:  or  as:  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
NtPs:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  life  ;  soul;  self; 
a  living  being. 

2S:  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  planting;  a 
plant. 

Nss:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  strength,  solidity, 
firmness. 

ns:  to  quarrel ,  contend.  Pa.  id. 
ns:  to  conquer,  surpass,  prevail  over, 
be  superior  to.  Ithpe.  Pa.  and 
Ithpa.  idem. 

bs:  to  liberate,  deliver .  Aph.  idem. 
Np:  and 

np3  adj.  Dec.  IV.  b.  pure. 
ap:  to  smite,  strike. 

Na:  to  take ;  to  lake  away.  Ithpa. 

to  rise  up  against,  with  b2  . 
na:  to  forget ;  Ithpe.  to  forget  ;  to  be 
forgotten. 

■pa:  irreg.  PI.  of  NpN  . 

Npa:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  breath,  life. 
na:  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  an  eagle. 

•pna:  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  letter,  public  let¬ 
ter.  Persian. 

*n:  to  give.  Gram.  §  18.  note  2. 
in:  to  fall  off,  as  leaves  or  fruit. 
Aph.  to  shake  or  strip  off. 


0 

N22p  f.  Gr.  aap/3vKr],  sambuca,  a 
three-cornered  stringed  instru¬ 
ment,  similar  to  the  harp, 
bpp  to  erect.  Poal,  to  be  erected. 

*i2p  to  bear .  sustain  ;  to  expect,  Dan. 
7:25;  to  consider;  to  suppose; 
with  2 ,  to  hope  in. 

n:o  to  be  numerous  ;  to  be  increased. 
Aph.  to  cause  to  increase  ;  to  mul¬ 
tiply. 

“Up  to  fall  prostrate,  to  worship,  con¬ 
strued  with  b . 
tpSp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  affliction. 

N“pp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  much;  many. 

“pp  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  deputy,  governor. 
“pp  to  shut  up. 

n^bpJid  f.  i.  q.  Greek  avjjffcovia,  a 
bag-pipe. 

pio  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  end. 

CpO  to  come  to  an  end,  to  be  fulfilled, 
spoken  of  a  prediction.  Aph.  to 
put  an  end  to  any  thing. 
n^D  to  recede  ;  to  go  aside. 

■jn-po  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  perverseness ;  a 
crime. 

pnp  to  drive  out ,  expel. 
npD  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  side  ;  extremity. 
nrpp  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  the  jnoon. 
tpp  and  Cpp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  i.  q.  pio  , 
end,  extremity. 

bpD  to  understand.  Ithpa.  bpnpN  to 
look  at;  to  reflect;  to  consider; 
const,  with  2  ,  nib  ,  etc. 

“iPp  to  try,  prove.  Ithpa.  and  Aph. 
idem. 

bsp  adj.  Dec.  II.  a.  foolish,  unwise. 
jp^D  or  *jnbD^D  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  intelli¬ 
gent;  prudent. 

pbp  orpbp  to  ascend,  go  up.  Pa,  to 
cause  to  ascend ;  to  take  away ;  to 
destroy. 

p“pp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  perverse. 
bxap  m.  pr.  n.  Sammael,  an  evil 
angel,  sometimes  called  the  angel 


138 


of  death ,  and  sometimes,  prince  of 
the  air. 

?jqp  to  sustain.  Ithpe.  passive. 
x:q  to  hate. 

nxbq  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  hatred. 

‘iso  construed  with  b ,  to  aid,  assist. 
Pa.  idem. 

‘i?q  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and 
fiOSD  or  X'nqq  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  sup¬ 
port;  aid ;  strength. 

“)?q  (  =  Heb.  “ip&)  to  visit ;  to  in¬ 
spect. 

*iE5  and  “iEO  m.  Dec.  II.  a  scribe  ;  a 

learned  man.  The  emph.  form  is 

sometimes  written  X35G  . 

▼  :  ~ 

“isq  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  book. 
bqqq  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  Plur.  wide  oriental 
breeches. 

*ip-nq  f.  Dec.,  VII.  c.  vanity  ;  vacuity. 
Tpp  m.  Dec.  II.  b.  prefect ,  president. 
“inp  Pa.  “inq  to  hide ,  to  conceal ;  to 
destroy.  Compare  the  Greek  a<fia- 
vl^w,  which  has  both  these  senses. 

3? 

1X3?  and  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  collective 
noun,  (i.  q.  Heb.  1X3);  sheep, flocks. 
33?  to  make  ;  to  do,  perform  ;  to  ex¬ 
ercise  (authority,  etc.) ;  to  till  (the 
ground);  Ithpe.  to  be  made ;  to 
take  place,  happen.  Ithpa.  idem. 
“13?  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  servant. 
rn-'q?  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  work,  labor ; 
business. 

“I3S  1°  go  over;  to  transgress.  Aph. 
to  send  over,  transmit;  to  trans¬ 
gress. 

“Q3?  Dec.  III.  b.  that  which  is  beyond. 
X3H3  “13?.  the  other  side  of  the  Eu¬ 
phrates. 

"i?  prep,  and  conj.  to;  until.  With 
suffixes  it  takes  a  plural  form. 
xb““i3?  while  ....  not,  before,  ante- 
quam. 

X"J?;  )r  H3?  to  pass  away  ;  with  3  to 
go  to,  come  upon  ;  to  pass  away,  be 


abolished ,  destroyed.  Aph.  to  lake 
away  ;  to  depose. 

"'ll?  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  conception. 

1“i?  m.  pr.  n.  Eden .  (pleasure), 
c.  g.  Dec.  I.  b.  time  ;  a  year. 

“1313?  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  labor,  work. 

T  ' 

“n2  adverb,  yet ,  further,  moreover 
Sometimes  it  is  a  mere  expletive. 

601?  and  X^i?  f.  pi.  “pi? ,  iniquity, 
perverseness,  sin. 

d3>w  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  boy;  a  young 
man. 

p13?  to  be  straitened,  to  be  in  difficulty. 
Aph.  p">?x  to  molest ,  be  hostile  ;  to 
constrain. 

">13?  only  Dan.  2  :  35,  chaff.  In  Syr. 
and  Ar.  idem. 

112313?  m.  Dec.  II.  a. firmness,  strength. 

Xi?1??  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  ring,  seal-ring. 

X3T?  m.  pr.  n.  Ezra. 

X33?  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  counsel,  wisdom, 
i.  q.  Heb.  HX?  . 

b? ,  xb? .  b?b  and  b?bq  adv.  and 
prep,  above.  "(q  h*1?  idem. 

“p?  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  d.  an  eye  ;  a  foun¬ 
tain.  In  the  latter  sense  the  plu¬ 
ral  is  112*?? . 

15?  Pa.  denom.  to  look  at;  to  exam¬ 
ine  with  care,  comp.  Eng.  to  eye. 

“?■'?  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  watcher,  a  name  of 
angels,  or  of  an  order  of  angels, 
Dan.  4  :  10,  14,  20. 

b?  prep,  upon ;  above;  concerning; 
besides;  before;  against;  some¬ 
times  for  bx,  to,  toward,  etc. — 
it  b 3?  because. 

xb?  adv.  over,  above ,  followed  by  iq  . 

fib?  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  burnt-offering. 
Plur.  V.b?  . 

•  T  T  • 

fib?  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  occasion;  pretext. 

*'lb?;  and  “\lbi?  or  “'lb? ,  forms  of  b?  . 

*’1?  adj.  Dec.  VI.  upper  ;  highest ; 
emph.  fixb?  the  Most  High. 

I^b?  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  the  Most  High. 
Plur.  excel.  VWb?  idem. 

^b?  f  Dec.  VII.  b.  an  upper  chamber , 
a  lodging  chamber. 


.  139 


1*1* 


\ 


bb?  to  go  in ,  enter  ;  (of  the  sun)  £o 
set.  Aph.  baip  and  baian  to  bring 
in.  Hoph.  bain  pass. 
cbj>  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  and 

—  T 

obai  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  age  ;  eternity ; 
the  world.  Xob:r“ is>  or 

▼  :  it  ”  t  :  - 

for  ever. 

m.  Dec.  VI.  PI.  aoobsi,  an 
Elamite. 

3?b?.  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  i.  q.  Heb.  3ibp ,  a 
rib. 

02  c.  g.  a  people ,  irreg.  sing,  like 
Dec.  IV.  a.  plur.  “papa?,  emph. 
5013  2335  . 

02  prep,  with  ;  in.  Betore  suff.  the 
□  takes  Daghesh  1'orte  ;  as  ni32 . 
piia?  and  p"|i32  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  deep , 
unsearchable. 

ba2  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  and  b/32  Dec.  III.  a. 

T  r  — 

labor ,  toil. 

102  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  “las, 
wool. 

na2  to  answer  ;  to  speak  in  conversa¬ 
tion.  to  begin  to  speak. 

“,337  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  cloud. 

5]D2  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bough ,  branch. 
ba2  in.  Dec.  I.  a.  mulct,  fine. 
r:2  m.  D  ec.  III.  b.  time. 

V  V 

602  see  0b2 . 

pp2  ra.  Dec.  II.  a.  or  pp2  Dec  III. 

b.  affair  ;  business. 

*1S2  m.  Dec.  III. -with  suff.  PP22, 
branches ,  foliage. 

1E2  rn.  Dec.  III.  a.  dust. 
rrpsi  part.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  troubled ,  sad. 
0p2  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  the  heel , 
Heb.  op2 ;  an  end  ;  a  reward ,  Heb. 

0p2  to  be  crooked  ;  to  be  perverse.  Pa. 

to  make  crooked  ;  to  pervert. 

“P>  to  root  out.  pluckup.  Ithpe.  pass. 
“p3?  ra.  Dec.  I.  b.  stock ,  root. 

ra.  Dec.  I.  a.  enemy. 

““T  and  Pa.  012  to  mix.  Ithpa.  pass. 

in.  Dec.  I.  b.  wild  ass.  onager. 
r*~:  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  nakedness ;  hence 
dishonor. 


boi2 ,  Ithpa.  bpi2n2rt  to  be  stripped , 
rendered  naked. 

■'Kbpl?  adj.  Dec.  VI.  naked.  The 
forms  b->i3-i37 ,  “>^b“»C3^i3> ,  and  lab^aiS 
are  less  frequent. 

0*112  or  n_'“)3?  adj.  Dec.  I.  cunning. 
bi2  and  bi2  Dec.  I.  a.  and  “>bi2  Dec. 

••  t  ••  *  •  “ 

VI.  adj.  uncircumcised. 

Ob  2 ,  0b2  or  002.  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  an 
herb  ;  coll,  herbs. 

ib2  f.  5tib2  m.  num.  adj.  ten.  Plur. 
*plb2  twenty. 

nb2  and  rib  2  to  think ,  purpose. 

P2  ra.  Dec.  IV.  b.  i.  q.  P32 ,  time. 

"OPS  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  prepared ,  ready  ; 
about  to,  futurus.  Prefixed  to  the 
Inf.  it  forms  a  kind  of  Future 
tense. 

pipp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  ancient ,  old. 

“ins  to  be  rich.  Pa.  to  enrich. 

3 

“i 35) ,  136  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  corpse. 
“in?!)6  ra.  Dec.  I.  b.  verbal  from  nbo, 
service. 

D*!D  m.  Dec.  IV.  c.  the  mouth. 

*,lp^6  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  command,  pre¬ 
cept. 

nno  m.  irreg.  const,  nnp ,  pi.  *]ins  , 
governor  of  a  province, 
ins  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  (i ns  Dan.  2  :  41.) 
a  potter. 

bps  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an  under-gar¬ 
ment,  perhaps  breeches.  Kethib 
Dan.  3  :  21.  b^DS  ,  idem. 

*n^3  (**i6  Gen.  3:24,  Jer.  T.)  c.  g. 
fruit,  irreg.  Plur.  yn^B  .  rriiB ,  with 
suff.  *plS  Prov.  8  :  19. 
abs  to  divide. 
abs  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  half. 

5*abs  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  division  or  class 
T  \  • 

of  the  priests. 

0126  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  linen ;  a  piece  of 
linen. 

nbs  to  serve ;  to  worship ;  to  culti¬ 
vate  (the  ground) ;  to  observe  or 


'na 


140 


Dip 


♦ 


keep  (a  law.)  Compare  in  Latin 
colo ,  which  has  all  these  significa¬ 
tions. 

“.nbQ  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  service ,  worship 
of  God. 

•’Wtjbs  m.  Dec.  VI.  a  Philistine. 
pTDD  and  Pa.  p23  to  afford  delight. 

Ithpa.  to  enjoy ;  to  feast  upon. 

OQ  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  and  b.  a  part  ;  in 
relation  to  the  hand,  the  palm. 
“ioiiob  and  irqpQ  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  xj/aXrrjp, 
the  psaltery ,  a  stringed  instrument. 
Hengstenberg  considers  it  a  kettle¬ 
shaped  instrument ;  see  his  Authen¬ 
ticity  of  Daniel ,  article  Greek  words. 
iOEQ  and  Pa.  *1SfQ  to  deliver ;  to  make 
free. 

Pa.  to  command. 

^pQ  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  statute ,  command¬ 
ment. 

bps  m.  Dec.  II.  (Gr.  §  32,  note  3.)  iron. 
JTiQ  to  fourish  ;  to  blossom. 

0~3  to  divide. 

Ops  pr.  n.  Persia ;  the  Persians. 
',Op3  m.  Dec.  VI.  emph.  eOOpB  Ke- 
thib.  Dan.  6  :  29,  a  Persian. 

5p3  to  render  (good  or  evil  to  any 
one) ;  to  reward.  Ithpe.  idem  ;  to 
take  vengeance. 

pps  to  redeem,  liberate ;  hence  Dan. 
4  :  24.  to  expiate ,  or  perhaps  rather 
to  dismiss. 

10  p  3  to  divide ;  to  distinguish.  Pa. 
Part.  pass.  ispsp  Ez.  4:18,  dis¬ 
tinctly. 

‘P'Ops  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  copy. 
ods  to  extend,  reach  out. 

“ids  to  interpret ,  explain.  Pa.  idem. 
PlOB  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  interpretation , 
explanation. 

53ns  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  delicacies,  rich food. 
oars  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  word;  edict ;  letter ; 

thing ,  matter,  like  the  Heb.  PB'n. 
nns  to  enlarge ,  extend. 
nns  to  open.  Ithpeel  and  Ithpaal, 
pass. 

^3  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  breadth,  width. 

r  :  * 


2 

N32  to  be  willing ;  to  acquiesce. 
rVistBX  (Hebrew)  armies,  retained  in 
Chaldee  after  ^  and  ■'P'bx  . 

T  •  ••  V! 

f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  desire  ;  affair. 
332S  to  wet,  moisten.  Ithpa.  pass, 

“tx  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  side. — *1210  on  the 
part  of. — ^2ib  against. 

only  Dan.  *3:  14.  NP22P  is  it  your 
purpose  ?  or  was  it  your  design  ? 
p^p::  adj.  or  sub.  masc.  Dec.  I.  a. 

righteous ;  a  righteous  man. 

5tpp2J  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  justice,  righteous¬ 
ness  ;  alms- giving. 

1x52  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  (K  in  otio,)  the  neck. 
ribs  ,  *’bs  Pa.  to  pray ,  supplicate ,  in¬ 
voke. 

nb^  to  prosper.  Aph.  nb^n  to  make 
prosperous ,  promote  (a  person)  ;  to 
execute  prosperously  ;  also  intrans. 
to  prosper ,  be  successful ;  to  be  pro¬ 
moted. 

obs  and  dbs  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  an 
image,  idol ;  form ,  appearance. 

to  sprout ,  germinate.  Aph.  to 
cause  to  sprout ,  to  bring  forth. 
m.  Dec.  III.  a.  grief. 

"■pax  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  he-goat. 

"*.ss  c.  g.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  bird /  a  sparrow. 
tpns  or  7pp2£  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  needy , 
construed  with  b ,  in  need  of. 

P 

bop  and  Pa.  to  receive ,  accept ;  like 
3010 ,  to  listen  to ,  comply  with. 
Ithpa.  pass. 

bsjp  and  bsp  prep,  before ;  over 
against,  opposite  ;  because  of  With 
suff.  ftbop  ,  7|b3j3 ,  etc. — bopb  idem. 
— b3p“b3  because  of  •  conj.  because } 
therefore  ;  as. 

onpp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  holy ;  as  a  noun, 
saint  •  holy  being,  applied  to  an¬ 
gels. 

cPp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  that  which  is  be- 
- 1 : 


141 


mmm  I 


fore  ;  former  time ,  beginning  ;  the 
east. — y'P‘]p''P ,  (see  ip)  formerly  ; 
in  front ;  toward  the  east ,  on  the 
east  side. 

STp  and  tnp  prep,  before ,  in  relation 
to  place,  coram  ;  in  relation  to 
time,  ante.  It  takes  suffixes  like 
plural  nouns  ;  e.  g.  . 

— is?  D'lp,  antequam. — cn}3  often 

i.  q.  ya  ;  sometimes  i.  q.  cnp. 
simply. 

riEpp  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  origin ,  anti¬ 
quity.  nE'ip  "|33  prep,  before. 

*l7a”}p5  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  antiquity  •  meet¬ 
ing,  coming  together,  occursus. 

“’ppp  adj.  Dec.  VI .first. 

tinp  Pa-  t°  sanctify,  consecrate,  set 
apart. 

USTip  m.  Dec.  II.  a,  holiness,  sacred¬ 
ness. 

o ip  Fut.  D^ipp  to  rise  up,  to  stand.  Pa. 
D*p  to  establish,’  to  confirm  by  an 
oath  ;  to  swear  ;  to  sustain.  Aph. 
c^px  and  D->pn,  Fut.  o^p?  and 
cpprn  ,  Part.  D^pnp  }  to  set  up,  e.  g. 
a  statue,  an  image;  to  appoint, 
e.  g.  a  governor.  Hoph.  EPpp.  , 
Q-'pp  ,  or  with  the  form  of  Aphel, 
cpp  Dan.  7:4,  to  stand. 

’jS'Vp  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  offering,  oblation  • 
sacrifice,  victim. 

b::p  to  kill.  Pa.  idem,,  in  reference 
to  the  destruction  of  many.  So  in 
Syriac.  Ithpe.  and  Ithpa.  pass. 

"iiap  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  knot  •  joint ,  dif¬ 
ficult  problem. 

u^p  (i.  q.  Heb.  ypp)  m.  Dec.  III.  d. 

summer. 

Dip  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  covenant :  an 
edict,  decree. 

Dip  adj. "Dec.  I.  a.  established, firm. 

VP  m.  pr.  n.  Cain. 

tnrrp  Kethib  Dan.  3  :  5,  7,  etc.,  i.  q. 
Gr.  Kt^apts,  a  harp.  The  pointing 
is  that  of  Diinp ,  q.  v. 

bp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  voice.  PI.  ybp  thun¬ 
ders;  jbp  voices. 


bibp  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  light ;  quick f 
adv.  a  little. 

“ilDp  and  I'lDp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  girdle , 
a  belt. 

“ip  m.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  nest,  a  hive. 
ipp  to  buy ,  purchase. 

V?P  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  acquisition ;  pos¬ 
session,  substance. 
p^p  to  be  angry,  to  be  in  a  rage. 
p^p  m.  Dec.  III.  anger,  wrath. 
ysp  to  cut  off,  amputate ;  to  kill. 
Ithpe.  pass. 

npp  f.  Dec.  I.  b.  a  part ;  an  end. 

Npp  to  call ;  to  read. 

□np ,  2pp  and  Pa.  Dpp  to  approach  ; 
to  touch,  construed  with  D  ,  b ,  etc. 
to  bring,  to  offer.  Ithpe.  to  cleave 
to.  Aph.  to  bring  near  :  to  offer. 
Dpp  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  war,  contest. 

"Vp  a  city,  irreg.  Emph.  ip-jp,  XFipp  , 
arynp,  xinp  and  :srnip  ;  plur. 

TiHPj  and  i^P,  emph. 

xrmsip . 

“Jpp  and  yip  f.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  horn. 
Plur.  WP)  1?7P  and,  wit,h  Dual 
form,  ypPP  • 

ypp  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  piece,  fragment. 
DiEJp  m.  irreg.  emph.  Nptplp  truth. 
— XD12jlp2  indeed  :  interrocj.  in- 
deed  ? — Diiap  *(p  truly,  certainly. 
npjp  emph.  Npipp  Dec.  III.  a.  a  bow ; 
the  rain-bow. 

Oinrp  (Keri  for  0"imp ,  Da  n.  3  :  5,  etc. 
The  analogy  of  the  Greek  /adapts 
would  lead  us  to  point  the  latter 
Opn^p  .  The  Targums  have  Diinp 
which  appears  to  be  the  less  an¬ 
cient  form.)  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  harp. 

n 

and  P3*n  m.Dec.  I.  a.  head ;  sum 
amount.  Plur.  arid 

once  ’plDX'n  Ez.  5  :  10,  chiefs,  prin¬ 
cipal  men. 

Dp  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  plur.  •papsp  Dec. 
II.  a.  a  prince  ;  as  an  adj.  great ; 


142 


i 


plur.  proud,  arrogant  (speeches,  or 
actions.) 

rn n  to  be  great  or  numerous.  Pa.  i2n 
and  Aph.  “>2nN  to  exalt ,  set  in  an 
eminent  station ;  to  increase ;  to 
bring  forth  abundantly .  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  to  be  exalted ,  to  be  elevated. 
*Gn  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  greatness. 

“isi  and  xi2n  num.  adj.  ten  thousand, 
a  myriad.  Plur.  *^2n  and  *]2pn . 
•)i2n  rn.  Dec.  I.  a.  lord ,  master. 
iripn  num.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  fern.  S^ripn 
fourth. 

"pnpn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  nobleman,  prince. 
3pn  to  desire,  long  for.  Pa.  idem. 

T2 to  be  moved ,  excited  ;  to  be  angry. 

Aph.  to  excite  to  anger. 

T3;n  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  anger. 

bap  and  ban  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  a.  a  foot. 

Dual  and  plural  “pbjn  . 

1135“}  to  be  tumultuous.  Ithpe.  and 
Ithpa.  idem ;  to  rage ;  to  roar. 
Aph.  to  rage  ;  to  collect  together  in 
a  rage  or  with  tumult. 

‘H  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  aspect,  appearance. 
T^in  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  anger. 
n*n  c.  g.  Dec.  I.  a.  wind  ;  spirit. 
d!H  to  be  high  ;  to  be  exalted.  Palp. 
Dpin  to  exalt ,  praise.  Aph.  to  lift 
up.  Ithpal.  to  lift  up  one's  self 
C*H  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  height. 

7i  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  secret. 

T 

pin"}  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  distant,  remote. 
crn  and  Pael  enn,  to  pity,  compas¬ 
sionate  ;  to  love. 

*innn  f  Dec.  VIII.  c.  love  ;  affection , 
friendship. 

“pprn  (found  only  in  the  plural)  m. 

Dec.  III.  a.  mercy,  compassion. 
vnn  to  trust  in.  Ithpe.  construed 
with  br ,  idem. 

b^an  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  sent  away ;  de¬ 
serted. 

rnn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  scent ,  smell. 

UJin  ,  see  bxn  . 
cn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  high. 

Nen  and  nan  to  throw ,  cast:  to  set, 


ns  to 


place  ;  to  impose  (a  tax).  Ithpe. 
to  be  cast. 

tan  to  wink  significantly  ;  to  beckon. 
ian  adj.  Dec.  V.  b.  and  Dec.  VI.  de¬ 
ceitful. 

pn  and  Pa.  to  sing  for  joy  ;  to  speak 
joyfully. 

^n  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  and 

jopn  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  pleasure,  will ; 

benevolence ;  delight. 

■jiipn  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a,  thought. 

■)??.“}  adj.  only  Dan.  4  :  1,  [4  :  flour¬ 
ishing. 

rpn  and  Pa.  3?rp  to  break  in  pieces. 
osn  to  trample  upon,  tread  in  pieces. 
^bn  f.  Dec.  VIII.  c.  permission  ;  lib¬ 
erty;  power. 

p^bn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  wicked. 

nbn  to  note,  write  down;  to  write. 

3>bn  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and  ^a'bn  f  Dec. 

VII.  c.  wickedness. 

Kmnn  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  verbal  from 

t  •  ; 

nnn ,  trembling. 

to 

2b  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an  elder,  a  man  of 
grey  hairs. 

X22b,  i.  q.  K220 .  q.  v. 

Nab,  i.  q.  Nap,  to  be  or  become  great. 
Niab  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  great;  much , 
many ;  adv.  very,  exceedingly. 

D^b  to  set t  place  ;  to  appoint ;  to  issue 
(a  decree) ;  era  D!)b  to  show  respect ; 
tab  c*ib  to  give  a  name,  to  name. 
nab  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  i.  q.  nap ,  side. 

Only  Dan.  7  :  5,  Keri. 
bpb  Aph.  bpbN  to  understand ;  to  be 
wise.  Ithpa.  const,  with  2 ,  to  con¬ 
sider. 

lanbeb  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  intelligence. 

r  •  :  r  <—>  j 

understanding. 

Nab  i.  q.  Nap  to  hate.  (In  Chaldee 
it  is  generally  written  with  0 .) 
Part.  fcOb  an  enemy. 
nrb  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  hair. 
nsb  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  (PI.  *)}2p  Dec. 

VIII.  c.)  a  lip. 


143 


IE 

bxd ,  bxi23  or  b^d  to  ask ,  seek ,  re- 
<7wes£,  with  3  of  the  thing  asked, 
or  with  two  accusatives;  to  in- 
quire,  with  b  of  the  person. 

*<bj<i23  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  request ;  affair , 
concern,  matter. 

nxd  Ithpe.  -iKtntSK  and  Ithpa.  ixnm 
to  be  left ,  to  remain. 

*i*<123  ra.  Dec.  I.  b.  the  rest,  remainder. 

I.  niB  m.  Dec.  IV.  a.  the  sabbath. 

II.  D113  (contracted  from  2312?)  num. 
adj.  seven. 

“i  in  3 123  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  glory ,  honor. 
nsi23  Pa.  to  praise;  to  sing  praises, 
simply  to  sing. 

153123  m.  Dee.  III.  b.  a  tribe. 

3‘'3<23  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  fame. 
b->3i23  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  way ,  path. 

*':r3l23  ord.  adj.  Dec.  VI.  seventh. 

33123  num.  adj.  seven.  See  Par.  XI. 
in  the  Gram. 

p3!23  to.  forsake;  simply  to  leave. 
Ithpe.  pass. 

123313'  Pa.  to  terrify.  Ithpa.  pass. 
nr>i23  to  err.  Aph.  to  entice  to  sin. 
bat 23  f.  pi.  lb  2123  and  “(bad }  wife  of  a 
king;  hence  queen ,  Ps.  45:  10. 
b^id  Pa.  to  persuade ;  to  entice. 

"ind  Ithpa.  to  exert  one’s  self 
rd  Pael,  to  set ,  place.  Ithpa.  to  be 
made,  to  become. 

*13b*id  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  authority,  dominion. 
3^123  i.  q.  3d  . 

“'£*id-m.  Dec.  II.  a.  beauty.  Plur.  id. 
“i*id  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  wall. 

■ps’did  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  a  friend ;  a 
.  companion. 

*033123*1123  m.  pi.  inhabitants  of  Susa, 
the  winter  residence  of  the  Per¬ 
sian  kings. 

3rd  and  rnia  to  free,  deliver.  See 
Gram.  §  14.  2.  note. 

adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  corrupt,  wicked; 
as  a  noun  wickedness ,  crime. 


rod  to  discover ;  to  attain,  acquire. 

Aph.  idem.  Ithpe.  to  be  found. 
13123  to  dwell ,  rest.  Pa.  13123  to  cause 
to  dwell.  Hence 

srsd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  dwelling,  pre¬ 
sence  ;  the  divine  presence  and  glo¬ 
ry  as  it  appeared  in  the  tabernacle, 
rib  123  to  be  secure,  safe. 
nbd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  and 

▼  T 

*13123  f.  Dec.  VII.  c.  something  amiss, 
an  error,  faidt ;  a  failure. 
nibd  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  rest ,  tranquillity. 
nbd  to  send  away ;  to  put  off;  to 
stretch  out  (the  hand).  Pa.  and 
Aph.  idem.  Ithpe.  to  be  deprived. 

I.  abl23  and  I2bd  to  rule,  to  have  power, 
construed  with  3  or  b'S .  Aph.  to 
cause  to  rule,  to  give  dominion. 

II.  3bd  const,  with  3 ,  to  fall  upon, 
attack. 

1125bi23  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  ruler ,  governor. 
"jiabd  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  might ,  power ;  do¬ 
minion. 

urbd  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  powerful,  having 
power,  const,  with  3  over  any  thing ; 
const,  with  b  and  an  Inf.  permitted, 
lawful ;  as  a.  noun,  a  powerful 
man,  ruler,  officer. 

sbd i  to  complete.  Aph.  to  finish,  bring 
to  an  end ;  to  restore,  give  back. 
nbd  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  peace,  prosperity. 
ii3'bd  m.  pr.  n.  Solomon. 
nbdbd  f  irreg.  plur.  -pbdbd,  ibdbd, 
l^bdbd  and  nbdbd  ;  a  chain. 

3123 ,  3*1123  and  3123  m.  irreg.  emph.  N312J ; 
with  suff.  PT3123 ,  Iin3*il23  ;  plur. 
1»"!3d ,  const.  rfi3l23 ,  etc.  a  name. 
313  m.  pr.  n.  Shem. 

33123  Aph.  to  destroy. 

1213123  names,  pi.  of  3123  q.  v. 

*<13123  Plur.  emph.  heaven,  the  heav¬ 
ens.  The  sing,  and  the  absol. 
plur.  are  wanting  ;  const.  “'33123 . 

33113  Ithpolel  33ind*<  to  be  aston¬ 
ished,  amazed. 

13123,  xr3U3  (see  Gr.  §  31.  note  2.) 
adj  .fat,  rich. 


a -no 


144 


rmn 


BE'd  to  hear  ;  to  obey.  Ithpe.  to  be 
heard  ;  to  show  one's  self  obedient , 
to  be  obedient  or  submissive. 

•pppd  i.  q.  Heb.  phad ,  Samaria. 
dad  c.  g.  Dec.  III.  b.  the  sun. 
dad  to  serve  ;  to  minister ,  as  a  priest, 
etc. 

•jidad  m.  pr.  n.  Samson. 

*jd  c.  g.  Dec.  IV.  b.  a  tooth.  The 
dual  form  *pad  is  used  for  the  plu¬ 
ral.  So  in  Hebrew  CSiii . 

2<3 ti3  Fut.  Tseri.  to  be  changed ,  altered; 
to  be  different.  Pa.  to  change  ;  to 
violate ,  transgress  ;  pass.  Part,  di¬ 
verse,  different.  Ithpa.  to  change ; 
intrans.  to  be  altered.  Aph.  i.  q. 
Pael. 

I.  xid  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  sleep. 

II.  fi«d  and  ft  Dili  f  irreg.  const,  md : 
ernph.  Kind;  plur.  "pad;  a  year  > 
collectively  in  the  singular,  years. 

p3d  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fem.  K3n3d  Dec. 
VII.  a.  sharp. 

“DU3  m.  Dec.  I.  b.  edge  ;  point. 

N2d  f]  irreg.  emph.  &trq;d  and  NHpd  ; 
plur.  psd  ;  an  hour  ;  a  moment , 
any  short  period  of  time. 
ru'd  Ithpa.  "uridx  to  narrate ,  tell ; 

to  enumerate ;  to  speak. 

E32d  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  a  judge. 

ST’S  IB  or  VEd  f  Dec.  VII.  c.  bruising , 
trampling  under  foot ;  perhaps 
Gen.  3:  15,  Pseudo-Jon.  and  Jer. 
Targ.  safety ,  deliverance ;  or  rem¬ 
edy. 

bsd  Aph.  to  bring  down ,  humble  ;  to 
oppress ,  subdue. 
bad  adj.  Dec.  III.  low. 
isd  to  be  fair ;  to  be  agreeable. 
pd  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  leg. 

“iBnsd  rn.  Dec.  I.  a.  dawn  of  the 
morning. 

I.  and,  tnd  and  rnd  ,  to  dwell ;  to 
stop ,  rest.  Aph.  to  cause  to  dwell 
or  remain. 

II.  x“id  and  md  to  loosen ;  Part, 
ppd  loose ,  at  liberty ;  to  solve ,  ex¬ 


plain.  Pa.  idem;  also  to  begin. 
Ithpa.  to  be  loosed ,  spoken  of  the 
joints,  to  become  powerless. 
d-fd  m.  Dec.  III.  e.  a  root. 
sidnd  f  Dec.  VII.  t.  and 
^d^d  f  Dec.  VII.  b.  eradication; 
met.  banishment. 

nd  and  nd  num.  adj.  Dec.  IV.  b.  six. 
PI.  pnd  sixty. 

xnd  and  nrd  to  drink.  Construed 

r  :  ▼  : 

with  denoting  the  vessel  out  of 

j  o 

which  any  one  drinks. 

Ond  to  found,  establish ,  confrm. 
Aphel  idem. 

pnd  to  be  silent ,  keep  silence. 

n 

fitasiNtn,  defectively  written;  see 

xpsn  f  Dec.  VII.  a.  (PI.  ppNn  c.g. 

Dec.  I.)  afg-tree  ;  afg. 

-paFi  part.  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  fragile , 
weak,  easy  to  be  broken. 

"Op  to  break ,  to  break  in  pieces.  Pa. 

idem.  Jthpe.  and  Ithpa.  pass. 

“■an  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  and 
loin  f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  contention ,  strife. 
Jsvnn  fem.  Dec.  VII.  a.  revolving  in 
a  circle ;  hence,  continuance. — 
an^pna  constantly ,  continually. 
a*in  to  return  ;  to  turn  away,  to  avert. 

Aph.  to  return  (act.),  to  restore. 
rnn  to  be  astonished ;  to  be  terrified , 
to  tremble  for  fear. 

K'lb'in  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  a  generation  ; 
a.  nation ,  tribe. 

KSpt^n  f.  emph.  xnEj5psin ,  cause ,  oc¬ 
casion. 

pp^tt  m.  Dec.  II.  a.  strength ,  might. 
"Tin,  i.  q.  Heb.  lid ,  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  an 
ox. 

xnaupn  f.  Dec.  VIII.  a.  praise ;  a 
song  of  praise  ;  any  song. 
ninn  prep,  under.  It  takes  the  suf- 
fixes  of  plural  nouns, 
nnn  idem. 


nan 


145 


2nn 


f.  Dec.  VII.  a.  desire ,  appe¬ 
tite. 

‘DPI  Aph.  *)3ni<  to  prepare. 

ibtn  m.  Dec.  III.  a.  i.  q.  Heb.  abtii, 
snow. 

b^bPi  adj.  Dec.  I.a.  elevated ;  forti¬ 
fied. 

pbn  f  (masc.  PirbPi,  const,  m.  nnbm, 
e  “’pbn),  nura.  adj.  three.  Plur. 
•pnbn  ‘thirty. 

*ln*1bri  adj.  Dec.  VI.  third.  Once 
vvrirten  *'Pibn  Dan.  5  :  7. 

en  (i.  q.  Heb.  Cltt),  MB n,  and  *)Bin 
adv.  there  ;  thither.  cnia ,  painp 
thence. 

‘nan  m.  Dec.  III.  b.  a  wonder ,  a 
miracle. 

t;  Dec.  VII.  c.  perfection  /  in¬ 
tegrity. 

nsan  or  r,:an  f  pr.  n.  of  a  city  of  the 
Philistines,  Timnath. 

Njn  plur.  *p3in  i.  q.  NipJrtn ,  etc.  q.  v. 
num.  adj.  Dec.  I.  b.  second. 

nsia’isn  adv.  a  second  time ,  again. 

fcO^nsn  m.  pi.  Dan.  3:2,  3,  prob. 
judges  or  lawyers ,  jurisconsulti. 

(Ar.  to  give  counsel ,  to  pass 

sentence ;  hence  mufti.) 


Pjipri  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  strength  -  vehe¬ 
mence. 

“ppn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  right  ‘  fit,  conve¬ 
nient  /  firm. 

Cpptn  adj.  Dec.  I.  a.  strong ,  mighty. 

bpn  (i.  q.  Heb.  bplli)  to  weigh.  Pass. 
Praet.  to  be  weighed. 

*]pn  Pa.  to  adapt ,  arrange  •  to  pre¬ 
pare  ’  to  establish.  Aph.  idem. 
Hoph.  to  be  reestablished ,  restored. 

■Jpn  adj.  Dec.  II.  a.  i.  q.  ‘ppn. 

SIB*?  to  grow .  as  a  tree  ;  to  become 
strong ,  powerful.  Pa.  to  confirm , 
establish. 

C]pn  and  DpPi  ra.  Dec.  I.  a.  power ,  au¬ 
thority. 

Qjnn  to  explain ,  interpret.  Part, 
pass,  cinna  interpreted. 

’p'ntn  num.  adj.  two  •  both.  See 
Gram.  Par.  XI.  and  §  42.  I.  a. 
note. 

“ip2?:",;*nn  num.  adj.  twelve. 

Tpin  and  Pa.  Tpn  to  expel ,  drive  out. 

3“iin  and  Pa.  3 “tin  to  break  asunder  , 
to  destroy. 

:nrn  rn.  Dec.  III.  a.  and  b.  door • 
— fiOba  3PPi  the  king’s  palace. 

3Hin  m.  Dec.  I.  a.  porter ,  watchman 
at  a  gate. 


APPENDIX. 


A.  The  Rabbinic  Dialect. 


§  1.  This  dialect  is  so  called  from  the  principal  writers  who  have  em 
ployed  it,  viz.  the  Jewish  Rabbins.  Their  most  important  writings  have 
generally  had  respect,  either  to  the  Hebrew  language,  the  Scriptures  of 
the  Old  Testament,  or  to  the  traditions  which  constitute  the  Oral  Law , 
and  which  the  Jews  regard  as  of  equal  authority  with  the  Scriptures. 
These  writings  have  been  composed  in  various  ages,  chiefly  since  the 
eleventh  century  of  the  Christian  era.  Among  the  most  valuable  of  them 
are  the  commentaries  of  Solomon  Jarchi,  Aben  Ezra  and  David  Kimchi, 
which  are  published,  with  others,  in  the  Hebrew  Rabbinic  Bibles  of  Bom- 
berg  and  Buxtorf.  That  of  Solomon  Jarchi  is  extant  also  in  a  Latin 
translation  published  by  J.  F.  Breithaupt,  (Gotha  1713,  3  vols.  small  4to.) 

For  a  general  account  of  Rabbinic  writers,  see  Bartolocci’s  Bibliotheca 
Rabbinica,  Wolf’s  Bibliotheca  Hebraea,  Vols.  I.  and  III.,  and  the  11  Vitae 
Celebrium  Rabbinorum  ”  in  Reland’s  Analecta  Rabbinica. 

§  2.  The  Rabbinic  resembles  the  ancient  Hebrew  more  nearly  than  it 
does  the  Chaldee,  although  Chaldee  forms  are  by  no  means  rare.  The 
following  are  the  principal  points,  in  respect  to  which  it  varies  from  both 
Hebrew  and  Chaldee. 

1.  Form  of  the  letters.  These  may  be  characterized  as  a  sort  of  He¬ 
brew  running  hand.  They  are  the  following: 


Rabbinic. 

Hebrew. 

Rabbinic. 

f> 

i 

3 

3 

C  V 

a 

a 

1  5 

7 

P 

n 

P 

y 

<1  5 

) 

7 

T  * 

V 

n 

P 

p 

13 

*3 

» 

t 

1  ^ 

1  3 

P 

Jlebt  ew. 

b 

D  » 

*1  = 
O 

2> 

r  22 

p 

n 

w 

n 


THE  RABBINIC  DIALECT. 


147 


2.  Vowels.  The  Rabbinic  is  entirely  destitute  of  vowel-marks,  with  the 
exception  of  a  few  books  which  have  been  pointed  for  the  convenience  of 
learners.  (Cellarius  Inst.  Rab.  I.  1.)  What  vowels  are  to  be  supplied  in 
reading,  must  be  determined  by  a  knowledge  of  forms,  and  by  the  sense 
in  each  particular  case.  Where  however  ambiguity  would  otherwise  ex- 
st,  the  letters  ,  )  and  >  are  frequently  inserted  ;  f>  in  such  cases  indicating 
the  a  sound  (Q,amets  or  Pattahh),  )  the  o  or  u  sound  (Hholem,  Shureq, 
Qjbbuts  or  Q,amets  Hhatuph),  and  >  the  e  or  i  sound  (Tseri,  Seghol  or 
Hhireq.) 

3.  The  construct  state  of  nouns  often  appears  instead  of  the  abso¬ 
lute. 

4.  The  prefixes  7  (Chaldee)  and  £  (Hebrew,  for  pjrf))  are  employed 
almost  indiscriminately. 

5.  The  conjugation  Piel  is  distinguished,  by  the  insertion  of  Yodh  be¬ 
tween  the  first  and  second  radicals;  e.  g.  73*7  (  =  “>2^);  Hophal ,  by  the 
insertion  of  Vav  after  the  preformative  He;  e.  g.  (=“i??n  or  “Sill). 
Compare  No.  2.  above. 

6.  From  Niphal  and  Hithpael  a  new  conjugation  is  formed  in  Rabbinic, 
called  Nithpael ,  sometimes  reflexive,  but  generally  passive  in  signification. 
It  is  distinguished,  in  the  Praeter.  by  the  formative  prefix  po  ;  elsewhere, 
it  does  not  differ  in  form  from  Hithpael. 

7.  Many  words  occur  in  Rabbinic,  which  are  not  found  in  Hebrew  or 
Chaldee.  They  are,  for  the  most  part,  theological  or  philosophical  terms, 
and  are  not  unfrequently  borrowed  from  foreign  languages,  especially  the 
Greek ;  e.  g.  ,  i.  q.  arj^elov. 

8.  Abbreviations  abound.  These  are  fully  explained  by  Buxtorf  in  his 
treatise,  De  Abbreviaturis  Hebraicis.  Compare  also  Wolf’s  Bibliotheca 
Hebraea  Vol.  IV.  p.  251. 

For  the  means  of  obtaining  a  complete  acquaintance  with  the  Rabbi¬ 
nic,  the  reader  is  referred  to 

Reland’s  Analecta  Rabbinica,  particularly  the  first  two  works  in  that 
collection,  viz.  Genebrard’s  Isagoge  Rabbinica  and  Cellarius’  Institutio 
Rabbinismi. 

Danzius’  Rabbinismus  Enucleatus. 

Opitius’  Chaldaismus. 

Otho’s  Institutiones  Linguarum  Orientalium. 

Tychsen’s  Elementa  Dialecti  Rabbinicae. 

Buxtorf’s  Lexicon  Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum. 

§  3.  The  commentary  of  R.  David  Kimchi  on  Joel  3 :  1,  2,  (Eng.  Ver. 


148 


APPENDIX. 


2  :  28,  29),  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  this  dialect.  The  words  of  the 
prophet  are 


D3T?pT  combm  tjrma  siwXaDi  nm-bp-br  ‘rvn-rx  ‘n’isdx  mm 


rvinEttjrrbsi  onpyrnbr  cm  :  siatm  mV'in  cc-mm  ma'brH  nirfbn 

.  T  -  t  ;  -  - ;  •  t  -s  it  -  - :  :  •  :  v  *.•  '  -  “t 


;  imi tx  msm  nann 

•  v  ’»  :  v  t  •*  r 


COMMENTARY. 

ppPc  ’ri  p  npf>  pp£i  '  ['3  p»rr  ]  p’P’P  pnpfo  P’Pi  ipp  •  p  »ppf>  p’pi 
if’rppi  mcp  7ir  »p  ppic  pn7’  f>ii  ir7p  ppr  7Pf>  ■  »pf>  ifnc’  37p  »p  ppr7’i 
fnpi  7tr  ifapp  f>ii  ppit  pr*7’  »pif>  mpc  jPt  fo»  Pn7’P  pfr  npf>  ipf>  ’:ri 
ip  ir  Tn  *jircf>  :  [f>»  p’re’]  pip’  pf>  pr7  pf>p  r>f»ir  >p  ppfcc  p’cpp  piP’i 

P7PP  M  P”P  ’il'3  ipi  13’f>1  7C3  ip  7Pf>  PlpP3  7Pfo  IPP  if>7C’3  C17’P  ’  7C3 

P3P  P7P  P  •  [ip  P’rC’]  7E3  ip  f>3»  *  [p"pp  P’ip]  7C3  ip  *]73’1  7Plf>1  •  1731 

•  p’:rppi  p’injp  'ip  ip  7pf>i  ‘  pp’ir  C7pp pn  prpi  p”if>7P  ifnr  ir it3 ip 
pr7  pn  f»p  ’pm  .  [£"i  ’P7’]  pii7J  7n  ppppri  *pif>  m»  piip  »p  ppfc  ipp 
p^r  pn  P3’3i  pppp  pn  »r  p"pf>i  p  pn  rir  pp;i  [f>"»  pw]  7pfa  ipp  ipcpi 

*  ifopp’C  7r  7137P  PP  Pp^P3  73J’  pipC  “]P7J’C  ’3PP1  '  PIP’  pf>7’l  pr7  pn  P713J1 

7C3  ip  ir  7pf>  P17P  P1P’PC31  •  OP’p1331  PP’33  lf>331  f>if>  lf>33p»  oilP  »P  7Pf>  f>i  »p 
cilP  f>i  DP’71P3  DP’3pf  7>pf>1  •  DP’P1331  OP’33  lf>331  f>if>  ip  7P^  fi  pf>1333  ipf? 

Pfl33P  D7f>i  f>13p  fi  »P  i"t  j1P”P  p  PCP  ’37  37P  il7JP  CPPP  3pPE  *|77  ir  f>1P1 

if>3pp»  pi33Pi  O’pspi  •  PP’i’P  pr3  r3P  ii  P7p  *jp  cf>  fif’  pnpip  pr  '’tfa 
•pwvtp  pIPlip  7Pf>t  1PP  piipp  pf>7P3  ppi  p’pp  pf>133Pl  ^’33P  lf>1PC  1PP  ppn»33 
rif5  pf’PPS  P  PPf”33  P’P’  pf>  [3'’  737P3]  PPf’t  1PP  '  P’f”33P  317  pf>133  PP’P  |P1 
7r  nsrc  p’f”3:3  vpc  ipp  pip  pirpi  pi  piirp  PP3  i*p»  jpi  *  13  737^  piip3  r7ip^ 
pnrpp  ’P’  P7f>p  pwc3  7cf>  piirp  x  7pi  p:pi  p'r  w»37  pcpp  pp3  p*p»  »iif>c 
i2?7i  p’7i  i7P»i  [fp  '’rc’J  7Pf>c  ipp  *  p’7:rp  ir  pji  spirit)  »P’i  pnppp  »p»i 
if7t’  pf>  173r’1  i^7C’  pf>3l7Pr’P  »ri  pplf>  PJI  PP’P71P1  pp’7pf>  7P3  ’331  PP3^ 
|’:rp  3ni  pn  PP3  p’ppc  i'S  pnp  pip’rt  ]”:n  *  ipcpi  Pr7  pn  ppi  p’pp 
'  '  p’3i3ppi  jp  pn  pitn’  3cr  in  717  p»3  ir  ’pppci  7Pf>  jp  ’  pp’pcp 


Translation  of  the  Commentary. 

■p-nnx  mm  .  as  if  he  had  said  tnp*n  nnnxa  mm,  (Isa.  2:  2.)  And 
it  shall  come  to  pass  in  the  last  days.  He  employs  the  expression  “jp— '7PIX, 
after  this ,  because  he  had  said,  “  And  ye  shall  know  that  I  am  in  the  midst 
of  Israel.”  His  meaning  was,2  Ye  shall  know  now.  but  not  with  a  perfect 
knowledge;  for,  as  yet,  ye  continue  to  sin3  before  me.  But  after  this 
knowledge,  the  time  will  come  when  ye  shall  know  me  with  a  perfect 
knowledge,  and  shall  no  longer  sin,  viz.  in  the  days  of  the  Messiah,  when 
it  is  written4  that  the  earth  shall  be  full  of  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord. 
(Isa.  11:9.) 


; 


THE  RABBINIC  DIALECT. 


149 


i:  I  will  pour  out  my  Spirit  upon  all  flesh.”  The  meaning  is,  upon  Is¬ 
rael  ;  as  it  is  written5  in  other  places,  all  jlesh ,  when  the  expression  does 
not  relate  to  all  beings  that  possess  life,  but  to  man  alone.  So  it  is  writ¬ 
ten,5  “Let  all  flesh  bless,  etc.”  (Ps.  145:21,)  and,  “All  flesh  shall  come, 
etc.”  (Isa.  66  :  23.)  So,  in  a  restricted  sense,  here,  “  all  flesh  ”  relates  to 
Israelites  fit  to  receive  the  Holy  Spirit. 

“  All,”  that  is,6  great  and  small ;  as  it  is  written,5  “  For  they  shall  all 
know  me,  from  the  least  of  them,  qnto  the  greatest  of  them,”  (Jer.  31 :  34.) 

“My  Spirit.”  that  is,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and  wisdom;  as  it  is  writ¬ 
ten.5  (Isa.  11:2.)  “  The  Spirit  of  the  Lord7  shall  rest  upon  him,”  and  the 

prophet  goes  on  to  explain,8  “  the  spirit  of  wisdom  and  understanding,  the 
spirit  of  counsel  and  might,  the  spirit  of  knowledge  and  of  the  fear  of  the 
Lord.” 

After  their  understanding  shall  have  been  purified,  the  power  of  speech 
in  some  of  them  shall  be  increased  until  they  shall  prophesy.  For  he 
says,  not.,  “They  shall  all  prophesy,”  but,  “Your  sons  and  your  daugh¬ 
ters  shall  prophesy.”  In  respect  to  the  effusion  of  the  Spirit ,  he  says, 
“upon  all  flesh;”  but  in  regard  to  prophecy ,  he  says,  not  all,  but,  “'And 
your  sons  and  your  daughters  shall  prophesy.”  So  he  says,  “your  old  men 
and  your  young  men,”  not  all  of  them.  And  this  accords  with  the  man¬ 
ner  in  which  that  wise  and  great  man,  R.  Moses  Ben-Maimon,  of  blessed 
memory,9  wrote.  “  The  gift  of  prophecy  (he  says)  is  not  conferred  upon 
a  man,  even10  with  instruction,  unless  nature  prepared  it  for  him  at  the 
time  of  his  birth.” 

The  sons  and  the  daughters  shall  prophesy  in  their  youth,  like  Samuel 
the  prophet.  And  the  prophetic  revelations  shall  be  given  to  them  in 
seeing  dreams  ;  as  he  says,  “  dreams,  visions.”  And  such  was  the  prophe¬ 
sying  of  most  of  the  prophets;  as  it  is  written,6  (Num.  12:  6.)  “If  there  be 
a  prophet  among  you,  I,  the  Lord,  will  make  myself  known  to  him  in  a 
vision,  and  will  speak  unto  him  in  a  dream.”  So  also  there  shall  be  de¬ 
grees  among  them,  one  more  exalted  than  another,  as  there  were  among 
the  prophets  who  have  passed  ;  until  perhaps  there  will  be  among  them 
one  equal  to  Moses  our  master,  (peace  be  upon  him.)11  And  observe,  he 
mentions  three  degrees  which  [correspond]  to  the  ages  of  man,  childhood, 
youth,  and  old  age. 

“  Also  upon  the  servants  ;”  as  it  is  written,6  (Isa.  61  :  5,)  “And  stran¬ 
gers  shall  stand  and  feed  your  flocks,  and  the  sons  of  the  alien  shall  be 
your  ploughmen  and  your  vine-dressers.”  And  even  upon  them,  because 
they  dwell  in  the  land  of  Israel  and  serve  Is”ael,  shall  be  the  spirit  of 
Knowledge  and  understanding. 


150 


APPENDIX. 


The  expression  pouring  out  of  the  Spirit,  is  equivalent  to  saying,  “The 
Spirit  shall  be  upon  them  abundantly ,”  [so  as  to  be]  like  a  literal  pouring 
out.  Thus  it  is  written,5  (Zech.  12  :  10),  u  And  I  will  pour  upon  the  house 
of  David,  and  upon  the  inhabitants  of  Jerusalem,  the  spirit  of  grace  and  of 
supplications.” 

Notes. 

1  Verse  27.  2  Lit.  he  said.  *?pf>  is  used  with  very  great  latitude.  See 

below,  note  4.  3  Lit.  ye  return  and  sin.  lit.  concerning 

which  it  is  said.  £  is  instead  of  .  5  Compare  the  preceding  note. 

6  iS,  an  abbreviation  for  “?vii  that  is  to  say.  '  .  abbreviation 

of  ■  the  name .  i.  e.  Jehovah.  8  Abbreviations.  Fully  written  they 

would  read  *p  FFtV  •  *p  is  a  Rabbinic  particle,  equivalent  to  the  He¬ 
brew ‘3 .  £yt>  is  Piel  ( =  tzns),  comp.  §  2.  5.  9  i  t,  abbreviation  of 

TCToi  •  10  ’EtS  j  abbreviation  for  li’pfq ,  which  is  contracted  of  the 

two  particles  ii’f>  fjf>,  even  if.  11  VS  i.  e.  CticD  via? .  *So  the  Mo¬ 
hammedans  say  whenever  they  repeat  the  name  of  their  prophet. 


To  the  above  outline,  which  was  prepared  for  the  first  edition  of  this  work, 
it  gives  me  pleasure  to  add  here  that  the  student  may  obtain  a  good  idea  of 
the  Rabbinical  writers  and  their  works  from  a  volume  by  the  Rev.  Prof. 
Samuel  H.  Turner,  D.  D.,  entitled  “  Biographical  Notices  of  seme  of  the  most 
distinguished  J ewish  Rabbies,  and  Translations  of  portions  of  their  Commen¬ 
taries,  &c.”  New  York,  1847;  12mo,  pp.  245. 


THE  SAMARITAN  DIALECT. 


151 


B.  The  Samaritan  Dialect. 

§  1.  The  Samaritan,  like  the  Rabbinic,  holds  a  place  between  Hebrew 
and  Chaldee.  See  above,  Intr.  2.  note  2.  A  brief  view  of  it  will  there¬ 
fore  be  appropriate  in  this  Appendix. 

§  2.  Its  characters  are  those  which,  among  all  the  oriental  alphabets, 
most  nearly  resemble  the  letters  found  on  ancient.  Hebrew  coins;  and  hence 
we  may  infer  were  essentially  the  same  with  the  Hebrew  letters  before 
the  Babylonish  captivity.  See  above,  Gram.  §  1.  They  are  as  follows  : 


A 

f 

B 

A 

2 

A 

n 

■flT 

£ 

I 

a 

a 

D 

¥ 

P 

T 

"T 

x 

b 

A 

"1 

%' 

n 

ft 

12) 

t 

1 

(*;»  b 

j 

A 

n 

T 

D 

H 

n 

V 

V 

Samaritan  has 

no  peculiar  forms 

for  final  letters,  nor 

does  it  ex- 

hibit  any  vowel  points. 

§  3.  The  following  are  the  principal  grammatical  peculiarities  of  this 
dialect. 

1.  Nouns  have,  as  in  Chaldee  and  Syriac,  an  Emphatic  State,  but  em¬ 
ploy  ^  instead  of  in  forming  its  termination. 

2.  Masculine  nouns  usually  form  the  plural,  as  in  Hebrew,  by  the  ter¬ 
mination  5  although  plurals  ending  in  bin  are  also  found.  Femi¬ 

nines  form  their  plurals,  like  the  Chaldee,  in  an ,  but  written  bA  with  A 
as  a  mater  lectionis. 

3.  The  personal  pronouns,  both  separate  and  suffixed,  nearly  all  agree 
with  the  Hebrew;  the  demonstrative  and  relative  with  the  Chaldee. 

4.  The  conjugations  of  verbs  are  the  same  as  in  Chaldee,  and  the  in¬ 
flection  almost  the  same  throughout. 

5.  Vav  conversive  is  not  found. 

6.  Their  punctuation  is  peculiar.  A  single  dot  is  placed  after 

*  This  form  of  the  letter  Nun,  which  appears  in  some  alphabets,  seems  to  have 
been  invented  by  the  type-founders  to  get  rid  of  the  close  resemblance  between 
Nun  and  Pe.  It  is  not  sustained  by  MSS.  or  old  editions.  See  Walton,  Castell, 
Cellarius,  &c.  passim.  The  forms  of  Pe  and  Nun  are  confounded  in  the  Samaritan 
alphabets  gi  ven  in  several  of  our  Hebrew  grammars. 


152 


APPENDIX. 


every  word ;  two  dots  placed  horizontally^**^  are  sometimes  employed 

for  a  colon;  and  two  placed  perpendicularly  (*)  or  three  with 

or  without  additional  lines,  ( — ♦:)  0r  (=♦:)  or  ( — <;)  for  a  period. 

§  4.  The  first  five  verses  of  Genesis,  taken  from  the  Samaritan  version 
of  the  Pentateuch,  may  serve  as  a  specimen  of  this  dialect.  As  it  is  with¬ 
out  points  I  will  place  the  pronunciation  in  Chaldee  letters  at  the  right. 


Samaritan  Text. 

*  s^ZV  '  3fAZA^¥U  (1) 

*  *  Am  *  ^za 


•  W^At  (2)  :  WZA'AmZ 

**mh?flm  At^c 

•  rnjA  •  zv  ’ 

•g^rzA  'nmt  *^z?a 

4  (TUA  *  ZV  * 

*^za  *ujz!az  (3)  : 

•Am  *3f3fZA  (4) 

••u^jaz’sv  Az^r^mtb 

•  *  bma  *  ^za 

*wZ)Z  (5)  -hmsz 

*iS«filA  ^mrbZ  4^ZA 

•stmzmz  •  •  ^^uzt 

:  "lAJUTl 


Pronunciation. 

Ottbt:  nrmspa 

rrab  n^  nnbs 

T  -  -  T  T 

nyptfi  t  wix  rm 

t  :  -  •:  t  :  -  -  : 

mas©  mn 

•  It  ••  :  T  T  T  *. 

^£2*  by  rotim 

-  -  -  t  :  t  : 

nnba  mm  rrainn 

t  t  -s  -  •  :  t  ; 

^bk  by  nnubft 

••  —  -  t  : —  : 

nnb^  "Ycxi  :  mm 

t  t  •*:  t  t  - 

:  nm  mm  nm  mn 
m  nnba  ntm 

-  t  t  *:  t  - 

tthpfcO  nb  abn  mm 
mm  ■pn  nnba 
pyn  :  natpn  ■prn 
nma  mmb  nnba 

t  ••  t  :  t  t 

mb">b  pyT  nabnbi 
-iBsmm  timnini 
j  mn  ntm 

X  -•  T 


Note.  The  first  word  is  nn^p  contracted  from  nntiasip  beginning.  The 
second  is  a  quadriliteral  he  created ,  not  found  in  the  cognate  dialects. 

The  rest  of  these  five  verses  may  be  said  to  be  almost  entirely  Chaldee. 

§  5.  For  full  information  respecting  the  Samaritan  dialect  and  version 
}f  the  Pentateuch,  consult 

Io.  Morinus,  Opuscula  Hebreo-Samaritana. 

Walton,  Prolegomena  to  the  Polyglott  Bible,  ch.  11. 

Castell,  Heptaglott  Lexicon,  and  Grammar  prefixed. 

Chr.  Cellarius,  Horae  Samaritanae,  and 
Uhlemann,  Institutiones  Linguae  Samaritanae. 


THE  END. 


/ 


I 

I 


Date  Due 

FACULTY 

0  Ho  48 

m  lM 

■s 

i®* 

imm 

sr 

flOV  1  2  '6S 

*YV  ^  tirr' 

> 

« 

1  . . uni . n 

i 

| 

i 

■ 

• 

! 

4 

. 

1  . . 

* 

1 

| 

i 

1 

E 

a 

s 

! 

| 

|  f> 

j 

fc 

